tamm20 materials management extended

© SAP AG 1999

TAMM20 Materials Management - Extended

TAMM20TAMM20TAMM20

Materials Management -ExtendedMaterials Management -Materials Management -ExtendedExtended© SAP AG

AMM20 Materials Management - Extended

B

Material Number: 50032303

System R/3 T

Release 4.6

July, 2001

© SAP AG 1999

Copyright 2001 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Neither this training manual nor any part thereof maybe copied or reproduced in any form or by any means,or translated into another language, without the priorconsent of SAP AG. The information contained in thisdocument is subject to change and supplement without priornotice.

All rights reserved.

Copyright

Trademarks: Microsoft ®, Windows ®, NT ®, PowerPoint ®, Win

Word ®, Excel ®, Project ®, SQL-Server ®,

HTML Help ®

brücken

be Systems Inc.

rademark of Intel Corporation. demarks of Netscape

of Informix Software Incorporated.

ink, SAP Business Workflow, and ed

trademarks of SAP AG. Other products, services, logos, or brand names included herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Multimedia Viewer ®, Video for Windows ®, Internet Explorer ®, NetShow ®, andare registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Lotus ScreenCam ® is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation. Vivo ® and VivoActive ® are registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc. ARIS Toolset ® is a registered Trademark of IDS Prof. Scheer GmbH, Saar Adobe ® and Acrobat ® are registered trademarks of Ado TouchSend Index ® is a registered trademark of TouchSend Corporation. Visio ® is a registered trademark of Visio Corporation. IBM ®, OS/2 ®, DB2/6000 ® and AIX ® are a registered trademark of IBM Corporation. Indeo ® is a registered t

Netscape Navigator ®, and Netscape Communicator ® are registered traCommunications, Inc.

OSF/Motif ® is a registered trademark of Open Software Foundation. ORACLE ® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation, California, USA. INFORMIX ®-OnLine for SAP is a registered trademark UNIX ® and X/Open ® are registered trademarks of SCO Santa Cruz Operation. ADABAS ® is a registered trademark of Software AG The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG; ABAP/4, InterSAP, RIVA, R/2, R/3, R/3 Retail, SAP (Word), SAPaccess, SAPfile, SAPfind, SAPmail, SAPoffice, SAPscript, SAPtime, SAPtronic, SAP-EDI, SAP EarlyWatch, SAP ArchiveLALE/WEB. The SAP logo and all other SAP products, services, logos, or brand names includherein are also trademarks or registered

© SAP AG 1999

Target Group

Audience:Consultants from SAP Partners

Project team members from SAP Customers

Duration: 5 days

© SAP AG 1999

Course Prerequisites

Participants

Member of the R/3 implementation team

Junior consultants (less than one year‘s SAP experience)

Knowledge

Detailed knowledge of business processes in selectedapplication areas

Basic knowledge of graphical user interfaces (GUI) suchas Microsoft Windows

Foundation Knowledge in MM (TAMM10 or alternativestandard courses)

© SAP AG TAMM20 1-1

© SAP AG 1999

Course Goals

Section Overview

Course Content

Contents:

Course Overview


© SAP AG 1999

Gain the basic knowledge and understanding ofthe R/3 system in order to effectively implementone of the following application areas:

Accounting

Controlling

Sales and Distribution

Materials Management

Production and Production Planning

Human Resources

Work as a project member under the guidance ofa senior consultant

Course Goals

This course will prepare you to:


© SAP AG 1999

Section Overview Extended

Section Course Overview

Section More Procurement Details

Section Inventory Mngt. & Logistics Execution

Section Vendor Evaluation

Preface

Appendices

Section Procurement ofExternal Services

Section Logistics InformationSystem (LIS)


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Business Processes

Unit Special Topics

Content: More Procurement Details

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Preface

Content: Inventory Mngt. & Logistics Execution

Unit Good Receipts

Unit Good Issues

Unit Overview of LogisticsExecution

Unit Organizational Units andMaster Data


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Vendor Evaluation

Content: Vendor Evaluation

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Value Limits for Unplanned Services

Unit Entry and Acceptanceof Performed Services

Unit Invoice Verification

Unit Overview External Services

Unit Master Data

Unit Service Specifications

Unit Optimized Procurement

Content: Procurement of External Services

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Flexible Analysisin LIS

Unit LIS Environment

Unit Data Warehouse Concepts

Unit Standard Analysis in LIS

Unit Early Warning System

Content: Logistics Information System (LIS)

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Overview Standard Courses

Unit Menu Paths

Unit Others

Content: Appendices

Preface


© SAP AG 2000

Section: More Procurement Details


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Business Processes

Unit Special Topics

Content: More Procurement Details

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Materials Planning

Purchasing

Goods Receipt

Invoice Verification

Master Data

Conditions / Sources of Supply

Optimized Purchasing

Inventory Management / Reservations

Procurement Processes

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Estimate some of your Foundation Knowledgeabout the processes in procurement.

Acquire extended knowledge.

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

Procurement Processes: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

This exercise is intended to test andconsolidate your knowledge.

You should be able to practice this exercise byyourself.

In this unit you find some of the documentsfrom the course TAMM10 for self-study.

If necessary, use these documents and the R/3Online Help Library. Or ask your trainer.

Procurement Processes: Hints to the Exercise


Exercises

Procurement Processes

Estimate how much you have understood of the previous subjects

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:

•

e following business scenario. Map the required processes in the SAP System to meet your material management requirements.

1 wo-1

ork , use your course documents.

swer any questions. tions are provided for these exercises.

1-2

most

arios thoroughly and use them in the correct

Please make a note of the data and documents you create on this exercise sheet.

You have various roles in th

Fore rd 1 Aim of exercise

This exercise is intended to test and consolidate your knowledge. Wthrough the exercises yourself and, if necessary

The instructor will anNo solu

General information

In this exercise (unlike the other ones) you are provided only with theimportant information you need to do the exercises. It is therefore essential that you read the scenbusiness processes. You will find that it is up to you to provide much of the information and data.

A functional business process is provided so that you can check whether you have completed the exercise successfully.


1-3

ata and settings.

ise, work wi

20-## (T##)

this vendor via e central maintenance transaction as a copy of vendor master record T-

ank Transfer

Mannheim

utomatic Purch. Order: yes

Good Luck!

Basic data

You are provided with information on all the required d

Unless you are told otherw th: Company code: 1000 (IDES)

Purchasing organization: 1000 (IDES)

Plant: 1000 (Hamburg)

Purchasing group: LO0

MRP controller: 0##

Use only vendors T-K12A##, T-K12B##, and T-K12C## for your processes. If the vendor master T-K12B-## does not exist, please createthK12A-## using the following data (incl. Accounting view):

Company code: 1000 (IDES)

Purchasing organization: 1000 (IDES)

Account group: LIEF

Address data: (Your choice)

Recon. Account: 160000

Payment methods: Check and B

Order currency: UNI

Terms of payment: 0002

Incoterms: FOB

A


2 ine2-1 ust finished manufacturing a new product. To manufacture this

Teil-## goes into full production and, in future, will be available as a spare part for internal customers.

___________________________

______________________________________________________

Eng ering/Design department You have jproduct, you need a new component that has never been used before in your company.

This component is to be managed under the number Teil-## in your company.

2-2 In the Engineering/Design view, enter the data required.

Which material type do you choose? ___________________________

The description of the component is: ____________________

Which view(s) do you create?

Which data do you enter?

______________________________________________________


3 3-1 you that a new material

3-2

elatively low in value and is not subject to short-term price uctuations. You want to valuate it at a fixed price.

-3 ___________________

Make a note of the most important data

Purchasing The Engineering/Design department has informedTeil-## has been created in the system. You are asked to find possible vendors for the component in the next few days.

In your company, the buyer usually maintains the data relevant toaccounting. As you do not yet know what the material costs, do not enter the accounting data until you know the prices of possible suppliers.

Teil-## is rfl

3 Which view(s) do you create? _________

:

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

4 ehMake sure that Teil-## can be placed into storage. There are no particular requirements.

-2 ___________________

Make a note of the most important data

War ouse 4-1

4 Which view(s) do you create? _________

:

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________


5 ha

How do you do this (transaction)? Is there price data?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

5-2 s to three vendors (T-K12A##, T-K12B##, and T-K12C##).

before the vendor is released, inform your er 100 parts on the condition

der.

_____________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

-3

ow-y surcharge of 250 UNI for quantities below 200 pcs. There is also a

I / pc, with no freight charge for quantities over 100 pieces and a 2% freight surcharge for quantities under 100 pieces. The delivery time is 10 days.

Purc sing 5-1 You check in the system if price data for Teil-## has already been entered in

another department.

You send RFQThe amount in the RFQ is 10,000 in accordance with your expected annual requirements.

As QI wants to check the partspotential vendors in your RFQ that you will ordthat they are given the or

RFQ numbers / vendor:

_

_

5 You have received the quotations.

T-K12A## offers Teil-## for 12 UNI / pc for quantities above 100 pcs with delivery free of charge. The delivery time is 5 days.

T-K12B## can deliver Teil-## for 10 UNI / pc, but requires a flat-rate lquantitflat-rate freight charge of 150 UNI per delivery. The delivery time is 1 week.

T-K12C## charges 14 UN


5-4 According to the information from Production, you will order the mabout 20 times per year; that is, you expect deliveries of 500 pieces a

aterial time.

Most reasonable vendor:_____________ Effective price / pc ________

-5 Create an info record based on the most reasonable quotation.

Extend the material master record of Teil-## with the data that is required

_____________________

Analyze the quotations and reject those you do not want to include.

5

5-6 for the purchase order and account management.

Which view(s) do you maintain? _______

Make a note of the most important data:

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

5-7

ur cost center 4100 from the same . The vendor informed you by

PO number:____________________________________________

5-8 re erefore change the purchase order

and add the monitor as a third item. The price is 1000 UNI. You send the changed purchase order to the vendor.

5-9 t item that you have ordered the item from the wrong

vendor and cancel it. To let the vendor know, you send him or her a message to this effect.

Order 100 pieces of the material with reference to the most reasonable quotation. Also order an inspection gauge for yovendor (material without a master record)telephone that the price is 200 UNI.

Issue the purchase order as a message.

Shortly after you have issued the purchase order, you notice that you requianother piece of material M-01. You th

The vendor calls you because he or she does not know anything abou3, M-01. You discover


6 Wa us

6-3 tment requires 25 pieces to prepare the aterial for repetitive manufacturing. You issue the required quantity to the

ppropriate cost center (4110).

reho e

6-1 The vendor sends you 50 pieces of the ordered material plus the inspection gauge. Teil-## is inspected first.

6-2 The QM department makes a positive usage decision. You therefore transfer Teil-##.

The prototype production deparma

Goods issue, movement type: Consumption for cost center from warehouse

7 Engineerinbe

at the procurement process with regard to materials planning, purchasing, and invoice verification should be as simple and cheap as possible.

g/design, manufacturing, materials planning and purchasing It is decided that the material does not have any defects and should procured regularly from this vendor. It is also decided th


8 Ma ls

use and production, you decide that it is not

f the

the stock level should be completely replenished

teria planning 8-1 As the MRP controller responsible, you work out an appropriate planning

strategy.

After consulting the warehoadvisable to keep more than 800 pieces of the material Teil-## in stock(=maximum stock level). As soon as the stock drops below 300 pieces, the replenishment omaterial is automatically initiated. In this case, .

f

want to take future requirements into account in materials planning, you decide on an approporiate MRP procedure (choose MRP type V1).

Which views and indicators do you maintain? Make a note of the

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

To cover possible risks and fluctuations, you plan to hold a safety stock o50 pieces. According to the Purchasing Department, the vendor requires a deliverytime of 5 days. As you also

8-2 appropriate parameters.

9 ice9-1 omplete quantity of the sample purchase

Can the Financial Accounting Department pay the invoice?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

10 h10-1 sition for the vendor and

all the data that is required to do this.

Invo verification The vendor charges you for the corder (100 pc). You enter and post the invoice.

Give a reason for your answer.

Purc asing As you do not want to process every purchase requiTeil-## manually, you configure the system so that the purchase requisitions are automatically assigned with sources of supply.

These purchase requisitions are to be converted to purchase orders automatically via a report.

10-2 Maintain

Hint: Material master, vendor master, info record, and source list.

Which entries are essential?

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________


11 Sta r11-1 ction, you require 200 pieces of Teil-##

create a reservation to ensure that this component available for the required date.

rt of p oduction As the person responsible in Produin 2 weeks. You therefore is

...→ Inventory Management → Reservation → Create

te +2 weeks

Accept any messages and save

ents

______________________________________________________

ou carry out a planning run for Teil-## and save it.

______________________________________________________

11-3 uisitions which have lready been assigned sources of supply. Assign a source of supply for Teil-

PO number:____________________________________________

11-4 B-## arrives in goods receipt. It is the remaining 50 pieces from the sample purchase order and the ordered quantity from the reservation.

Base date: Current da

Movement type: 201

Cost center: 4100

Teil-##: 200 pieces

11-2 As the MRP controller, you are currently checking the stock/requiremlist for Teil-##.

Are there any requirements and, if so, are these covered?

YWhat is the result?

In Purchasing, you are processing all purchase reqa## and display the purchase order that is created.

A delivery from vendor T-K12



11-5 The accounts payable clerk settles all the vendor’s invoices for Teil-##.

Invoiced amount: ____________________________

xercise complete!

id you complete the process?

No? Go through the exercises again step by step or speak to the instructor

Yes? Congratulations!

E

D


© SAP AG 1999

Purch. req.

ProcurementProcurement

Determination of reqmtsPayment processing 1188

Vendor selection33

Source determination22

PO processing44

Purch. ord.10

20

30

Goods receipt66

Invoice verification77

Invoice

??

PO monitoring55

Procurement Cycle

Purchaseorder10

20

30

Determination of requirements: The user department responsible can manually pass a requirement for materials to the Purchasing department via a purchase requisition. If you have set a MRP

procedure for a material in the material master, the R/3 System automatically generates a purchase requisition.

Determination of the source of supply: The R/3 System helps the buyer determine possible sourceof supply. Yo

s u can use determination of the source of supply to create requests for quotation (RFQs)

and then enter the quotations. You can also access existing purchase orders and conditions in the system.

Vendor selection: The system simplifies the selection of vendors by making price comparisons between the various quotations. It automatically sends rejection letters.

Purchase order processing: The system facilitates data entry by providing entry aids when you are entering purchase orders.

Purchase order monitoring: The buyer can monitor the processing status of the purchase order online at any time and can determine whether goods or an invoice have been received for the relevant purchase order item. The system also supports reminder procedures.

Goods receipt: The system compares the goods receipt quantity with the purchase order quantity.

Invoice verification: Vendor invoices are checked for accuracy of prices and contents.

Payment processing: Financial Accounting normally deals with vendor payments.


© SAP AG 1999

Planning file entry

MRP

Transactionrelevant to MRP

Plannedorder

Materials Planning

PurchasingPurchaserequisition

Deliveryschedule

Tuesday,Dec. 18

Tuesday,Dec. 18

Overview of Materials Requirements Planning

transactions relevant to materials planning (goods

for material ...).

nverted to purchase

You can also create purchase requisitions directly instead of planned orders.

If requirements for a material are planned automatically and MRP is active in the plant, the systemautomatically carries out planning file entries uponissues, reservations, change in a material's planning data, execution of a forecast You can also enter planning file entries manually.

You can carry out materials requirements planning online or in the background.

Planned orders are proposals used for requirements coverage. They can be corequisitions in a single step.


© SAP AG 1999

MatlsMatls Planning Procedures Planning Procedures

AutomaticAutomaticreorder pointreorder point

ManualManualreorder pointreorder point

MRPMRPConsumption-Consumption-basedbased

Reorder pointReorder pointprocedureprocedure

Forecast-basedForecast-basedmaterials planningmaterials planning

Time-phasedTime-phasedmaterials planningmaterials planning

Materials Planning Procedures

aterials planning procedures for the same material in different plants.

nning

Time-phased materials planning

You use the MRP type in the Materials Planning view to define the procedure you want to use to plan requirements of a material.

You can define different m

The main procedures are:

Reorder point planning

Material requirements pla

Forecast-based planning

Master production scheduling


© SAP AG 1999

Static Lot-Sizing Procedures

Replenish up to maximum stock level

Fixed lot size

Qty

Time

Exact lot size

ReceiptsIssues

uses

ze in the case of a material shortfall. If this order quantity is not sufficient

nishment up to maximum stock level” is to be used, the system creates an order proposal for the quantity that is required to reach the maximum stock level defined in the material master record.

In static lot-sizing procedures, the system does not take future shortages into account; that is, if it determines shortages, the system creates an order proposal for the quantity of the static lot size.

If you have specified that the exact lot size (lot-for-lot order quantity) is to be used, the systemthe exact shortage quantity as the order quantity in the case of a material shortfall. If there are several goods issues leading to a material shortfall in one day, the system groups the shortage quantity from this day in one order proposal, rather than creating an order proposal for each shortage.

If you have specified that the fixed order quantity is to be used, the system uses the fixed lot siquantity as the order quantityto cover the shortage, the system generates several order proposals for the same date until the shortage has been covered.

If you have specified that the order quantity “reple


© SAP AG 1999

RFQPurchasing

Master dataMaster data

MRPMRP

Outlineagreement

Purchaseorder

PurchaserequisitionManualManual

Purchase Requisitions

by

rchase requisition for materials that have a material master record, the R/3

Purchasing converts the purchase requisition into a request for quotation (RFQ), purchase order, or outline agreement.

Purchase requistions are internal documents you use to request your Purchasing department to procure a particular quantity of a material or a service for a particular date.

Purchase requisitions are either created manually by the department responsible or automatically MRP.

When you create a puSystem supports you when you enter data by transferring data in the material master record into the purchase requisition.


© SAP AG 1999

Purchaserequisition

Quotation

Purchaseorder

RFQSource

ofsupply

Vendor AVendor A

Vendor BVendor B

Vendor CVendor C

Rejectionletter

Purchasing


RFQ / Quotation

artment needs to convert

n has

d directly to the request

the chosen vendors, who then send their quotations or rejection letters. You the

You also have the option of saving as purchasing info records the conditions of quotations in which you are interested.

After establishing that a material or service is required, the Purchasing depthe purchase requisition into a purchase order. The R/3 System can support the Purchasing department using the requests for quotation in the source determination.

First, you enter a request for quotation for the relevant material or the required service. You can enter the request for quotation manually or with reference to a purchase requisition. The second optiothe advantage that the information already in the purchase requisition is copiefor quotation. Then you allocate the required vendors to the request for quotation. The system determines the address from the data in the respective vendor master record.

You send the RFQs toenter the quotations along with the conditions and delivery dates they contain with reference to corresponding RFQ.

You can determine the most favorable items or quotation by means of a quotation comparison.


© SAP AG 1999

Header dataHeader data

Item:Item: 10 10

Document numberPayment conditions Purchase order date

Item:Item: 20 20

Item:Item: 30 30

Purchase order

10 .....................

20 .....................

30 .....................

VendorCurrency...

Material numberShort textOrder quantity

Delivery date PO price...

Purchase Order Format

s

In a purchase order, you can procure materials or services for all plants attached to your purchasing organization.

Like other purchasing documents in the R/3 System, the purchase order consists of a document header and one or more items.

The document header contains information that refers to the entire purchase order. Examples of thiinclude the document currency, the document date, and the terms of payment.

The item part of the document contains data describing the materials or services ordered. You can maintain additional information for each item (for example, delivery schedules or item-based text).


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt

Purchaseorder

Material document

Accountingdocument(s)

GR areaGR area

Ext. vendor orother plant

at

urchase order when you enter the goods receipt (for example,

ument containing

In transactions relevant for material valuation, the system creates at least one accounting document, which records the effects of the goods movement on the value of the stock.

Posting a goods receipt to stock with reference to a purchase order has a number of advantages for you, including:

The goods receiving point can check whether the delivery is the same as the purchase order data, this, whether the goods that were ordered have been delivered.

The system suggests data from the pitems and quantities). This makes it easier to enter the goods receipt and check overdeliveries and underdeliveries when goods arrive.

Among other things, the purchase order history is automatically updated as a result of the deliveries. The Purchasing Department can send a reminder about late deliveries.

When you post a goods receipt to the warehouse, the system creates a material docinformation such as the material delivered and the quantity delivered. The system also records the storage location in which you place the material into stock in the plant concerned.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods receipt

Invoice100 pcsFreightCust.100 pieces

Stock account

GR:

ring accountGR/IR clea Vendo

130IR: 16

GR 130 IR: 146IR: 130

UNIUNIUNI

130.0010.00

6.00

UNI 146.00

Material (MAP)100 pcs = 130 UNI

Account Postings for Planned Delivery Costs

Purch. order

r

t with the purchase order price and updates the vendor

rice to the stock

If the stock quantity is less than the invoice quantity, the system posts part of the difference to the “Expenditure/income from price differences” account instead of the stock account.

he system posts the difference between the purchase order price and the invoice price to an xpenditure/income from price differences account.

The system clears the GR/IR clearing accounaccount with the invoice price.

Material with moving average price control:

The system posts the difference between the purchase order price and the invoice paccount and recalculates the stock value based on the invoice price.

The system redetermines the moving average price based on the new stock value.

Material with standard price control:

Te


© SAP AG 1999

PaymentPaymentprogramprogramInvoiceInvoice

Invoice verification

Purchaseorder

Mat. doc. forgoods receipt

Invoicedocument


Invoice Processing

cess, r

e

hase order, the system suggests data from the ty

em .

e er history and Financial Accounting initiates payment for the open invoice items.

Invoice Verification creates a link between Materials Management and external or internal accounting.

In Materials Management, the procurement process is concluded by the invoice verification produring which invoices and credit memos are entered and the contents and prices are checked foaccuracy. However, payment and evaluation of invoices is not part of Invoice Verification; thappropriate information for these tasks is passed on to other departments. Invoice Verification therefore creates a link between Materials Management and external or internal accounting.

When you enter an invoice with reference to a purcpurchase order and the goods receipts for the purchase order (for example, vendor, material, quantistill to be invoiced, terms of payment, and so on).

If there are discrepancies between the purchase order or goods receipt and the invoice, the systwarns the user, and depending on how the system is configured, blocks the invoice for payment

The posting of the invoice completes the invoice verification process. The system updates thpurchase ord


© SAP AG 1999

Procurement for stock or consumption

Bestellung102030

Source determination

Vendor selection

102030

Purch.order102030Order processingPurchase order monitoring

Payment (FI) Requisition

Requirement determinationVendorinvoice ?


Purch.order

Consumption

Storage

Goods Issue Goods receipt

Acct assgt cat.

Procurementfor stock or

consumption?


© SAP AG 1999

Stock Material <=> Consumable Material

Entry of material numberrequired

No account assignmentcategory

Posting to stock accounts

Quantity, value, andconsumption updated inmaterial master record

Moving average price isadjusted

Entry of material number notrequired, but is possible

Account assignment categorymandatory

Posting to consumptionaccounts

Value is not updated, quantityand consumption can beupdated


© SAP AG 1999

OutputPrinterPrinter EDIEDI

E-mailE-mailFaxFax

TelexTelexTeletexTeletex

Purchasing doc.Purchasing doc.

Printout Deliveryschedule

Expeditor/Reminder

Rejectionletter

Orderacknmtexpeditor

Issuing Messages

header text is

tailed information about outputting purchasing documents in the Materials Management documentation on Purchasing: Entering Texts, Print Functions and Information Transmission.

You can issue purchase orders, changes to purchase orders, and order acknowledgements as messages via printer, fax, EDI or e-mail.

You can configure which header texts and item-based texts the system issues. The printed at the top of the purchase order and contains general information. Item texts describe apurchase order item in more detail. You can also include and issue standard texts.

Note: You will find more de


© SAP AG 1999

Master Data in the Procurement Process

Purchasinginfo record

MaterialMaterialmastermaster recd recd

VendorVendormaster recdmaster recd

Purchase order Header

Items10 __________20 __________30 __________

rds that are stored in the database for a long period of time. These are

a

in the vendor master record includes addresses and payment data. You can store data for a particular material (for example, delivery time and purchase price) on a vendor basis in info records.

Master data contains data recostored centrally and used and processed on a cross-application basis. This prevents the multiple storage (redundancy) of data.

The material master record and vendor master record are the most important master data in the procurement process.

When you create purchasing documents, the R/3 System facilitates data entry by copying the data from existing master records as default values into the purchasing documents. It also copies datsuch as units of measure and material short texts from the material master record. The data


© SAP AG 1999

Optimized purchasing

Purchasing data

PO currencyTerms of paymentIncoterms...

Automatic PO...

Info rec. Pur. order

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$Purchasingorganization

Vendor

Purchasing Data in the Vendor Master Record

e.

ndor master record has the organizational levels “client” and d at the

Data that applies to a purchasing organization can be maintained differently for a specific plant. Such data includes the Automatic PO allowed indicator.

Vendor master records contain information on the vendors (external suppliers) of an enterpris

From the Purchasing view, a ve“purchasing organization”. Control parameters for purchasing operations are definepurchasing organization level.

Accounting data in the vendor master record is defined at the company code level.


© SAP AG 1999

Optimized purchasing

MaterialMaterial

Plant

Purchasing data

Order unitTolerancesReminder levels...

Purchasing groupPO text...

Info rec. Pur. order

Automatic POSource list require-mentQuota arrangementusage

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$

Purchasing Data in the Material Master Record

ures,

ial master record contains separate data blocks for each le for

material master record has the organizational levels “client” and

The Source list requirement, Quota arrangement usage and Automatic PO allowed indicators are set at plant level.

Material master records contain descriptions of all the articles and parts that an enterprise procmanufactures or stores. To the enterprise, the material master record represents the central source of information on a specific material. It is used by all components of the SAP Logistics System.

All the information necessary for the administration of a material is stored in its master record. Sincedifferent user departments of an enterprise work with a material, and each one needs to store different information relating to it, the materdepartment. Each department thus has its own view of a material master record and is responsibthe correctness of the data within its block.

From the Purchasing view, a “plant”. At client level, you can specify the purchase order unit, under- and over-delivery tolerances and reminder levels.


© SAP AG 1999

Info Records and Prices

Create purchase orderCreate purchase order

Item

Piece % Conditions

UNI

Info recordavailable?

Conditions:Conditions:Price/UoM 50 UNI / pcFreight 2%

Last purchaseorder: 4500006398

Info record

?

Yes

Yes

No

No

ManualPrice entry

Material Short text Price

10 T-RA120 Chromolux 2000 ?

s:

d if they have been maintained for an info record manually or from a

ing

price from this document. In the default values for nditions from the last purchase

e conditions from the last purchase order:

en the price is entered manually

Are never copied

Purchasing info records determine the prices suggested in purchasing documents in two way

Conditions:Conditions are includequotation.

Last purchase order: If an info record does not contain any conditions, the system reads the number of the last purchasdocument in the info record and then suggests the buyers (Customizing), you can define how the system handles coorder.

You can define that th

Are always copied

Are not copied wh


© SAP AG 1999

Piece % ConditionsUNI

Piece % ConditionsUNI

General conditions

VendorCondition groupMaterial typeIncotermsInvoicing party

Outlineagreement

Price 1 Price 2

01.01. 12.31

PricesPrices Discounts/surchargesDiscounts/surcharges

Surcharge 5%

from 100 pcs 3% from 500 pcs 1%

ConditionsConditions

Info record

07.01

UNIFF$

Conditions

so

ou set the

nt conditions

You can enter conditions in the document header or in the item details. Item conditions apply to one item only. Header conditions apply to all the items in the document.

Conditions are stipulations agreed with vendors concerning prices, discounts and surcharges, andon. The effective net price in purchase orders is determined on the basis of these conditions.

You can maintain conditions when you create quotations, info records, outline agreements, and purchase orders.

Conditions in info records, contracts, and extended conditions are time-dependent conditions. Conditions in purchase orders are time-independent conditions.

Time-dependent conditions are also available for quotations and scheduling agreements if ytime-dependent conditions indicator for the document type in Customizing.

Extended conditions provide you with the option of specifying time-dependeindependently of outline agreements and info records.

Time-dependent conditions can be restricted to a certain period of validity.

If, for example, a vendor's prices vary according to quantity, you can enter the pricing data in the form of a price/quantity scale.


© SAP AG 1999

JIT sched.

FRCsched.

Contractreleaseorder

Quantity

Delivery date

Quantity contract

Value contract

Centr.-agr. contract

Distributed contract

ContractValidity period

Material

Total quantity/total value

Conditions

Scheduling agmt.

Scheduling agmt.with release docu.

Deliveryschedule

QuantityDeliv. date

Sch. agmt.Validity period

Material

Total quantity

Conditions

Outline Purchase Agreements: Overview

g the supply of materials or the performance of services according to predetermined

tity

tline agreement. This ry schedules (comprising a ement.

tract or a scheduling agreement.

as been

Distributed contracts are centrally agreed contracts that are made available to other R/3 Systems for the purpose of issuing release orders against them.

In the R/3 System, an “outline agreement” is a longer-term purchase arrangement with a vendor concerninconditions. These are valid for a certain period of time and cover a predefined total purchase quanor value.

Specific dates or quantities for individual deliveries are not set out in the ouinformation is provided separately in release orders or rolling delivenumber of individual schedule lines), depending on the type of agre

An outline agreement can be a con

There are two types of contracts:

Quantity contract – this type of contract is regarded as fulfilled when the agreed total quantity has been supplied on the basis of individual release orders issued against the contract.

Value contract – this type of contract is regarded as fulfilled when the agreed total value hsupplied on the basis of individual release orders issued against the contract.

The items of a contract can relate to a single plant or all the plants covered by a purchasing organization (centrally agreed contract).


© SAP AG 1999

Conditions

Quotation Purch.ord.

Outlineagreement

Info recd

Key

PB00

FRA1

RA00

ZOB1

Description

Gross price

Freight

Discount from net

Abs. customs duty

Amount

10.00 UNI

5.0%

8.0%

3.00 UNI

Conditions

Info recd

Th

- or a

type. Extended conditions are more flexible than conditions in info records or contracts in that you can define which criteria must be met if the conditions are to apply to purchase orders.

Conditions are used in purchase orders to determine price.

e following types of conditions are used in Purchasing:

- Conditions in a contract apply to all contract release orders created with reference to this contract.

- Conditions in a purchasing info record apply to all purchase order items that contain the material and vendor contained in the purchasing info record.

Extended conditions are only included in the purchase order if they meet certain criteria. For example, you can use extended conditions to define vendor discounts or include discounts fmaterial


© SAP AG 1999

VendorMaterialPurch. org.(Plant)

Info record

Price...

Vendor

Outline agreement item

Contract Sched. agmt.VendorPurch. org.Validity period

VendorPurch. org.Validity period

Item10 :

Item20 :

MaterialQuantityPrice...

Item10 :

Item20 :

MaterialQuantityPrice...

Source

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$

Sources of Supply: Overview

s information for Purchasing. It

egarding the supply of materials or performance of services according to predefined terms and conditions. The latter apply for a prearranged period and a predefined total purchase quantity or value.

In MM Purchasing, the term “source of supply” (or “source”) can mean a vendor (external supplier)or an outline purchase agreement.

An info record (short for “purchasing information record”) providecontains data on a certain material and the vendor (supplier) of that material. For example, the vendor’s current price for the material is stored in an info record.

An outline purchase agreement is a longer-term arrangement with a vendor r


© SAP AG 2000

Optimized Purchasing

Pur. orderPReq.MaterialQuantityDeliv. date(Source)

Materials planning

User dept.

Conversion Pur. orderVendorMaterialQuantityDelivery datePrice

Transmissionto vendor

Source of supplyInfo

recordContract

itemSchedulingagmt. item

Automaticsource

determin-ation

Source list

Quota arrangement


© SAP AG 1999

Outline agreement itemFixed vendor

Fixed vendor

Outline agreement item

Source List

Source list

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$

Info record

Purchaserequisition

Purchaserequisition

Purchaserequisition

22

Outlineagmt.

11Quota

arrangement

?Vendor

60% 40%

33

Priorities in Source Determination

Po

- very

- r the material. If outline agreements exist for the

material, these will be suggested as possible sources. The system also searches for suitable info records and suggests these for the material.

ssible sources are determined and suggested by the system according to the following priorities:

The system first checks whether a quota arrangement whose validity period covers the delidate in the purchase requisition exists for the material. If so, the system calculates from which vendor the material is to be procured on the basis of the quotas stipulated for the vendors.

- If no quota arrangement exists, the system attempts to determine a suitable source on the basis of the source list.

If the source list contains neither a vendor nor an outline agreement item, the system attempts to find a contract or a scheduling agreement fo


© SAP AG 1999

Functions in Purchasing (Overview)

Process(via Assignment list)

Automatic(via PReqs.)

Create PO -Vendor known

Create PO - Vendor unknown

Assign

Create P. requisition

Find or assignSource of

Supply

Without Source of

Supply

Purch. order

P.req. W/o.Source o. su.

Preq. withSource o. su.

Item with:• Source of supply• Flag for RFQ

Assign + Process

Source of supply / Save as requisition

Source of supply / Generate PO

W/o. Source of s. / Save as requisition

AnfrageRFQ

unctions in purchasing: Creating and converting purchase ssigning of sources of supply.

In the MM module, additional options to create and convert purchasing documents are available.

The slide is showing an overview of some frequisitions, creating purchase orders and a

Each lorry symbolizes a source of supply.


© SAP AG 1999

=̂

Planningof anissue

Plant, stor. loc.

Controller Warehouse manager

Planningof a

receipt

Reservation

Planning goods movements

Planningof a

transferposting

Reservations

sue at a later date and for a

ce.

reservation ensures that a material is available when it is needed.

Reservations are requests to the warehouse to have materials ready for isparticular purpose.

A reservation can also be used to plan an inward movement in advan

A


© SAP AG 1999

Goods issue

Cost center

Asset

Sales

Order

Consumption Issue

Sampling

Scrapping

From w/house

From consgmt

From pipeline

Goods Issues

ent type

s automatic account determination to determine the G/L account to

ation n

ost a material for scrapping, the R/3 System

ds

spection. In this way, sampling is the same as scrapping, with the exception that

the value of the sampled material is posted from the material stock account to the quality inspection expense account.

Goods issues can be planned or unplanned. The data to be entered depends on the type of goods issue. The R/3 System prepares various account assignment fields, depending on the movemand system configuration. It usewhich the movement is posted. You enter a G/L account only if you want to post the goods movement to another account.

If a material is no longer of use, it is posted for scrapping. If a material is destroyed, this informmust also be entered in the R/3 System. You can scrap material from unrestricted-use stock, stock iquality inspection, and blocked stock. When you preduces the relevant stock, transfers the value of the scrapped material from the stock account to a scrap account, and debits the cost center entered.

Sample withdrawal is a goods issue generally linked to a quality inspection. The SAP sampling procedure assures you that the sample for testing is taken from the existing stock. The sampled gooare treated as destroyed – in other words, the system assumes that the material can no longer be usedafter the quality in


© SAP AG 1999

You are now able to:

Procurement Processes: Unit Summary

Estimate some of your Foundation Knowledgeabout the processes in procurement.

Acquire extended knowledge.


© SAP AG 1999

MPN Materials

Mass Maintenance

Special Topics

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Describe the function of the manufacturer partnumber in the procurement process

Create MPN material and use them inpurchasing

Explain the function of the MPN profile

Describe the mass maintenance function


Special Topics: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Your organization uses materials that can beprocured from different sources. Since eachvendor requires you to quote his special partnumber in purchase orders, you decide to workwith the MPN functionality.

You need to make changes to many vendor masterrecords at the same time.

Special Topics: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Manufacturer Part Number (MPN)

Material master record for internal part number

Material master record

for manufacturerpart number


for manufacturerpart number

...

Vendor master record for manufacturer



MaterialMaterial

addition to the company’s own material number. You can use the

ster record (= MPN material) for each manufacturer part number. d

Manufacturers that are not vendors can be represented by special vendor master records using the vendor account group MNFR.

As of Release 4.0A, you can use the material or part number used by the manufacturer for procurement purposes inmanufacturer part number in requisitions and purchase orders and determine it using the source determination process.

You create a separate material maThis has a separate material type (HERS), contains the manufacturer and points to the master recorfor the company’s own material.


© SAP AG 1999

Material Master Records


Material type: e.g. ROH

Manuf. part profile(Manufacturer part no.)(Manuf.)


Material type: HERS

Inv.-managed materialManufacturer part no.Manuf.

Materials planning

Inventory mgmt.


Views:PurchasingPO textClassification

Firm‘s own, inventory-managed material

MPN material

rt control profile to the company’s own material in the latter’s master

wn

.

record (= MPN material). This has a separate material type (HERS), contains the manufacturer and the manufacturer part number and points to the company's own, inventory-managed material.

You assign a manufacturer parecord. The control profile for manufacturer parts is defined in Customizing and determines the usability of MPN materials.

Materials planning and inventory management are carried out with respect to the company’s omaterial.

If a material is procured from a single manufacturer, you can enter the manufacturer and the manufacturer part number in the master record for the company's own, inventory-managed material

If a material is procured from several manufacturers, you create a separate material master


© SAP AG 1999

MPN Profiles

MPNProfile

MPNrequirement

PO text forMPN material

QM processingfor MPN

Updating of LIS

Change MPN/price determination

AMPLmanagement

Info records forMPN material

r

ventory-managed material is to be

material may be changed during the procurement process (for example, when a oods

e company's own, inventory-managed

The list of approved manufacturer parts is to be checked.

Control profiles for manufacturer parts are defined in Customizing and are assigned in the master record for the company's own, inventory-managed material.

The manufacturer part control profile determines the usability of the MPN material. Among othethings, you can stipulate whether:

The PO text of the MPN material or the company's own, inadopted in the purchase order

The MPN material has to be entered in the purchase order

The MPNrequisition is converted into a purchase order) including changing the MPN at the time of greceipt.

A new price determination process is to be carried out after a change in the MPN material

Info records can be created for the MPN material or for thmaterial.


© SAP AG 1999

Source Determination for MPN Materials

Source list Inv.-managed material

PlantValidity periodMPN materialManufacturer

.

Purchase requisition

10 pcs. inventory-managed materialSource: manufacturerMPN material

Quota arr.

?Vendor

60% 40%

angement, you can define combinations of manufacturers and

acturer fields are offered to you in the source list or quota arrangement ,

ured ust be taken from a certain revision level or whether they are

blocked. You can use the enhancement AMPL0001 to define your own criteria regarding the admissibility of manufacturer parts.

Among other things, you use the control profile for manufacturer parts to determine whether info records can be created for the MPN material or for the company's own material.

If you have maintained info records for MPN materials, you can utilize the source determination process using the source list or quota arrangement for MPN materials.

Source list/quota arrangement records relate to the company's own, inventory-managed material.

In the source list and the quota arrmanufacturer part numbers as preferred or excluded for procurement purposes with respect to specific time periods and plants.

The MPN material and Manuffor maintenance if a manufacturer part profile is entered in the master record for the company's owninventory-managed material.

In the list of approved manufacturer parts, you can specify which MPN materials may be procduring which period, whether they m


© SAP AG 1999

Mass Maintenance Tool

Mass Maintenance

Rental unitsMaterial master (retail)

Material master (industry) Customer master

Purchasing info records Vendor master

Appropriation requests

d users should operate it.

change data in a large number of purchase orders quickly and easily in a ngle step. For example, you can change the plant, the terms of payment, or the purchasing group, selected purchase orders.

As of Release 4.5A, you can change data for several objects at the same time using the mass maintenance tool (such as vendor masters, material masters or purchasing information records).

You can run the tool online or in the background. It is recommended that the tool be run in the background if many objects are to be changed at the same time. This reduces the system load.

Since this tool can change many objects at the same time, only experience

You access the tool through the Central functions menu under Logistics.

As of Release 4.6A, you cansiin


© SAP AG 1999

Describe the function of the manufacturer partnumber in the procurement process

Create MPN materials and use them inpurchasing


Describe the mass maintenance function


Special Topics: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Special Topics Topic: MPN Materials

rchasing



• Describe the function of the manufacturer part number in the procurement process

• Create MPN materials and use them in pu

•

Your organization uses materials that you can procure from different sources

. Since each vendor requires you to quote his special part number in purchase orders, you wish to work with MPN materials.

1-1

material.

_____________

____

1-2 2000.

______________________________________________________

Display the material master purchasing view of your material T-REE## for plant 1000.

1-1-1 Has a manufacturer part profile been assigned to the material? If so, which?

______________________________________________________

1-1-2 If not already done, assign manufacturer part profile 2000 to the

1-1-3 Has a manufacturer part number been assigned to the material?

_________________________________________

1-1-4 Has a manufacturer been assigned to the material?

__________________________________________________

Display the Customizing settings for manufacturer part profile

1-2-1 Which MPN material functions have been activated?


1-3 Material T-REE## is procured from two manufacturers who each require you to

ster rec material using the following data:

r: y sector: ngineering (M)

e: facturer parts (HERS)

l no.: rt no.: 3456

anufacturer:

1-4 ster rec material with the following data:

r: y sector: ngineering (M)

e: facturer parts (HERS)

l no.: rt no.: 7654

anufacturer: T-L20B##

1-5 terial T-REE## supplied by the manufacturer -L20A## for your plant 1000 in four weeks. Do this by entering the MPN material

rial).

1-5-2 ber of the MPN material?

____________________________

Requisition number: _____________________________________

quote their special part number in purchase orders.

Create the first ma ord for an MPN

Material numbe T-REE##-A Industr Mechanical EMaterial typ ManuView: PurchasingShort text: Axle Internal materia T-REE## Manufacturer pa A-12M T-L20A##Material group: 001

Save the material master record.

Create another ma ord for an MPN Material numbe T-REE##-B Industr Mechanical EMaterial typ ManuView: PurchasingShort text: Axle Internal materia T-REE## Manufacturer pa B-98MMaterial group: 001

Save the material master record.

You need 40 pc. of maTfor this manufacturer.

1-5-1 Create a purchase requisition for material T-REE##-A (the MPN mate

Which material number is adopted on the item overview screen – thenumber of the internal material or the num__________________________

Save your purchase requisition.


1-6

1-6-2 tem ? ______________________________

1-6-3

___

1-7 info record with aterial T-REE##:

: B## : 0

e: sing group:

tandard quantity: 100 100

1-7-1 Can you create an info record for the MPN material T-REE##-B?

1-8

1-8-1 e order item overview after e requisition data has been adopted – the number of the internal material

________________________________

Purchase order: _________________________________________

You need an additional 10 pc. of material T-REE##, this time supplied by the manufacturer T-L20B## for plant 1000 in six weeks.

1-6-1 Create another purchase requisition. Specify the material number used by the manufacturer T-L20B## (material number T-REE##-B).

How does the system respond after you have finished entering your idata and confirmed with Enter________________________

Go to the item detail screen. Does the number of your MPN material appear? _______________

Save your purchase requisition. Requisition number: ________

Create an the following data for m Vendor T-L20Purchasing organization 100Plant: 1000 Planned delivery tim 10 Purcha Z## SPrice: Save your info record.

Why/why not?__________________________________________

Convert your second requisition into a purchase order. Order the requested material from vendor T-L20B##. The material will be delivered to storage location 0001.

Which material number appears in the purchasthor the number of the MPN material? ______________________

Save your purchase order.


1-9 isplay your purchase order in message form (that is, the document as it will

1-10

aterial to

Material document: _____________________________________

Dappear when printed/transmitted) on the screen.

Is the manufacturer part number shown? ___________________________

Your vendor has shipped MPN material T-REE##-A instead of T-REE##-B. Even though this differs from your purchase order, you’ve decided to accept it.

1-10-1 Enter a goods receipt for your purchase order. Change the MPN mT-REE##-A and save your receipt.


Exercises

Unit: Special Topics Topic: Mass Maintenance

e able to:

Illustrate the mass maintenance function by making a change to vendor masters

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will b

• Describe the mass maintenance function

•

Several of your vendors have implemented a new financial system that will allow them to process paym

You’d like to change the T-L20A##

ents faster. As a result, they can offer you different terms of payment. You need a quick way to change the terms of payment.

2-1 terms of payment for your vendors ,

2-1-1 , purchasing

Now, make the change using the mass maintenance function. The terms of payment key for the three vendors should be ZB01.

T-L20B## and T-L20C##. Use the mass maintenance function to carry out the changes outlined below.

First, display the vendor master record for vendor T-L20A##organization 1000 and note the following:

• The technical name for the field Terms of payment.

Field name (Table – Field): ____________________________

• Terms of payment: ___________________________________

2-1-2

Refer to the solutions for detailed step by step instructions.

Please read and then Enter to acknowledge all warning messages received during this process.

2-2 Display vendor master record T-L20A## once again and note that the Terms of payment have changed.


Solutions

Unit: Special Topics

Topic: MPN Materials

1-1 r → Material → Display → Display current

he material.

1-2 → Purchasing → Material

erial → Create (general) → Immediately

1-5

1-5-1 Material T-REE## (the internal part number). However, you can see the olumn.

1-6

ber

e bottom left.

1-7

1-7-1 You cannot create an info record for the MPN material T-REE##-B because the MPN profile does not permit it.

Favorites → Material Maste

Select the purchasing view.

1-1-1 Manufacturer part profile 2000 been assigned to the material.

1-1-3 A manufacturer part number has not been assigned to t

1-1-4 A manufacturer has not been assigned to the material.

SAP standard menu → Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit project → SAP Reference IMG → Materials Management Master → Define Manufacturer Part Profile 1-2-1 MPN Mandatory and Change in MPN.

1-3 Favorites → Material Master → Material → Create (general) → Immediately

1-4 Favorites → Material Master → Mat

Favorites → Requisition → Create

MPN material in the far right c

Favorites → Requisition → Create

1-6-1 The R/3 System changes the MPN material to the internal part num(T-REE##)

1-6-2 The number of the MPN material appears at th

Favorites → Master Data → Info Record → Create


1-8 Favorites → Purchasing → Purchase order → Create →Vendor/supplying plant

item overview screen area, enter your second purchase requisition number number. You may have to scroll to the right to see this

eld.

1-9 Print/Transmit.

ose Display message.

1-10 MaManagement Goods movement → Goods receipt → For Purchase order → PO

Enter.

y in MPN material to T-REE##-A.

Select OK, then save.

known

Enter Vendor T-L20B##

In the along with its line itemfi

1-8-1 Material T-REE##-B (the MPN material number)

User menu → Purchase Order → Messages →

Enter your purchase order number and Execute.

On the next screen, select your document and cho

1-9-1 The manufacturer part number is shown.

SAP standard menu → Logistics → terials Management → Inventory →

number known

Enter your purchase order number, then

When your line item appears, select it.

Below, change the entr


Solutions

Unit: Special Topics

Topic: Mass Maintenance

2-1

Purchasing → Display (current)

ment field and choose Help (F1).

2-1-2 Central Functions Mass intenance → Dialog processing

ject type LFA1

item Payt terms LFM1-ZTERM

aster numbers in the

the three vendors appear, enter the new terms of payment.

Purchasing → Display (current)

Select Purchasing data

2-1-1 User menu → Vendor →

Select Purchasing data

Select the Terms of pay

Choose Technical info

Table - Field: LFM1-ZTERM

Logistics → →SAP standard menu: → maintenance → Mass ma

Enter Ob

Execute

Select the tab labeled Fields.

Select the

Execute

Use multiple selection and enter the three vendor mSingle values tab. Copy

Enter purchasing organization 1000, then Execute.

When

Save

2-2 User menu → Vendor →


© SAP AG 2000

Section: Inventory Mngt. & Logistics Execution


© SAP AG 1999

Preface

Content: Inventory Mngt. & Logistics Execution

Unit Good Receipts

Unit Good Issues

Unit Overview of LogisticsExecution

Unit Organizational Units andMaster Data


© SAP AG 1999

Inbound process in the SAP System - withoutWarehouse Management

Internal warehouse processes

Where Logistics Execution fits into the supply chain

Contents:

Overview of Logistics Execution


© SAP AG 1999

Work through a simple inbound process (order, goodsreceipt, invoice verification)

Work through a simple outbound process (sales order,outbound delivery, goods issue, billing)

Explain the idea behind the Warehouse ManagementSystem (physical stock movements in a complexwarehouse structure)

Explain how Logistics Execution fits into the supplychain as the link between goods receipt, goods issue,internal warehouse processes, and transportation


Overview of Logistics Execution: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

The IDES model company has decided how itslogistics processes should be structured. Sinceyou are a member of the project team, you want tohave a clear idea of the functionality available inthe Logistics Execution System.

Overview: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Integration Process

Sales Order Processing (SD)

InventoryInventoryManagementManagement

Ordering (MM)

Determination ofDetermination ofrequirementsrequirements

Goo

dsre

ceip

t

Req

uire

men

ts

Stock

Goo

dsis

sue

Req

uire

men

ts

G/L

acco

unt Customer

Vendor

Payment

Payment

Presalesactivities

Orderprocessing Delivery Billing

Sourcedetermination

Processorder

InvoiceVerification

Logi

stic

s Ex

ecut

ion

(LE)

o the following main processes:

s receipts

SD component (Sales and Distribution), whereas ordering is processed in the MM component (Materials Management). SAP Logistics Execution (LE) represents the link between the two processes.

The logistics process can be subdivided int

Sales order processing for goods issues

Ordering (purchase order processing) for good

Physically moving goods in the supply chain

Sales order processing is handled mainly by the


© SAP AG 1999

Overview: Logistics

Goodsissue

Internal and externalInternal and externalaccountingaccounting

MRP

InvoiceVerification

Goods receipt

Postingchange

Invoicereceipt

Inventory Management

Internal procurementProduction

External procurementPurchasing

PresalesactivitiesSales order

Shipping Billing

ts on requirements

lex )

ssed further in the Shipping component. The process is completed in the Billing

In Invoice Verification, the value flow is updated, and the various details passed on from the goods receipt, purchase order and goods issue are summarized.

The various steps in the logistics process chain are processed in different components of the SAP System. The different areas are closely connected, and linked together by means of a document flow.

The logistics process can be subdivided into a material flow and a value flow. Material requiremenplanning is processed in the Materials Management component (MM). Information is passed on to this component from sales orders, for example. The requirements are passed on tointernal or external procurement, and processed by Purchasing of Production (PP).

The Inventory Management component (IM) maps transactions that result in changes involving stock: goods receipts, goods issues, reservations, posting changes, and stock transfers. The Warehouse Management component (WM) is integrated into the material flow, and maps compwarehouse structures and stock movements. The logistical process flows in Logistics Execution (LEare then procecomponent. The Billing component is integrated with internal and external accounting components (FI and CO).


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt: Procurement

Selection of vendorDetermination ofsource of supply

Purchaseorder

Ordering

Purchaseorder

Invoice verification

Invoice

??

Purchase ordermonitoring

Goods receipt

Handling of payments

Purchasereq.

Determination ofrequirements

by rchase requisition to Purchasing. If you have defined an appropriate MRP procedure

n

urces of supply is to create requests for

hase order in the r

antity.

Handling of payments: Normally, payments to vendors are processed in Financial Accounting.

Determination of requirements: The department in question can report that materials are required submitting a puin the material master record of a material, the R/3 System can generate the purchase requisitioautomatically.

Determination of source of supply: The R/3 System helps the purchaser (buyer) to determine possible sources of supply. One way of determining soquotation, and then to enter the corresponding quotations. It is also possible to draw on purchase orders and conditions that already exist in the system.

Selection of vendor: A comparison of the prices contained in the various quotations makes it much easier to select vendors. Letters of rejection can be generated and sent automatically.

Ordering: The system boasts a range of features that make it easier to create purchase orders.

Purchase order monitoring: The purchaser can monitor the progress of the purcsystem. For example, he or she can find out if a goods receipt or invoice receipt has been posted foan order item. The system also supports various dunning (urging) procedures.

Goods receipt: The system checks the goods receipt quantity against the purchase order qu

Invoice verification: The vendor invoices are checked to make sure that they are correct.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Issue: Sales Order Processing

Presales activities Order processing Procurement

RechnungInvoice

Shipping / Goods issue

BillingPayment

has reached. The overall processing status is determined from the individual statuses in

m.

nt, you can perform a range of shipping activities (picking, packing, printing out shipping documents, and so on). All of these activities are based on a delivery document (outbound delivery).

In R/3, sales and distribution processing is subdivided into the following areas: sales support, sales, shipping, transportation, and billing.

Every sales activity made in one of these areas is documented by means of a sales document.

Various business transactions in sales, shipping, transportation, and billing can be mapped by means of specially tailored document types.

Each document is identified by means of a unique document number. Special search features (called "matchcodes") are available to help you find a document easily.

Each document is assigned an overall processing status that shows the processing stage that thedocumentthe document. These show what stage the individual steps that make up the sales activity have reached.

You can analyze and evaluate sales and distribution transactions in the Sales Information Syste

Sales and distribution processing interfaces with several other areas (for example, Materials Management, Financial Accounting, and Controlling).

Shipping is a follow-on activity to sales. In the Shipping compone


© SAP AG 1999

SalesSalesorderorder

Materialdocument



Sold-to party

Ship-toparty

Outbounddelivery Transfer order

(pick order)

Bill-toparty

Payer

Goods issue

Billing document

GI for Sales Order: Document Overview

individual steps in the goods issue

cuments that are created during presales and order processing. Requests for

d shipments are documents that are used in the outbound s for the

ons or natural persons who are involved directly in conducting a business transaction with you. Possible business partner roles (functions) include: sold-to party, ship-to party, bill-to party, and payer.

A range of documents are used in the SAP System to map theprocess. These documents contain relevant information on the business transactions. In other words, the various documents each represent business transactions.

Sales documents are doquotation, quotations, contracts, scheduling agreements, and standard orders are all examples of sales document types.

Outbound deliveries, transfer orders, anprocess. A goods receipt document contains changes involving stock, and forms the basicorresponding accounting documents.

A billing document is a document in the Billing component, and forms the basis for the corresponding accounting documents.

Business partners can be legal pers


© SAP AG 1999

The Shipping Process

Warehouse

• Packing

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

• Shipping documents • Picking• Goods issue

Functions affecting shipping:• Determination of shipping

point• Determination of route• Scheduling

• Monitoring of shippingdue dates

• Create delivery

Shippingpoint

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4

1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1

2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8

2 9 3 0 3 1


nce documents (e.g. sales orders and purchase orders)

ound deliveries

arehouse Management)

shipping documents

The outbound deliveries posted in the 'Goods Issue' shipping department can be used to create a worklist for billing (billing due list).

SAP LE functions available for shipping processing include:

Monitoring of shipping due dates in refere

Creating and editing outb

Monitoring availability

Picking (with a connection to W

Packing the outbound delivery

Printing out and passing on

Processing the goods issue


© SAP AG 1999

Warehouse Management

Planning and monitoring

Stock movements Warehouse control

Storage bin management

Radio FrequencyConnection

plex warehouse structures with

s (such as goods receipts, goods issues, stock transfers using

ct

Non-SAP warehouse control systems can be linked up to the Warehouse Management System via the WM-LSR interface.

In the Warehouse Management system (WMS), you manage comvarious types of storage areas (high rack random storage, bulk storage, fixed bin storage, and so on)within one or more plants - right down to the storage bin level.

The processing of all stock movementstock placement and stock removal strategies) is controlled in WM, and takes the characteristics of the individual materials into account.

Stock movements and other warehouse activities such as physical inventories are supported by direradio frequency connection.


© SAP AG 1999

Logistics Execution

Production warehouse

Distribution center

Production site

Customer

Border

Vendor

Warehouse

company's logistics processes. The component s chain - from the vendor, internal warehouse, production site, and

t through to the customer.

pany

.

Transportation process - inbound and outbound shipments, as well as the calculation and settlement of shipment costs

The Logistics Execution component (LE) maps a covers the entire procesdistribution center righ

LE processes include:

Inbound process - the goods are collected from the vendor and placed in storage in a comwarehouse.

Outbound process - the goods are removed from storage, and delivered to the customer.

Internal warehouse processes such as posting changes, stock transfers, inventory, and so on


© SAP AG 1999

Work through a simple inbound process (order, goodsreceipt, invoice verification)

Work through a simple outbound process (sales order,outbound delivery, goods issue, billing)

Explain the idea behind the Warehouse ManagementSystem (physical stock movements in a complexwarehouse structure)

Explain how Logistics Execution fits into the supplychain as the link between goods receipt, goods issue,internal warehouse processes, and transportation


Overview: Unit Summary


Data Used in Exercises Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Objectives

Business Scenario

Hints and Tips

Warning or Caution

Data Used in Exercises Type of Data Data in Training System Materials (goods) LES01-##

LES02-## LES03-## LES04-## LES05-##

Plant 1200 Storage location 0140, 0141, ...,0###,..., 0160 Warehouse number .., ###, ..., 160 140, 141, .Shipping point X0## Customers T-S11A##

T-S11B## Vendor 1000 Purchasing organization 1000 Purchasing group Corporate Purchasing (000) Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 12 Division 00 Forwarding agent 1058 Notes on Exercises In the training system, separate data has been created for every group. When the characters ## appear, replace these with your course group number. Please also note that some of the exercises are follow-on exercises to others.


Exercises

nit: Overview of Logistics Execution

U

At

•

• ion fits into the supply chain as the link between goods receipt, goods issue, internal warehouse processes, and transportation

the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Work through a simple inbound process (order, goods receipt, invoice verification)

Work through a simple outbound process (sales order, outbound delivery, goods issue, billing)

• Explain the idea behind the Warehouse Management System (physical stock movements in a complex warehouse structure)

Explain how Logistics Execut

rate on the processes

eceipt for these

To illustrate the processes that come after the LES processes, you create a sales order, which you deliver, pick and then bill.

You want to find out about the processes in the Logistics Execution System. To do this, you familiarize yourself with the logistical processes in the SAP System. These are the processes that come before and after theLES processes. However, since you want to concentin Logistics Execution itself, you should only look at the other processes briefly by working through a few simple examples.

To illustrate the processes preceding the LES processes, you create a purchase order for trading goods, and then post a goods rgoods. When you receive the invoice for these from the vendor, you pass it on for invoice verification, and complete the process.


1 How do the processes fit into the supply chain? -1

Name the supply chain elements that are found in order processing in Materials Management (MM).

Describe the logistics processes in the SAP System.

1-1-1

1-1-2 Which processes are found in sales order processing (SD)?

1-1-3 Which processes are found in both these process chains and are also part of the Logistics Execution System?


2 Creating a purchase order

Order 48 pieces o

-1

f material LES01-## from vendor 1000 C.E.B. Berlin and specify mediately. Use the order type called Standard

urchase order. that they should be delivered imp

tio istics Materials Management → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known).

lowin

Standard purchase order

rmany (1000)

0)

s date

ued about the delivery date, and accept the purchase order . Save your purchase order, and make a note of the

Purchase order number: -

r, and check over the data you have entered for it.

-1

e goods received are placed into unrestricted-hese goods are placed in storage in warehouse

001 (no Warehouse Management).

Use the Create Purchase Order transac n (menu path: Log → → Purchasing

Enter the fol g data:

Order type:

Vendor: 1000

Organizational data: Purchasing organization IDES Ge

Purchasing group Chef, H.(000)

Company code IDES AG (100

Line item data: Delivery date – today’

Plant 1200 (Dresden)

Storage location 0001

Confirm the warnings issprice proposed by the systempurchase order number.

___________________________________________________________

2-2 Display the purchase orde

3 Posting a goods receipt

You have received delivery of all 48 pieces of material LES01-##, and all were undamaged. Now enter the goods receipt for this material with a reference to the purchase order you created above. Thuse stock for plant 1200 (Dresden). T0

→

Goods Receipt for Purchase Order, Order, Other Transactions→ Enter Goods Receipt for Purchase Order).

Use the transaction called Enter Goods Receipt for Purchase Order(menu path: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process


To post the goods receipt, enter the purchase number you made a note of. You can r.

Material document number:_________________________________________

3-2 e material document that was created by the goods receipt posting.

3-3 Now display your purchase order again. How has the purchase order history been

4-1

ou have received an invoice for the 48 pieces of material LES01-## from vendor 1000 (C.E.B. Berlin). The invoice is for

e, s t.

also use the matchcode function (F4) to search for your purchase order numbe

Display th

updated?

Entering a vendor invoice

Y19200 UNI, plus input tax at 10%. Using

enter an invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification, and then po t itoday’s dat

Enter Invoice in Logistics Invoice Verification (menu path: Logistics → Materials Management → Invoice Verification → Logistics Invoice Verification→ Document Entry → Enter Invoice).

Invoice number:_________________________________________________

Use the transaction called


5 Creating a sales order -1

er T-S11B## orders 12 pieces of material LES01-## from you. Create a ales order for this. Use the order type Standard Order (OR).

Customs

enu pa → ales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create).

5-1-2 Now display the order you have just created, and familiarize yourself with the way information is presented on the screen.

From which plant is item 10 to be delivered?

-1-3 What is the overall processing status of the order?

___________________________________________________________

Use the S

Create Sales Order transaction (m th Logistics

5-1-1 Save your order, and make a note of the document number.

Sales order: ____________________________________________

________________________________________________________

5

To display the overall processing status of the order, choose Display document flow.


6-1 reating an outbound delivery

-1-1 Create an outbound delivery for your sales order.

C

6

ion →

ince you want to be able to create the outbound delivery earlier, set the selection date to 1 week ahead, and enter shipping point X0##.

Now go to the Picking tab page, and display the delivery quantity and the picked quantity.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

-1-3 Save your outbound delivery, and make a note of the document number.

_____________________________________________

Display the document flow. What are the overall processing statuses of the order and the outbound delivery?

Order: _________________________________________

utbound delivery: ___________________________________

Use the following transaction: Logistics → Logistics ExecutOutbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document → With Reference to Sales Order. S

6-1-2

6

6-1-4

O


7-1 icking the outbound delivery

Before you pick the outbound delivery, display the stocks of material LES01-## in plant 1200, storage location 0001.

P

7-1-1

Display Total Stock per Material (Inventory Management). Enter terial LES01-##, plant 1200, and storage location 0001.

How much unrestricted-use stock of material LES01-## is available in plant 1200, storage location 0001?

______________________________________________________

To actually pick the material, create a transfer order for the warehouse. This transfer order is used to print out the items you want to pick.

ma

Open up a new session, and display the inventory management viewof the stock overview. To do this, choose Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock →

→

7-1-2

UOutbound Process → Picking → Create Transfer Order → Single Document.

ntries.

Make a note of the number of the transfer order.

_______________________________________________________

7-1-3 he materials you want to deliver. To do this, change your outbound delivery. Make a note of the pick quantities before you post the goods issue.

_______________________________________________________

se the following transaction: Logistics → Logistics Execution → → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery

Enter warehouse number 012, and the number of your outbound delivery. Select the Background option, and confirm your e

Once picking has been completed, you can post the goods issue for t


7-1-4 Now post the goods issue for the delivery.

In the transaction Change Outbound Delivery, choose Post goods issue.

7-1-5 aterial LES01-## in plant 1200 again. How many pieces are still available as unrestricted-use stock? What is the status of the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________________________

8-1 illing

Create a billing document for the outbound delivery you created in the previous exercise.

Now display the stock overview for m

B

8-1-1

Use the following transaction: Logistics Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create.

Save your billing document, and make a note of the document number.

Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overall processing status of the outbound delivery?

_________________________________________________________

→

8-1-2


9-1 tock overviews in Warehouse Management

9-1-1 sto age bins in your warehouse (warehouse number hich storage type represents bulk (bulk) storage, and how many bulk bins are there?

_____________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________

S

Get an overview of the r###). Wstorage

→ Bins and Stock → Display → Bin Status Report).

How many pieces of material LES02-## are stored in the shelf storage section of warehouse number ###?

_______________________________________________________

Use the Bin Status Report transaction (menu path Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes

9-1-2

→

Stock → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management)).

-1-3 In which storage bins is material LES03-## stored?

Use the Total Stock per Material transaction (menu path Logistics Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and

9

go directly from the stock overview of a material to the bin stocks. Double-click the storage type whose stock you wish to display.

_____________________________________________________

You can


9-1-4 What is stored in storage bin FIX-03 in storage type 005? Display this storage bin.

______________________________________________________

loc

You can go from the overview of bin stocks to the detail screen of a storage bin simply by clicking once on the bin in question. On the Stock tab page, you can see the stock that is stored in this storage

ation.


Solutions

nit: Overview of Logistics Execution

1-1

1-1-1 tion of source of supply, selection of vendor,

1-1-2 dual steps in the sales order processing process are: presales

1-1-3 The Logistics Execution System covers the following processes: shipping, storage, inbound and outbound transportation.

-1

Logistics → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create nown

U

How do the processes fit into the supply chain?

The individual steps in the ordering process are: determination of requirements, determinaordering, purchase order monitoring, goods receipt, invoice verification, and handling of payments.

The indiviactivities, order processing, procurement, shipping, goods issue, billing, and payment.

goods issue, placing in

2 Creating a purchase order

→ Materials Management → Vendor/Supplying Plant K

Field Name/Type of Data Values

Order type rd purchase order Standa

Vendor 1000

Purchasing organization 1000) IDES Germany(

Purchasing group Chef, H. (000)

Company code 000) IDES AG (1

Material LES01-##

PO quantity 48

Order unit PC

Delivery date ’s date Today

Plant 1200


Save your purchase order.

Logistics 2-2 → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Display


3-1

ogistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods receipt for Purchase Order, Order, → Enter Goods Receipt for Purchase O

Posting a goods receipt

L Other Transactions

rder


Document number Number of your purchase order

Item OK Select this option

Quantity in UnE 48

Storage location Materials store

Post the goods receipt.

3-2 t for

number of your material document, and choose Enter.

3-3 Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →

4-1

→ Materials Management → Invoice Verification → Logistics Invoice V try → voice

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods receipPurchase Order, Order, Other Transactions → Display Material Document

Enter the

Display Click Item details, and then choose the Purchase order history tab page.

Entering a vendor invoice

Logistics erification→ Document En Enter In


Document date Today’s date

Purchase order Number of your purchase order

Amount 21120 (net)

Tax amount 1920

Save your invoice.


5-1

-1-1 reate

Enter the order type Standard order (OR), and press Enter.

Creating a sales order

5 Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → C


Sold-to party T-S11B##

Purchase order number LO140-##1

PO date Today’s date

Material LES01-##

Order quantity 12

Unit PC

Save the order.

-1-2

e delivered from plant 1200. Select item 10, and then click the Display item details icon. You can view the delivering plant on the Shipping tab page.

-1-3

To display the document flow, choose Environment → Display document flow. As you can see, the status is Open.

5 Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display

The line item is to b



6-1 reating an outbound delivery

6-1-1 Outbound Deliver y → Create → Single Document → With Reference to Sales Order

C

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for y → Outbound Deliver


Shipping point 1200

Selection date 1 week from today

Order The number of your standard order

6 Delivery quantity: -1-2 12 pcs

Pick. quantity: 0 pcs

6-1-4 s y → Display → Environment →

Open

7-1 icking the outbound delivery

7-1-1 is uti → Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Inventory Management)

6-1-3

Logistics → Logistic Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound DeliverDocument flow

Standard order: Completed

Outbound delivery:

P

Logistics → Log tics Exec on → Internal Warehouse Processes


Material -## LES01

Plant 1200


48 pieces of material LES01-## are in unrestricted-use stock.


Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → oods Issue for 7-1-2 GOutbound Delivery → Picking → Create Transfer Order → Single Document


Warehouse number 012

Delivery The number of your outbound delivery

Foreground/background Background

→ → Outbound Process 7-1-3 Logistics Logistics Execution Outbound Delivery → Outbou

→ Goods Issue for nd Delivery → Display

Pick quantity: 12 pieces

→ Delivery → Change → Single Document

Click the Post goods issue icon.

7-1-5 is uti → Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Inventory

Choose the Picking tab page.

Delivery quantity: 12 pieces

→ Outbound Process Goods Issue for 7-1-4 Logistics → Logistics Execution Outbound Delivery → Outbound

Logistics → Log tics Exec on → Internal Warehouse Processes

Management)


Material -## LES01

Plant 1200


36 pieces of this material are in unrestricted-use stock.

→ Goods Issue for

The status of the outbound delivery is Being processed.

Logistics Logistics Execution Outbound Process Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Display

→ →


8-1

-1-1 → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing Document → Create

Billing

Logistics 8


Document The number of your outbound delivery

Billing type Invoice

Save your invoice.

→ w

The status of the billing document is Completed.

9-1 tock overviews in Warehouse Management

Enter your warehouse number (###), and use the F4 Help function to select storage type 004 (bulk storage). Storage type 004 has 10 storage bins.

9-1-2 is uti →

aterial LES02-##. The stock overview shows you in which storage types the material is found. 240 pieces of this material are in shelf storage.

Enter material LES03-##, and your warehouse number (###). An overview of the bins in which the material is stored appears.

Enter your warehouse number (###), storage type 005 and storage bin FIX-03. Material LES05-## is stored in this storage bin.

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Billing Document 8-1-2 → Billing Display → Environment → Display document flo

S

9-1-1 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Bin Status Report

Logistics → Log tics Exec on → Internal Warehouse Processes Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management) Enter your warehouse number (###) and m

9-1-3 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Bin Stock per Material

9-1-4 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Single Displays → Storage Bin


© SAP AG 1999

Organizational Units in Logistics Execution

Master Data in Logistics Execution

Contents:

Organizational Units and Master Data


© SAP AG 1999

Name the organizational units and master dataused in Logistics Execution

Explain the relationships between the followingorganizational units: plant, storage location,warehouse number, shipping point, andtransportation planning point


Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Master data and organizational units are requiredfor mapping the IDES model company in the SAPSystem. Since you are the project team memberresponsible for this, you assign the necessaryorganizational units, and edit the appropriatemaster data.

Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Legally independent unit with a self-contained set ofaccountsThe following are created at the company code level:

Financial statementsProfit and loss statements

Company Code

The Organizational Unit "Company Code"


© SAP AG 1999

The Organizational Unit "Plant"

A plant is an organizational unit in Logistics, and allowsyou to look at a company from the point of view ofproduction, procurement, plant maintenance, andmaterials planning.A plant is a branch or division within a company.

p various functions in a company, for example:

ffice

w plant, you can use the Copy Plant function. If you use this function, the entry in the plant table and all dependent Customizing tables and system tables where the plant appears as a key are processed.

A plant can be used to ma

Central delivery plant

Regional sales o

Production site

Company headquarters

Plant maintenance site

When you create a ne


© SAP AG 1999

The Organizational Unit "Storage Location"

An organizational unit that enables you to distinguishbetween the various material stocks in a plant.Quantity-based inventory management data pertainingto the plant is summarized at the storage location level.


© SAP AG 1999

The Organizational Unit "Warehouse Number"

An organizational unit that maps the company from awarehouse management perspective. A warehousenumber corresponds to a warehouse complexcontaining different storage types that are organizeddifferently.The physical conditions of the warehouse are mappedin the warehouse number.

in Warehouse Management. It is used to

ber. These storage types represent the different kinds of storage available in the warehouse number. Examples of storage types include bulk storage, shelf storage, and fixed bin storage.

The warehouse number is the highest organization unit represent an entire warehouse complex, and is defined uniquely in the client. A warehouse number maps the physical conditions in a warehouse complex.

You define individual storage types within a warehouse num


© SAP AG 1999

Warehouse Number 140

Organizational Units in a Warehouse Number

Door 2

Door 1Door 3

Door 4

Pallet storage

Storage type007

Bulk storage

Storage type004

Fixed bin storage

Storage type005

Picking area 1

Picking area 2

Door 5

Shipping area

Stagingarea 1

Stagingarea 2

Storagetype916

Goodsreceiving

area

Storage type902

Storage section 001

Storage section 002

s similar process structure. A process structure is regarded as similar, for example, if the same

es. Goods receipt areas and goods issue areas are also considered to be storage

eas to facilitate putaway (for example, section 001 t is also possible to create picking areas

Further structuring options include doors and staging areas.

A warehouse number comprises various storage types. A storage type is a collection of storage binwith aputaway strategy is used (bulk storage, pallet storage, ...), or even if the bins have a geographical link.

There are two kinds of storage types: physical storage types (i.e. storage types that actually exist), and logical storage typtypes. However, since stocks are only stored here for short amounts of time, they are referred to as interim storage types.

Storage bins are grouped together into storage arfor fast-moving items, section 002 for slow-moving items). Ifor the purposes of picking, but this is optional.


© SAP AG 1999

The Organizational Unit "Transportation PlanningPoint"

Transportationplanning points

1010Hamburg Internat.

Ocean Freight

1011Hamburg RailTransportation

1200Dresden TruckTransportation

Planning, handling,and settlementof shipments

entral point in a company where shipments are organized and up of people

You can define transportation shipping points to meet your company's requirements - by location, for example, or by mode of transport.

A transportation planning point is the cmonitored. A transportation planning point can be a physical location or a groresponsible for processing shipments.

Every shipment is created and processed by a transportation planning point.


© SAP AG 1999

The Organizational Unit "Shipping Point"

A shipping point is an organizational unit that allows you to look at acompany from the point of view of shipping, the shipping materialsrequired, and the means of transportation required.

Shipping pointfor trucks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

Shippingpoint for rail

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

Plant 1012Plant 1000

or processing shipping activities. Every delivery is

processed by one shipping point. Shipping points are assigned to one or more plants. They can be broken down further into loading points.

Shipping points are important organizational units used for shipping. They represent the physical location or group of persons responsible f


© SAP AG 1999

Organizational Structure: Logistics and LES

Warehousenumber

Shipping points

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

Company code

Plant

Storagelocation

ABBC

B

Plant

Storagelocation

ABBC

B

Transportationplanning pointsTransportation

planning points

Shipping points

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

to a company code. Several transportation planning

a plant via a storage location. You can assign several plants and several storage locations of a plant to the same warehouse number. However, you can only assign a storage location to one warehouse.

The organizational units in LES are linked to the organizational structure of Logistics in the SAPSystem. You can set up these assignments in Customizing.

Transportation planning points are assignedpoints can be assigned to the same company code, but a transportation planning point cannot be assigned to more than one company code.

Shipping points are assigned to one or more plants. Several shipping points can be assigned to a plant, and the same shipping point can be assigned to several plants.

Warehouse numbers are assigned to


© SAP AG 1999

Storage Bins and Quants

Storage Bins

Bin TypeSmall

Bin TypeLarge

dual storage bins are defined within each storage type. A is st geographical or organizational unit that can be addressed by the system.

hey can be mapped as coordinates. 09)

Storage bins can be identified by means of a bin type. Example: Bin type P1 for upper bins, bin type P2 for lower bins

The existence of a material (with specific characteristic values) in a bin is referred to as a quant.

In Warehouse Management, the indivistorage bin the smalleTExample: 02-04-09 (aisle 02, stack 04, level


© SAP AG 1999

Storage Bins and Quants

Quants are defined by: Material (Batch) Stock category

Special stock Plant / storage location (Storage unit number)

Twoquants:mixedstorage

One quant

One quant

e in a storage bin. If a new quant is put away in this storage bin, and it is compatible with the

In bins designated for mixed storage, different quants may be stored in the same storage bin. These quants might be different materials, batches, special stocks, or stock categories.

In the case of non-mixed bins (bins designated for storing only one material), only one quant may bstoredquant already in the bin, this is referred to as an addition to existing stock. The two quants become one.


© SAP AG 1999

Information Contained in a Quant

MaterialPlant/storage locationBatch

Stock categorySpecial stockStorage unit

Available stockPutaway/pick?Weight

GR dateGR numberLast movement

Blocking indicator

tock

evel, "available stock" means that the stock in question is available for a physical words, that this quant can be put away, picked, or

Goods receipt data is stored at the quant level.

Information used to identify the quant is stored in the quant itself. Information on the available sand any open putaways and picks are also stored in the quant.

At the quant lmovement in Warehouse Management (in other transferred).


© SAP AG 1999

Material Master

General Data

Plant-Specific Data

Warehouse Management Data

Accounting Data

Sales and Distribution Data

Purchasing Data

...

s,

data, nd so on.

nization and distribution

In a company, the material master is the central source where material-specific data can be accessed. The material master is used by all of the components in SAP Logistics.

The material master contains full information on all the materials that a company designs, purchaseproduces, stores, and sells.

The material master is subdivided by area: basic data, sales and distribution data, purchasingadditional data for engineering/construction, accounting, costing, warehouse management, a

Basic data is relevant to all areas. It applies to all of the organizational units within a client.

Sales and distribution data is relevant to SD, and applies to the sales orgachannel.

Sales plant data is also relevant to SD, and applies to the delivery plant.

Data is also defined for a range of other areas, and applies to the various organizational units used in these areas.


© SAP AG 1999

Customer Master

Sales AreaData Relevant to SD

Company Code Data Relevant toAccounting

Valid for:Company code

General Data Relevant to SD andAccounting

Valid for allorganizationalunits

Valid for:Sales organizationDistribution channelDivision

this tion.

n,

The customer master contains all the data required for processing orders, outbound deliveries, invoices, and payments.

In Accounting, a customer is considered to be a company partner with a customer account. Forreason, customer master records are maintained both by Accounting and by Sales and Distribu

The customer master is subdivided into general data, sales area data, and company code data.

General data is relevant to SD and to Accounting. It is stored centrally (client-specific) to prevent data redundancy. It applies to all of the organizational units within a client.

Sales area data is relevant to SD, and applies to the sales area (combination of sales organizatiodistribution channel, and division).

Company code data is relevant to Accounting, and applies to the company code in question.


© SAP AG 1999

Vendor Master

Purchasing OrganizationData Relevant to Purchasing Valid for:

Purchasing organization

Company Code Data Relevant toAccounting

Valid for:Company code

General Data Relevant to Purchasingand Accounting

Valid for allorganizationalunits

on data.

hasing

The company code data is relevant for accounting and kept for the company code.

The vendor master contains all relevant information about the vendor. It will be maintained by accounting and purchasing.

The vendor master is divided into general data, company code data and purchasing organizati

General data is relevant for purchasing and accounting. They are stored centrally to avoid redundancies. They are kept for all organizational units within the client.

The purchasing organization data is relevant for purchasing and is kept for the purcorganization.


© SAP AG 1999

Name the organizational units and master dataused in Logistics Execution

Explain the relationships between the followingorganizational units: plant, storage location,warehouse number, shipping point, andtransportation planning point


Unit Summary


Exercises

d Master Data Topic: Organizational Units

Unit: Organizational Units an

At

• the following organizational

• Create, change, and display the following master data: storage bin, material, customer, vendor

the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Name the organizational units and master data used in Logistics Execution

Explain the relationships between units: plant, storage location, warehouse number, shipping point, and transportation planning point

S

ecessary organizational units, and edit the appropriate master data. You also display vendor and customer master data, and create a material.

1-1

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

1-1-2 ock information at the storage location level? At the

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Master data and organizational units are required for mapping the IDEmodel company in the SAP System. Since you are the project team member responsible for this, you assign the n

Describe the organizational units that are used for Logistics Execution.

1-1-1 A plant is an organization unit - from which perspective does it allow you to view a company? Which company functions can be mapped by a plant?

How detailed is the ststorage location level, can you find out how much of a material is stored in a specific storage bin?


1-1-3 The organizational unit ‘Warehouse number’ belongs to which application component?

____________________________________________________________

Where are shipments planned and controlled? Are deliveries also controlled here?

____________________________________________________________

1-2 ts.

-2-1 In LES, which organizational unit is assigned to a plant?

____________________________________________________________

rganizational unit is assigned to a company code?

____________________________________________________________

-2-3 How is a physical warehouse structure mapped in LES?

____________________________________________________________

If you want to use WM, a warehouse number must be assigned to a plant. How is this achieved?

____________________________________________________________

1-1-4

Describe the relationships between the various organizational uni

1

1-2-2 Which o

1

1-2-4


Units and Master Data Topic: Master Data

2-1

2-1-1 -##” in the “fixed

torage type. What is the storage section called?

_________________________________________________________

The bin has a maximum weight capacity of 2000 kg, and is located in fire-containment section A of the warehouse.

2-1-2 nforce a putaway block on the bin

until you have finished cleaning up. Use the possible entries function (F4) to select a suitable reason for the block.

Unit: Organizational

Create a new storage bin in your warehouse number.

In your warehouse (###), create a storage bin called “Boxthe only storage section that has been predefined bin” storage type. Assign

for this s

Before you can store materials in this new bin, you have some cleaning up to do around the bin. For this reason, e

o change the storage bin in the system. You can also use the Block Storage Bins transaction to block and unblock storage bins.

-1-3 Display the storage bin. Check that the block indicator has been set.

2-1-4 et an overview of the other storage bins in your warehouse. Display an overview of all the empty bins in shelf storage in your warehouse.

_____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

One possible way of blocking a storage bin is t

2

You also want to g

2-1-5 Display all the storage bins in storage type 004 in your warehouse. What does the value in the column entitled “Duration” (TiL) mean?

_______


2-1-6 f capacity you have available in your warehouse. What report would you run to find out the capacity utilization load of each storage type?

-1-7 You have now finished cleaning up your new storage bin. Unblock the bin.

3-1 ate aterial data in the SAP System. This data is stored in the material master. The first ing you do is create new views and new organizational levels for the material.

3-1-1 n

king, 24 pieces of the material are delivered at a time on pallets. The material is usually put away into shelf storage, and picked from shelf storage.

You want to see what kind o

2

If you want to put away a material into a warehouse, you must enter the approprimth

Specify that the Warehouse Management views should be used for the material LES04-##. Sector M and material type HAWA have already beedefined and are defaulted accordingly. Organization levels are plant 1200 and your warehouse number (###). Generally spea

type indicator. This indicator provides information on storage types in Customizing. The search is then run for these storage types.

3-1-2 should

aterial is put away and picked in fixed storage, you should ensure that the appropriate search strategy is used. Change the material accordingly.

3-1-3 ords for plant 1200 and your warehouse number (###). Define user defaults for the material master so that the system sets these values automatically.

The search sequence for the storage types is controlled by means of the putaway and removal storage

Assign material LES02-## to your new storage bin (BOX-##). The industry sector M and material type HALB have already been defaulted. Youcreate the material in plant 1200 in your warehouse (###). Since the m

In future, you will only process material master rec


Solutions

d Master Data Topic: Organizational Units

1-1 rganizational Units

1-1-1 ew anning. A

plant can be a central delivery plant, a regional sales office, a production site, the company’s headquarters, or even a central warehouse.

1-1-2 marized, and managed at the storage location level. It is not possible to determine the stock stored in a specific storage bin at the storage location level.

-1-3 The warehouse number belongs to Warehouse Management.

Shipments are planned and controlled at the transportation planning point, whereas deliveries are planned and controlled at the shipping point.

1-2 elationships Between Organizational Units

-2-1 Shipping points are assigned at the plant level.

-2-2 Transportation planning points are assigned to a company code.

In LES, a physical warehouse structure is mapped using a warehouse number, and individual storage types, storage sections, and storage bins.

If you want to use WM, the warehouse number must be assigned to a plant (via a storage location).

Unit: Organizational Units an

O

A plant is a unit that allows you to look at a company from the point of viof production, procurement, plant maintenance, and materials pl

Stocks are sum

1

1-1-4

R

1

1

1-2-3

1-2-4


r Data

2-1 Creatin

Logistic ecution → Master Data → Warehouse → Storage Bin → Crea

2-1-1 Enter your warehouse number (###), storage type 005, and Box-## as the nam

Unit: Organizational Units and Master Data Topic: Maste

g a Storage Bin

s → Logistics Exte → Manually

e of your new storage bin.


Storage section 001

Maximum weight 2000

Putaway block X

Block reason 3 (New storage bin)

2-1-3 ogistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Warehouse →

-1-4

).

e type 004. Place your e column entitled Duration (TiL), and press F1. This column

-1-6

2-1-7 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Stock → Block → Storage Bin Selection

Enter your warehouse number (###), and storage type 005. Select storage bin BOX-##, and click the Unblock icon. Select the Putaway block option,

LStorage Bin → Display

2 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes →Bins and Stock → Display → Empty Storage Bins

Enter your warehouse number (###), and storage type 002 (Shelf Storage

2-1-5 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Bin Status Report

Enter your warehouse number (###), and storagcursor on thtells you how many days the quant has already been in this storage bin.

2 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Capacity Load Utilization

Enter your warehouse number (###).

Bins and

and press Enter. Finally, click the Save icon in the standard toolbar.


3-1

3-1-1 ial ely

Enter material number LES04-##, and press Enter. In the Select View(s)

M ess Enter. In the Organizational Levels dialog .

type E1).

3-1-2

er LES02-##, and press Enter. In the Select View(s) Warehouse Management 1 and Warehouse

Management 2, and then press Enter. In the Organizational Levels dialog

On the Create Material screen, go to the Warehouse Management 1 tab page, and enter FIX in the Stock removal and Stock placement fields. On t 2 tab page, enter BOX-## in the Storage bin f

S

3-1-3 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Material → Material → Change → Immediately → Defaults → Organizational levels

Material Data

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Material → Mater→ Create → Immediat

dialog box, select the views Warehouse Management 1 and Warehouse

anagement 2, and then prbox, enter plant 1200, and warehouse number ###, and then press Enter

On the Create Material screen, go to the Warehouse Management 1 tab page, and enter REG in the Stock removal and Stock placement fields. On the Warehouse Management 2 tab page, enter an LE quantity of 24 PC (storage unit

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Material → Material→ Create → Immediately

Enter material numbdialog box, select the views

box, enter plant 1200, warehouse number ###, storage type 005, and then press Enter.

he Warehouse Management ield.

ave your changes.


Plant 1200

Warehouse number ###

Press Enter.


© SAP AG 1999

Inbound process in Warehouse Management (usingtransfer orders)

Transfer order for putaway

Inbound process involving inbound deliveries

Contents:

Goods Receipts


© SAP AG 1999

Name the various options available for workingthrough the inbound process in LogisticsExecution

Explain how transfer orders for putaway arestructured, and how they are used

Work through the inbound process (goodsreceipt, putaway) in a warehouse managed in WM


Goods Receipts: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

In the IDES model company, when goods arereceived, they are put away in a warehousemanaged in WM. As a member of the project team,you familiarize yourself with the various optionsthat can be used for goods receipts in the LogisticsExecution System. In the model company, whenmaterials are received from vendors, this isrecorded in the form of goods receipts thatreference the corresponding purchase orders.

Goods Receipts: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

The Inbound Process

Quant inbin


Quant in Quant in GR GR areaarea

Transferorder

Destination binPalletizationStrategies

Transferreqmt

Source binQuantityMaterial

Confirmtransfer

order

Difference?

Cleardifference

Purchaseorder

Goodsreceipt


erence to a purchase order and for putting (IM).

Management:

A transfer requirement is created in WM

The inbound process for posting a goods receipt with refaway the goods in WM begins in Inventory Management

The goods receipt is entered in Inventory

A material document is created in IM

An accounting document is created in IM

A quant is created in the GR area in WM


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt for Purchase Order: DocumentOverview

Purchaseorder

Materialdocument


GR posting

External vendoror

other plant

Delivery ofmaterials ordered

Transferrequirement

WM SystemPurchasing / Inventory Management

ds receipt is posted with reference to a purchase order, a material document in ent is generated in External

A transfer requirement is created in Warehouse Management.

When the googenerated in Inventory Management, and an accounting documAccounting.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt: Process Flow

GR Area

lly transferred first to the goods receipt (GR) area. The until a suitable storage bin has been determined for them.

ystem

You

ated to represent the change in value of the goods in the

- A transfer requirement is created since the goods will later have to be transferred by means of a transfer order to a storage type within the warehouse.

Goods Receipts: Real-Life Physical Process When goods are received, they are usuagoods are not put away in the warehouse

Goods Receipts: Process in the S

Inventory Management (IM)

- A material document is created to represent the movement of goods into the warehouse.can enter palletization data at this point in the process.

- An accounting document is crewarehouse.

Warehouse Management (WM)

- A quant is created in the Goods Receipt Area to represent the existence of goods now in the warehouse.


© SAP AG 1999

Information in Transfer Requirement

Tranfer requirement

?GR Area GI Area

Storage type

WhatHow muchPalletizationWhenWhere fromTriggered by

batch, stock category)?

How much has already been moved (if partial quantity)?

A transfer requirement (TR) contains the following information:

What is to be moved (material number,

How much is to be moved (quantity)?

How is it palletized (material document)?

What was the trigger/cause (movement type / reference)?


© SAP AG 1999

Planning a Movement

GR Area

High-ShelfStorage

Transfer requirement

Transfer order

ould be brought into the al, or picking).

.

The TR is later converted into one or more transfer orders (TO).

A transfer requirement (TR) is created in order to plan a stock movement.

The TR is a request that a specific quantity (quant) of a material shwarehouse (putaway) or removed from the warehouse (stock remov

The TR provides information about anticipated stock movements


© SAP AG 1999

Putaway Steps

Stock available

Goods receiptposting (TO

generated from TR)

Confirmtransfer

order

Pallet slip

Transferorder

basis of the

in.

Depending on the system set-up, transfer orders can also be created automatically in the background.

When goods are delivered, the goods receipt is entered in Inventory Management. On the goods receipt posting, a transfer requirement and a quant in the GR area are created.

In order to put away the goods, a transfer order is created with a reference to the transfer requirement. When the transfer order is created, the system determines the destination storage b

The transfer order documents are used to physically put away the goods. The transfer quantity remains unavailable in the warehouse until the putaway is confirmed in the system.

As soon as the physical putaway has taken place, you confirm the transfer order and also enter any differences that might arise.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt: Process Flow


Quant in GR area

TO

Destination binPalletizationStrategies

TR

Source binQuantityMaterial

Confirm TO

Quant inbin

Difference?

Cleardifference

Purchaseorder

Goodsreceipt


rms WM that the movement has been completed. Once

ion on differences has to

There are a range of options for automating this process at various points.

A transfer order with a reference to the transfer requirement is created in WM. This document forms the basis for carrying out the actual physical transfer in the warehouse.

When you confirm the transfer order, this infothe transfer order has been confirmed, the goods are regarded as available. Any differences noted during putaway are also entered at this time.

These differences are posted to an interim record fore differences. Informatbe passed on to IM, where the differences are cleared.


© SAP AG 1999

Information in Transfer Order

GR Area GI AreaHigh-ShelfStorage

from a source storage bin to a destination storage

the following information:

ansfer order needs comes from several sources:

r determining the source or destination storage bin

Source documents such as transfer requirements and deliveries

A transfer order is an instruction to move materials bin within a warehouse number.

Transfer orders contain

Material (quant ID)

Quantity to be moved

Source, destination and return storage bin

The information that the tr


Warehouse management movement type

Strategies fo

User input


© SAP AG 1999

Transfer Order for Transfer Requirement

Transferrequirement

Item 1

Item 2

Header

Transfer order

Item 1

Item 2FromTo

FromTo

Item 3

GR Area

uantity of a transfer requirement item is distributed among several storage bins (for example, one storage bin per pallet), several transfer order items will be created for this transfer requirement item.

Before the goods can be actually put away, the transfer requirement has to be converted into a transfer order.

If the q


© SAP AG 1999

Creating Transfer Orders: Levels

Transfer Requirements List

Overview of TR Items

Preparation Screen

Detail Screen of TO Item

TR Item

TR

irement list contains all transfer requirements that match the selection criteria er order in

ent items contains all the items in the selected transfer

The detail screen of a transfer order item contains a source item, a destination item, and sometimes also a return item.

The transfer requspecified. In this list, you can select a transfer requirement, process it and create the transfthe background.

The overview of transfer requiremrequirement. It is possible to select one or several items in the list and process them either in theforeground or in the background.

On the preparation screen, the quantity of a specific transfer requirement item is distributed to different storage bins (where appropriate, palletization instructions are proposed by the system).


© SAP AG 1999

Confirming a Transfer Order

GR Area

Warehouse no.

TO 1895

Item Material Dest. type Dest.bin Difference

Confirm Transfer Order

Active work

10 T - BW 001 11 - 05 - 0520 T - BW 001 13 - 04 - 0630 T - MS 005 01 - 17

Confirm.Inactive

06/25 14:36 h

u are in effect verifying that the another and that the

You can make settings in Customizing to specify whether or not transfer orders should be confirmed automatically.

When you confirm a transfer order or a transfer order item, yorequired quantity of material has actually been transferred from one location toprocessing of the transfer order or item has been completed.

The TO Confirmation function provides three different confirmation options:

Standard 1st screen - confirm that actual quantities are equal to target quantities 2nd screen - enter any differences that have arisen (1 screen per item)

Input listA single screen for confirming quantities and entering any differences

TO confirmation can be carried out directly in the warehouse using a PDC device.


© SAP AG 1999

Handling Differences

40 pc

GR Area

Confirmation TargetActualDifference

50 pc40 pc10 pc

GR posting

TO ItemFROM GR Target 50 pcTO Shelf

Difference postingInventory Management

50 pc

Difference10 pc

ou

ch

When differences are processed in the system, the quantity of stock in the Inventory Management and Warehouse Management systems remains the same.

If a difference is detected during a stock transfer, you can enter this into the system when yconfirm the transfer order.

The quantity that makes up the difference is automatically posted to an interim record for differences.

In a second step, the differences are cleared in Inventory Management either manually or using batinput.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt with Inbound Deliveries:Process Flow

Negative Negative quant in quant in GR GR areaarea

TO

Dest. binPalletizationStrategies

ConfirmTO

QuantQuant ininbinbin

Difference?

Goods receipt

Purchaseorder Inbound

delivery

Inventory Management Warehouse Management

Cleardifference

Adjustment?

nagement before you actually post the goods

ansfer order controls the actual physical

Once the putaway has been confirmed, the goods receipt is posted. Any differences that occur can be entered in the system at this point. The quantity is now regarded as available stock.

If you wish, you can put away goods in Warehouse Mareceipt. To do this, you create an inbound delivery for a purchase order. The WM system uses this inbound delivery as a kind of 'to-do' list for putaway.

A transfer order is created for the inbound delivery. This trputaway. The quantity to be put away is stored as a negative quant in the goods receipt area. In effect, this quantity is not yet regarded as available stock.


© SAP AG 1999

Inbound Delivery

Outboundshipment

Inboundshipment Warehouse

Inbounddelivery

Inbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Inbounddelivery

Inbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

livery represents the materials that are delivered and received at a goods

An inbound delivery is a request that goods should be put away in a warehouse. A transfer order for putaway can be generated from an inbound delivery.

In the system, an inbound dereceiving point. An inbound delivery is a document that is structured in the same way as an outbounddelivery for a goods issue.


© SAP AG 1999

Different Ways of Creating an Inbound Delivery

EDI

Manually

Collectiveprocessing

Inbounddelivery

Purchaseorder

n this

Inbound deliveries should be created as early as possible in order to generate a worklist. Like transfer requirements, they do not block either storage bins or materials.

In the LE System, there are different ways in which you can create an inbound delivery:

Using EDI communication - where a shipping notification is transmitted from the vendor. Icase, the system generates an inbound delivery automatically.

The inbound delivery is created manually with reference to a purchase order.

The inbound deliveries are created with the help of a worklist (if they are not created via EDI or manually).

If you wish to generate inbound deliveries with a worklist, the purchase order confirmation must be set up in Purchasing in such a way that inbound deliveries can be created automatically.


© SAP AG 1999

Information in Inbound Delivery

Inbound delivery

WhatHow muchWhenWhere fromVendorStatus

?

Inbound delivery #180005614

Vendor

Transport Status overviewItems

20 Material2 Plant Storage location ...

10 Material1 Plant Storage location ...

Putaway

rived from the purchase order. This information is the fer requirement:

n)?

uses are kept up to date in an inbound delivery:

Goods movement status

The inbound delivery contains information desame as the information contained in the trasn

What is to be moved (quant informatio

How much is to be moved (quantity)?

What was the trigger/cause (movement type / reference)?

How much has already been moved (if partial quantity)?

The following stat

Putaway status

Storage status


© SAP AG 1999

Name the various options available for workingthrough the inbound process in LogisticsExecution

Explain how transfer orders for putaway arestructured, and how they are used

Work through the inbound process (goodsreceipt, putaway) in a warehouse managed in WM


Goods Receipts: Unit Summary


Exercises

Topic: Goods Receipts and Transfer Requirements

Unit: Goods Receipts

Post a goods receipt to a warehouse managed in WM, and describe the

information contained in a transfer requirement

At the conclusion of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Describe the inbound process in WM (including transfer requirements)

•

are ible for Logistics Execution, you post

the goods receipt for the purchase orders, and put away the goods in a warehouse managed using WM.

1-1 e

t for the pallets you have received, and put them to storage, check to see what the current stock situation is for material LES04-##.

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

1-2

1-2-1 ent number of the purchasing document for material LES04-##. Use the material number as search criteria. What is the purchase order number?

____________________________________________________________

In the IDES model company, goods receipts for purchase orders are posted, and then the goods are put away (placed in storage). Since you the project team member respons

You have ordered accessories for your flat-screen monitors from vendor 1000. Thmaterials you ordered have now been delivered to the goods receiving point. Before you actually post a goods receipin

1-1-1 Display the stock in the Inventory Management view and in the Warehouse Management view. Do the stocks already exist in the goods receipt area?

Post a goods receipt for the purchase order for 72 pieces of material LES04-##.

Use the matchcode function to find the docum


1-2-2 Specify a quantity of 72 pieces. How many pieces were ordered?

____________________________________________________________

-2-3 For which storage location do you enter the goods receipt?

____________________________________________________________

Which movement type is used for goods receipts that reference purchase orders?

____________________________________________________________

Post the goods receipt for the 72 pieces of material LES04-##. What is the number of the material document that is created?

____________________________________________________________

1-3 the Inventory Management view and in e Warehouse Management view.

____________________________________________________________

-3-2 In which storage type and in which storage bin is the material stored?

type: ___________________________________________________

Storage bin: ____________________________________________

Display the storage bin and the quant. What is the goods receipt date of the quant?

____________________________________________________________

1

1-2-4

1-2-5

Once again, display the stock overviews inth

1-3-1 How many pieces of the material are available in total?

1

Storage


1-4 pt posting also generated a transfer quirement. Display the information contained in the transfer requirement.

-4-1 Look at this information to find out the following:

Open quantity: _____________________________________________

-4-2 What is the transfer order quantity?

____________________________________________________________

In addition to the quant, the goods receire

1

Transfer requirement. number: _________________________________________________________

Requirement type: _____________________________________________

Requirement tracking number: _________________________________________________________

Source storage type: _________________________________________________________

Source storage bin: _________________________________________________________

Movement type: _____________________________________________

1

Display the processing status of the transfer requirement.

Topic: Transfer Order for Putaway



• anaged in

contained in the transfer order

Clear differences that arise during transfer

2-1 -## was delivered on 3 pallets. Each of these pallets holds 24 pieces aterial. Put away these pallets, and find out which storage bins the material

put away to.

Create a transfer order that references the transfer requirement for the purchase order that you looked at in exercise 1-4.


Use transfer orders to put away materials in a warehouse mWM

• Describe the information

• Confirm transfer orders

•

Material LES04of the mis

2-1-1

Choose TO foreground from the list of transfer requirements.

Which storage unit type is proposed for the 3 pallets? Where does this information come from?

____________________________________________________________

2-1-2


To put away the pallets individuall2-1-3 y, choose Put away foreground. Make a note of the destination storage bins. Save your transfer order, and make a note of the transfer order number.

___________ _______________________________________

Transfer order _______________________________________

_____________________________________________________

Display the WM Stock Overview of material LES04-##. Is the material available in the bins?

____________________________________________________________

2-2 aterial. Unfortunately, 2 pieces of material LES04-## ll off one of the pallets. This means that only 70 pieces were actually put away.

2-2-1 there was a difference of 2 pieces. Enter this difference for the pallet of the third item in the transfer order. Confirm the difference in the dialog box.

Storage type Storage bin ___________ _______________________________________

___________ _______________________________________

2-1-4 Display the transfer order. What is the confirmation status of item 1?

_______

2-1-5

You have now put away the mfe

Confirm the transfer order in a single step. Also specify that

al from its bin and the transfer of the quants separately. In our example, though, both these activities are confirmed in a single step.

It is also possible to confirm the picking of a materi


Once again, display the stock overvie2-2-2 w of material LES04-##. In which storage bins is the material to be found? What is the total stock of the material in Inventory Management?

____ ___________ _________

____________________________________________________________

2-2-3 econcile the stocks in Inventory Management. To do this,

____________________________________________________________

Storage type Storage bin Quantity ___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

_______

Stock in Inventory Management

You now have to rpost the difference in WM. What is the number of the material document that is generated?

Management → Clear Differences → Inventory Management

doing this, display the stocks in WM and Inventory ment again.

_ ___________ _________

____________________________________________________________

To clear differences, choose Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Physical Inventory→ In Warehouse

2-2-4 Once you have finished Manage


___________ ___________ _________

__________



Solutions

Topic: Goods Receipts and Transfer Requirements

1-1

1-1-1 k M stock overview,

gement).

aterial do not yet exist in the goods receipt area.

1-2

1-2-1 for help, and select matchcode M: Purchasing documents for aterial LES04-## as search criteria. Press

1-2-2 #. ails of the line item in question. On the Quantity tab

page, you will see the quantity that was ordered – you can change the quantity to 72 pieces.

the Where tab page. The goods receipt is posted for storage location 0###.

You will also find the movement type that was used to post the goods receipt on the Where tab page. This is movement type 101.

Material document number: varies (number assigned internally)


Displaying stock information in WM and Inventory Management

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display

To display the Inventory Management stock overview, choose Total Stocper Material (Inventory Management). To display the Wchoose Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Mana

Stock in Inventory Management overview: 0 pieces

Stock in Warehouse Management overview: 0 pieces

The stocks of the m

Posting of goods receipt

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods Receipt for Purchase Order, Order, Other Transactions → Enter Goods Receipt for Purchase Order

Press F4material. Enter plant 1200 and mEnter.

Purchase order number: varies

Select the line containing the purchase order item for material LES04-#The system display det

1-2-3 Choose

1-2-4

1-2-5 Select OK for the purchase order item, and choose Post.


1-3 WM and Inventory Management

1-3-1 oose Total Stock per Material (Inventory Management).

k on the available quantity – this the quant.

1-4

aOrder →

1-4-1 rial, you can see all open transfer

ent,

n order

mber of your purchase order

Movement type: 101 – Goods Receipt for Purchase Order

To display the transfer order quantity, choose Processing status.

T ieces

Displaying stock information in

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display

To display the Inventory Management stock overview, ch

Inventory Management: _____________________________________________

1-3-2 Stock in Warehouse Management overview: Choose Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management).

Storage type: 902

To display the storage bin, place your cursor on the line containing Plant 1200, and choose Bin stock.

Storage bin: Number of your purchase order

To view the goods receipt date, clicdisplays

Goods receipt date: today

Displaying a transfer requirement

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods Receipt for Purch se Order, Order, Other Transactions → Putaway → Create Transfer

By Material

Enter material number LES04-##, and press Enter. On the screen entitled List of Transfer Requirements for Materequirements for material LES04-##. To display a transfer requiremclick the transfer requirement number in question.

Transfer requirement number: varies

Requirement type: B – Purchase order

Requirement tracking umber: Number of your purchase

Source storage type: 902 – GR Area External Receipts

Source storage bin: Nu

Open quantity: 72 pieces

1-4-2

ransfer order quantity: 0 p


Receipts Topic: Transfer Order for Putaway

2-1 a

LogistiPurcha r Transactions → Putaway → Create Transfer

rder → By Material

2-1-1 sfer requirements, choose TO in foreground to create a transfer order.

2-1-2 a is al master record in the Warehouse

-1-3 To put away the items individually, choose Putaway foreground, and then

Single Document

Enter the number of your transfer order, and press Enter. You have not yet confirmed the putaway.

2-1-5 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Internal Warehouse Processes → Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management)

72 pieces are to be put away into shelf storage. Click Bin stock. The stock is not yet available.

Unit: Goods

Putaw y

cs → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods Receipt for se Order, Order, Othe

O

In the list of tran

The system proposes palletization (3 pallets, e ch with 24 pieces). Thinformation is derived from the materiManagement 2 view.

2choose Post.

2-1-4 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods Receipt for Purchase Order, Order, Other Transactions → Putaway →Display Transfer Order →


2-2

Other Transactions → Putaway → Confirm Transfer rder

-2-1

order, and press Enter. Decrease the quantity of the third item to 22 pieces. Save the confirmation, and confirm the difference in the dialog box.

2-2-2 is uti →

-##, and press Enter.

e

k MM stock.

Stock in Inventory Management: 72 pieces

2-2-3 se

te. On the screen entitled Clear Difference in Inventory Management, choose Clear.

2-2-4 u →

-##, and press Enter.

an click MM stock.

Stock in Inventory Management: 70 pieces

Confirmation/differences

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Inbound Process → Goods Receipt for Purchase Order, Order,O

2 Single Document → In One Step

Enter the number of your transfer

Logistics → Log tics Exec on → Internal Warehouse Processes Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management)

Enter material number LES04

Storage type Quantity

002 – Shelf Storag 70 pieces

999 - Differences 2 pieces

To display the stock in Inventory Management, clic

Logistics Execution → Internal Warehou Processes → Physical Inventory→ In Warehouse Management → Clear Differences → Inventory Management Enter your warehouse number (###), and storage type 999. Choose Execu

Logistics → Logistics Exec tion → Internal Warehouse Processes Bins and Stock → Display → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management)

Enter material number LES04

Storage type Quantity

002 – Shelf Storage 70 pieces

To display the stock in Inventory M agement,


© SAP AG 1999

Outbound Deliveries

Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery

Picking

Packing

Goods Issues

Contents:

Goods issue


© SAP AG 1999

Get an overview and describe the outboundprocess for outbound deliveries


Goods Issues: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

In the IDES model company, goods are issued tocustomers using outbound deliveries. The goodsare picked in a warehouse managed in WM. Whenyou plan and perform picking, you explore thevarious options available for optimizing theoutbound process. As a member of the projectteam, you want to find out how the process flowscan be mapped in Logistics Execution.

Goods Issues: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

The Shipping Process

Warehouse

• Packing

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.......................... .......................... ..........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

• Shipping documents • Picking• Goods issue

Functions affecting shipping:• Determination of shipping point• Determination of route• Scheduling


• Monitoring ofshipping due dates

• Create delivery

Shippingpoint

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4

1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1

2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8

2 9 3 0 3 1

nce documents (e.g. sales orders and purchase orders)

ound deliveries

arehouse Management)

shipping documents

eing processed

e carried out

The outbound deliveries for which goods issues are posted in the shipping department can be used to create a worklist for billing (billing due list).

SAP LE functions available for shipping processing include:

Monitoring of shipping due dates in refere

Creating and editing outb

Monitoring availability

Monitoring capacity in the warehouse

Picking (with a connection to W

Packing the outbound delivery

Printing out and passing on

Processing the goods issue

Controlling using overviews of

- The outbound deliveries currently b

- The activities still to b

- Potential bottlenecks


© SAP AG 1999

Structure of an Outbound Delivery

Change Outbound Delivery 80004893:Change Outbound Delivery 80004893: OverviewOverview

Outbnd delivery:Ship-to party:

Item overview

800048932145

Picking Loading Transportation Status overview

All items

Header details:Header details:

10 1400-100 Headlights 5 PC TAN

Item details:Item details:

Header:Header:e.g. ship-to party,shipping point, route

Items:Items:e.g. material, quantity

rent screens:

ouped

ing, ons, etc.

The item detail screen also contains similar tab pages with item-specific information.

A delivery document comprises a header and any number of items.

The header contains data that applies to the entire document. This means, for example, that the ship-to party, shipping point, and route are unique for each outbound delivery.

The individual items contain above all information on the material to be delivered.

The information in the delivery document is displayed on a range of diffeThe overview screen contains header and item information, grouped thematically on several tab pages. This means that important data can be viewed on a single screen.

A further screen is available for displaying further header and item details. This data is also grtogether thematically onto tab pages.

Header details include data sorted into the following groups: processing, picking, loadtransportation, foreign trade/customs, texts, partners, output, package tracking, conditi


© SAP AG 1999

Relationship Between Orders and OutboundDeliveries

Complete delivery

Partial delivery

Merging

OrderOrderOrder

OrderOrderOrder

OrderOrderOrder

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

OrderOrderOrder Outbounddelivery

Outbounddelivery

he customer master record of the sold-

means

as agreed to partial delivery. Partial deliveries can be handled in different ways.

The sold-to party has agreed that several orders can be merged together to form a single outbound delivery.

Orders can be delivered in different ways. Using indicators in tto party or in the customer-material info record, you can define special agreements. These are then proposed in the order, where they can be changed as required:

The sold-to party wants the order to be delivered in its entirety (complete delivery). Thisthat an order cannot be split up into several outbound deliveries. This agreement with regard to complete delivery does not, however, exclude a merging of orders (if this is permitted).

The sold-to party hThe way a partial delivery is handled is determined by the partial delivery agreement at the item level in the order.


© SAP AG 1999

Document Flow

Document

. Order 5373

Delivery 80003752

. WM transfer order 2651

. WL Outbound delivery 49007029

Document flow

Date

06/05

06/09

06/09

06/10

Overall processing status

Completed

Being processed

Completed

Completed

Outbounddelivery

OrderOrder TransferTransferorderorder

...

ing, it is possible to find the sequent documents such as the

ing status of the outbound delivery is "Being processed" until the billing document has been generated. This applies even if picking has been completed, and the goods issue has already been posted.

Since documents are interlinked in SD sales and distribution processorder that gave rise to a particular outbound delivery (or to find subWM transfer order, goods issue document, and billing document).

It is possible to display these documents from the document flow.

The document flow and the statuses displayed here allow you to monitor the progress made in processing an activity.

You can display the document flow at the header level, for one or for all items in the document in question.

Note: The overall process


© SAP AG 1999

Ways of Creating an Outbound Delivery

OrderOrder Delivery

Collective processing of orders and order items due for shipping using different selection options

Create outbound delivery manually

red to his/her personal requirements.

ts for delivery. These include the material, .

You can also create the outbound delivery manually.

Delivery scenarios are a way of mapping the various business processes involved in a delivery. Every user can configure a delivery scenario that is tailoAdditional criteria are available for selecting documenpartner, document type, shipping condition, and so on


© SAP AG 1999

Steps in the Outbound Process

Create TO for

outbounddelivery

Transfer order

Confirmtransfer

order

Postgoods issue

s.

is

Depending on your system setup, you can specify that the system should create transfer orders automatically in the background.

In order to pick a material, an outbound delivery is created.

To pick the goods, a transfer order is created with a reference to this outbound delivery. When the transfer order is created, the system determines the source storage bin.

The goods are physically removed from the warehouse with the help of the transfer order document

As soon as the physical stock removal is completed, the user confirms the transfer order. Here it ispossible to enter differences straight away.

Once the transfer order has been confirmed, the goods issue is posted. You can work through thstep when you are confirming the TO.


© SAP AG 1999

Describe the structure and content of a transferorder for an outbound delivery

Describe the various options available forcreating transfer orders for outbound deliveries

Create transfer orders for outbound deliveries,and use these documents for picking

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:

Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery: TopicObjectives


© SAP AG 1999

Lean WM - Using a TO as a Pick Order

Delivery Transferorder

Fixed bin 01

arehouse nuLean WM)

W mber 010(

Fixed bin 02

Fixed bin 03

Fixed bin 04

Output options

Individual TOs:

• Individual printout

• Multiple printout

Groups:

• Individual printout

• Multiple printout

• Pick list

Send IDocs tosubsystems

ns

ny transfer

d for Lean WM are subject to

You can enter performance data (such as assignment to a picker, confirmation of actual times, or determination of target times) for this type of transfer order.

Lean WM functionality makes it possible to create transfer orders for deliveries even if storage biare not managed in the WM component.

Transfer orders that are created for deliveries in Lean WM are used to pick stock from available fixed bins in the warehouse that are managed entirely at the storage location level.

The characteristics of a transfer order created for Lean WM are basically the same as for aorder:

You can specify whether or not the transfer orders createconfirmation.

You can confirm overdeliveries, shortages and batches.

You can print out the transfer orders using WM functionality.

You can transmit Lean WM transfer order data to external systems.


© SAP AG 1999

Connection Between Shipping and WM

YesYes

NoNo

No

Createoutbounddelivery

Pick from fixed bin

PostGI

Pickingstorage loc.?

Differences?

TO printout

IDoc

Create TO

Lean WMLean WM WMWM

Confirm TO

YesYes Copy TO datato delivery?

Pick

Create TO TO printoutTO printout

IDoc

the s are to be picked are

e source bin is determined on the basis of the tegy).

The process is completed by posting the goods issue.

WM and Shipping are linked to each other via the picking location.

If the picking location is managed in WM, the outbound deliveries are also picked in WM. When transfer order is processed, the storage bins from which the materialdetermined. Picking is carried out on the basis of the information in the TO. The picking process ends with confirmation (and the option of entering differences).

If the picking location is managed using Lean WM, thfixed bin of the material (and not on the basis of a stra


© SAP AG 1999

Ways of Creating TOs for Deliveries

Create transfer order manually

Create transfer order from Delivery Monitor

Create transfer order automatically/directly

Collective processing for a group of deliveries

Create transfer order as a subsequent function for the delivery

Transfer orderDelivery

e for picking, and

tion of the outbound delivery.

TO as a subsequent function of the outbound delivery.

There are different ways of creating TOs for an outbound delivery:

Manually using the "Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery" transaction.

In the Outbound Delivery Monitor, by selecting all outbound deliveries ducreating TOs for these.

Create TO directly/automatically upon crea

Multiple processing for several deliveries.


© SAP AG 1999

Two-Step Picking

Pick TO for onegroup

Step 1: Picking

Item 1 Mat.01 10 pc

From 001To 200

From 001To 200

Item 2 Mat.02 10 pc

Step 2: Allocation

FROM: 200TO: 916

TO #252

Mat.01 3 pcMat.02 1 pc

FROM: 200TO: 916

TO #251


FROM: 200TO: 916

TO #250


DEL 4813Mat.01 3 pcMat.02 4 pc



Group

Material-basedpicking

Delivery-basedallocation

ed are grouped together, totaled up, and picked as an "overall quantity" (pick step). The group

picking).

In the standard system, the material in question determines whether 2-step picking is used.

In 2-step picking, the removal of the material is optimized with regard to quantity. The quantities requircan consist of deliveries or transfer requirements. The destination storage type is an interim storage type.

In a second step, the quantities are allocated to the individual requirements (allocation). This step is a multiple processing step, and can also include materials picked using 1-step picking (direct


© SAP AG

Packing: Functions

Pallet 3011

Trailer 7821

Crate1

Pallet 5211

Packinglist

Shippinglabel

Delivery

Crate2

Crate3

Crate4

g an then be packed into further shipping materials. This, in turn, results in new shipping

-level

om the batch split items),

or for the individual batch split items. If you pack the batch split items individually, you will be able to identify the shipping element in which a specific batch is to be found.

Packing is in effect the assignment of delivery items to shipping materials. The resulting shippinelements celements. There is no limit to the number of levels of shipping elements you create (multipacking).

You can unpack from shipping elements, as well as empty and delete shipping elements.

For items involving a batch split, you can specify in the delivery item category whether packing should be carried out for the main item (using the total quantity derived fr


© SAP AG 1999

All shippingactivities

completed?

Posting a Goods Issue: Overview

Delivery 80003714

Goods issue

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

• Manually (change outbound delivery)

• Multiple processing

• During TO confirmation

• Using Outbound Delivery Monitor

Shipping point

function to first of all select all outbound deliveries for which a goods

can use the Outbound

nd delivery. If any errors occur, these are logged (if, for example, batch or serial number information is missing for unpicked or partially picked items). If errors occur, the goods issue is not posted.

Shipping activities are completed when a goods issue is posted for the outbound delivery.

All compulsory shipping activities must be completed before you can post the goods issue. These might be compulsory confirmation, or compulsory picking status.

You can post the goods issue by changing an individual outbound delivery. Alternatively, you canuse the multiple processingissue is to be posted, and then to actually post goods issues for these. YouDelivery Monitor for this.

You can also post the goods issue when you confirm the transfer order.

When you change an individual outbound delivery, you can specify the actual goods issue date (without changing the planned date) before posting the goods issue.

The goods issue applies to the entire outbou


© SAP AG 1999

Effects of a Goods Issue Posting

Order

Goods issue

Account 1 Stock

X X

Materialstock

DeliveryBillingdue list

Material 1 100 PC

Outbounddelivery

Interimstoragearea

re imposed as n change in the delivery - for example, you cannot change any quantities. This is und delivery must be a precise reflection of the real-life situation.

s.

ce sheet accounts of inventory accounting.

tbound delivery.

Creates the billing due list.

Once you have posted the goods issue for the outbound delivery, certain restrictions ato the data you cabecause the outbo

The goods issue

Reduces the stock in Inventory Management, and clears the interim storage bin

Posts the value change to the balan

Clears the delivery requirements.

Writes status information in the ou

Is recorded in the document flow.


© SAP AG 1999

Get an overview and describe the outboundprocess for outbound deliveries


Goods Issues: Unit Summary


Goods Issues Exercises

Topic: Outbound Deliveries

Unit: Goods Issues

•

Use the delivery monitor for creating deliveries as part of the outbound process


• Describe how outbound delivery documents are structured, and how they are used

Create a sales order, and name and work through the various options available for creating deliveries

• Describe the information contained in outbound deliveries, and specify where this information comes from

•

n the Dresden warehouse of

shipping activities (from creating the delivery and picking the goods through to posting the goods issue) in the Logistics Execution System.

1-1 pieces of material LES02-## and 5 pieces of material ation

the following data:

##

ber:

20 LES04-## 5 pcs

Save the order.

In the IDES model company, goods are issued to customers using outbound deliveries. The goods are stored ithe IDES model company. This warehouse is managed in WM. The goods are also picked and sent from here.

A customer orders monitors and accessories. You process this order and work through the subsequent

Customer T-S11B## orders 5LES04-## from you. Create a sales order for this, and check over the informthat is relevant to shipping.

1-1-1 Create the new sales order with

Order type: OR

Sold-to party: T-S11B

Purchase order num ##-01

Material: Item 10 LES02-## 5 pcs

Item


1-1-2 Now display the order you have just created. Which delivering plants have been determined for both items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

20:

1-1-3 Which shipping points have been determined for both items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item ___________________________________________

s document, you can check over and edit the delivering plant and shipping point on the Shipping detail screen of the item in question.

___

1-2 ine the dates on which the individual shipping and transportation ctivities have to start so that the goods ordered are delivered on time to the

ns

In the sale

1-1-4 What is the function of the shipping point?

____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

Now determacustomer. 1-2-1 Determine the various shipping dates for item 10.

Goods issue date: ____________________________________ Delivery date: ____________________________________

Loading date: ____________________________________ Material availability date: _______________________________ Tra portation planning date: _________________________

to r the item in question, and then go to the details

of the schedule line with the confirmed quantity. Then go to the Shipping tab page.

You can display a detailed list of shipping deadlines for the confirmed schedule line for a sales document item. To do this, gothe schedule line fo


2-1

2-1-2 n data again, only this time use the material

____________________________________________________________

Save the outbound delivery.

3-1 Display the outbound delivery again, and familiarize yourself with its structure and

-1-1

_________

-1-3

Picked quantity: _____________________________________________

3-1-4

____________________________________________________________

Create an outbound delivery for the order you created above.

2-1-1 Select the shipping point that is to be responsible for this. Use today’s date as the selection date. Can you deliver the order? What is the reason for this?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Enter the same selectioavailability date as the selection date. Can you deliver the order item? What is the reason for this?

____________________________________________________________

contents. 3 Derive the following information from the outbound delivery:

Overall status of picking: _______________________________________ Overall status of WM activities:__________________________________ Warehouse no.:____________________________________________ Storage type: ________________________________________________ Bin (WM): __________________________________________________ Goods issue status of item 10: ___________________________________ 3-1-2 Which pieces of information are used to determine the warehouse number? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ 3 What is the delivery quantity and what is the picked quantity?

Delivery quantity: ____________________________________________

Can you now post the goods issue for the outbound delivery? What is the reason for this?


Topic: Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery

Unit: Goods Issues

ders for

• Create transfer orders for outbound deliveries, and use these

4-1

v material LES02-##.

e following for item 10 of your outbound ? (Create a new session to do this.)

________

4-2

____________________________________________________________


• Describe the structure and content of a transfer order for an outbound delivery

• Describe the various options available for creating transfer oroutbound deliveries

documents for picking

Before you start picking, check the stocks of the materials, and find out what the various statuses are.

4-1-1 Display the WM and IM stock o erviews of


___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

Stock in Inventory Management ____________________________________________________________

4-1-2 What are the statuses of thdelivery

Picking: _____________________________________________

WM activities: _______________________________________

Goods issue: _______________________________

Create a transfer order (for picking) for your outbound delivery.

4-2-1 What are the various options available for creating a transfer order for the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________


foreg em

4-2-2 Now create a transfer order for the outbound delivery manually in the round. Display the preparation screen for putting away the first it .

sue for Outbound Delivery → icking → Create Transfer Order → Single Document. On the

screen of the items to be processed, select the first item, and choose Storage type search sequence.

-2-3 Which movement type is used for the outbound delivery?

Storage type Storage bin

Storage type Storage bin

4-2-7 t material, you specify that you wish to pick the quired quantity from a partial pallet (in other words, you specify this

u from

Use the following transaction: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods IsP

4

____________________________________________________________

4-2-4 Which destination storage type and destination storage bin are defaulted?

___________ _______________________________________

4-2-5 Now pick the required quantity in the foreground. Which storage bin does the system propose for picking? Can you change this storage bin manually?

___________ _______________________________________

4-2-6 Create the TO item for material LES02-## by choosing the Generate and next material function.

When you pick the nexreman ally and thus get around the default picking strategy). Select 5 pieces

a partial pallet.

To determine the stock of a material in a specific bin, choose Stock and enter the quantity you wish to pick.

4-2-8 Generate the transfer order by saving it. What is the number of the transfer order generated?

____________________________________________________________


4-3 a and find out what the

3-1 aterial LES02-##. Is there any

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

_ ___________ _________ _________________

_______ _________________

____________________________________________________________

4-3-2 delivery.

WM activities: ____________________________________

Goods issue: ____________________________________

_________

4-4 You ha

4-4-1 transfer order. Since you want to reuse the bin that has

removal from stock separately from the actual transfer. Confirm the removal from stock, and display your transfer order. What is the confirmation status of the items?

____________________________________________________________

Check the stocks of the m terials again, various statuses are now.

4- Display the WM and IM stock overviews of mstock to be put away?

Storage type Storage bin Quantity Quantity to put away ___________ ___________ _________ _________________

__________

___________ ___________ __


Also find out the following statuses of item 10 in your outbound

Picking: ____________________________________

Picked quantity: ___________________________

ve now completed picking of the goods in question.

Confirm your become free as a result of picking as quickly as possible, you confirm the


4-4-2 Now also confirm the transfer of the and check the various stocks of the m

material to its destination storage bin, aterial.

_ ___________ _________ _________________

____________________________________________________________

Picked quantity: _____________________________________

Stock in Warehouse Management

Storage type Storage bin Quantity Quantity to put away ___________ ___________ _________ _________________

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

__________


4-4-3 Also find out the following statuses of item 10 in your outbound delivery.

Picking: _____________________________________

WM activities: _____________________________________

Goods issue: _____________________________________

Topic: Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery

Unit: Goods Issues


•

Complete the outbound process by posting a goods issue

5-1

Material document: ___________________________________________


Describe the various options available for posting a goods issue in the Logistics Execution System

•

Since the goods have now left the warehouse, you now have to post a goods issue for the outbound delivery so that stocks are reduced accordingly.

5-1-1 Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery. Use the delivery monitor to do this, and find the material document that was generated.

You can view the material document in the document flow for the outbound delivery.

-1-2 ews.

_ ___________ _________ _________________

Picked quantity: ____________________________________

5 Display the WM and IM stock overvi

Stock in Warehouse Management

Storage type Storage bin Quantity Quantity to put away

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

___________ ___________ _________ _________________

__________

Stock in Inventory Management ____________________________________________________________

5-1-3 Also find out the following status of item 10 in your outbound delivery.

Picking: ____________________________________

WM activities: ____________________________________

Goods issue: ____________________________________


Goods Issues Solutions

Topic: Outbound Deliveries

1-1 reating a sales order

-1-1 Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

Unit: Goods Issues

C

1


Order type OR

Sold-to party T-S11B##

Purchase order number ##-01

Material LES02-##

Quantity 5

Material LES04-##

Quantity 5

Choose Save. The order number is assigned internally (i.e. automatically by the SAP R/3 System).

-1-2

Shipping tab page. You will ll both items:

-1-3

1-1-4 ing point is the physical location or group of persons responsible for processing shipping activities. Every delivery is processed by one shipping point.


Enter the number of your order, and choose the see the fo owing information for

Item 10: Plant 1200 (Dresden)

Item 20: Plant 1200 (Dresden)

1 Item 10: Shipping point X0## (Dresden)

Item 20: Shipping point X0## (Dresden)

A shipp


1-2

Enter your order number. Select item 10, choose Schedule line for item, and then click the Shipping icon. Make a note of the dates displayed.

2-1

2-1-2 ng must have commenced on the material availability date so that the goods are delivered to the customer on the

3-1

Item overview, select

tivities: A – WM-TO required

y

3-1-2 determined by the picking storage location on the

ent

e posted for the outbound delivery because the d delivery has not yet been fully picked.

Scheduling

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display

1-2-1

Creating an outbound delivery

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Create → Single Document → With Reference to Sales Order 2-1-1 No. The scheduling data in the order shows that you do not have to start

processing shipping today (you can start in a few days’ time).

Yes. Processing of shippi

confirmed delivery date.

Displaying an outbound delivery

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Display

3-1-1 To view the overall status, choose Header details, and then choose the Processing tab page.

To display detailed information on item 10, choose item 10, and then choose Item details.

Overall status of picking: A – Not yet picked

Overall status of WM ac

Warehouse no.: ###

Storage type: 916

Bin (WM): The number of your outbound deliver

Goods issue status of item 10: A – Not yet started

The warehouse number isbasis of the combination of plant, shipping point and storage condition defined for the material.

3-1-3 The delivery quantity is 5 pieces, and the picked quantity is 0 pieces.

→ → →3-1-4 Logistics Logistics Execution Outbound Process Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Change → Single Docum

The goods issue cannot boutboun


Topic: Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery

4-1

4-1-1 is uti → → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse

_ ___________ _________

____________________________________________________________

ation on item 10, m 10, and then choose Item details.

d

Goods issue: A – Not yet started

4-2

4-2-1

d ollective processing function for several deliveries; or

by specifying the creating a transfer order is a subsequent function of the outbound delivery.

Unit: Goods Issues

Stocks and statuses

Logistics → Log tics Exec on → Internal Warehouse Processes Bins and Stock → Display Management)

Enter material LES02-##.


___________ ___________ _________

__________


4-1-2 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Display

Enter your outbound delivery. To display detailed informchoose Item overview, select ite

Picking: A – Not yet picked

WM activities: A – WM-TO require

Creating a transfer order

You can create transfer orders for outbound deliveries in the following ways: Manually using the “Transfer Order for Outbound Delivery” transaction; by selecting the outbound deliveries due for picking from the outbound delivery monitor and creating the transfer orders; by creating transfer orders directly or automatically once you have created an outboundelivery; using the c


4-2-2 G

ivery, and your warehouse number , and

4-2-5 oval foreground, and confirm the warning that tells you to

4-2-7 pecific bins, choose Stock. Select the

4-2-8 Save your transfer order, and make a note of the transfer order number.

4-3


_ ___________ _________

→ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Display

ation on item 10, and then choose Item details.

ms

et started

s

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → oods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Picking → Create Transfer Order → Single Document Enter the number of your outbound del(###). On the screen of the items to be processed, select the first itemchoose Storage type search sequence.

4-2-3 Movement type 601 – GR delivery note

4-2-4 Storage type = 916; storage bin = Number of your outbound delivery.

Choose Stock remcheck the storage bin. You can change the storage bin from which the goods are to be picked.

4-2-6 To go to the next material, choose Generate and next material.

To view the stock of the material in spallet that only has 22 pieces (this is the one from the goods receipt exercise), and take 5 pieces from it.

Stocks and statuses




___________ ___________ _________

__________


____________________________________________________________

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process

4-3-2 Enter your outbound delivery. To display detailed informchoose Item overview, select item 10,

Picking: C – Fully picked

WM activities: B – Ex. open TO ite

Goods issue: A – Not y

Picked quantity: 5 piece


4-4 Confirming the transfer order

4-4-1 Confirm Transfer Order

Display Tra

-4-2 ing → Confirm Transfer Order → Transfer

he s

ution → Internal Warehouse Processes → →

_

r y → Display

ation on item 10, en choose Item details.

TO confirmed

Goods issue: A – Not yet started

Picked quantity: 5 pieces

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Picking → → Pick Step

Enter the number of your transfer order, and choose Input list. Confirm the transfer order by saving it.

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Picking → nsfer Order

The confirmation status of the source data is Withdrawal confirmed.

4 Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → PickStep Enter the number of your transfer order, and choose Entry list. Confirm ttransfer order by aving it.

Logistics → Logistics ExecBins and Stock Display → Total Stock per Material (Warehouse Management)



___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

Stock in Inventory Management ______________________________________________ _____________

Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue foOutbound Delivery → Outbound Deliver

4-3-2 Enter your outbound delivery. To display detailed informchoose Item overview, select item 10, and th


WM activities: C – WM


Topic: Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery

5-1

s

5-1-1 ur ue. Display the outbound delivery ber of the material document,

choose Environment → Document flow.


_ ___________ _________

__________________________________________________________

→ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Display

ation on item 10, and then choose Item details.

firmed

leted

Picked quantity: 5 pieces

Unit: Goods Issues

Posting the goods receipt

Logistics → Logistic Execution → Outbound Process → Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery → Outbound Delivery → Lists and Logs → Outbound Delivery Monitor

Choose For goods issue, and enter your shipping point (X0##). Select yooutbound delivery, and choose Goods issby double-clicking it. To find out the num



Storage type Storage bin Quantity

___________ ___________ _________

___________ ___________ _________

__________


Logistics → Logistics Execution → Outbound Process

5-1-3 Enter your outbound delivery. To display detailed informchoose Item overview, select item 10,


WM activities: C – WM TO con

Goods issue: C – Comp


© SAP AG 2000

Section: Vendor Evaluation


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Vendor Evaluation

Content: Vendor Evaluation

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Vendor Evaluation

Vendor Evaluation

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Discuss the differences between evaluationlevels and various types of evaluation criteria

Illustrate the application of the variousfunctions for vendor evaluation

Describe the processes of evaluation by usingthree automatic subcriteria as examples

Verify the link between vendor evaluation andsource determination

Demonstrate the uses of various analyses invendor evaluation


Vendor Evaluation: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

PReq.MaterialQuantityDeliv. date(Source)

Materials planning

User dept.

Conversion

Approval ofrequisition

Pur. orderVendorMaterialQuantityDelivery datePrice

Source of supplyInfo

recordContract

itemSchedulingagmt. item

Automaticsource

determin-ation

Source list

Quota arrangement

Vendorevaluation

Pur. orderTransmissionto vendor

Approval ofpurchase order

Optimized Purchasing (Vendor evaluation)


© SAP AG 1999

Your organization wishes to score your vendorsbased on various performance criteria. This can beuseful during negotiations with your vendors.

To do so, you must define the criteria according towhich evaluation is to take place and which areasof your vendors’ performance are to be rated.

Vendor Evaluation: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

90

84

81

92

75

90

90

92

76

93

88

74

85

81

84

88

90

80

81

94

85

93

92

82

92

88

79

86

86

74

Vendor evaluation: general

Vendor B

Vendor A

Vendor C

ServiceServiceDelivDeliv..QualQual..PricePriceOverallOverall

Evaluation for material 1

ServiceServiceDelivDeliv..QualQual..PricePriceOverallOverall

Function of Vendor Evaluation

source selection and the ongoing surveillance of existing supply

nt is fully integrated into the MM Purchasing

Vendor Evaluation accesses basic Materials Management data, Inventory Management data (such as goods receipts), and data from the Logistics Information System.

The vendor evaluation functionality supports you in optimizing the procurement process. It facilitates the process ofrelationships. You can quickly spot any difficulties that may arise during the procurement of materials and services.

In the R/3 System, the Vendor Evaluation componemodule within Materials Management. This means, for example, that data from purchase orders is used, such as delivery dates, prices and quantities.

Vendor Evaluation uses data from the Quality Management module (such as the results of incoming inspections or quality audits).


© SAP AG 1999

Weighted

Weighted

Overall score

Scores formain criteria

Scores forsubcriteria

Individual scores

Scoring Levels in Vendor Evaluation

ors, you need to m 1

at a glance. The overall score is arrived at from the scores a vendor was awarded for

an the

criteria are Price, Quality, Delivery, General Service/Support, and External Service

The organizational level at which vendors are evaluated is the level of the purchasing organization. Each purchasing organization evaluates the vendors assigned to it.

To be able to assess a certain vendor‘s performance in comparison with other venddefine a scoring range. The vendor evaluation system offers you a three-level scoring system froto 100 points, allowing you to carry out a comparative appraisal of your vendors.

The overall score gives you a general idea of the performance of your vendors, allowing you to compare them all main criteria. The scores for main criteria reflect a vendor’s performance more accurately thoverall score.

The mainProvision (for the evaluation of external service providers). If required, you can also define other criteria.

You can divide each main criterion into several subcriteria. The latter are the smallest units within vendor evaluation for which scores are calculated.

The scores achieved by a vendor for the individual criteria may be of varying significance to you. The weighting factor takes account of this.


© SAP AG 1999

Semi-automaticsubcriterion

Types of Subcriterion

Overall score

Scores for maincriteria

Scores forsubcriteriaManual

subcriterionAutomatic

subcriterion

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$Individual scores

d

r of scores at info record level for all materials of importance to you. The

her-

a that arises through

System suffice for the evaluation of a vendor from which you procure materials (that is, you need not necessarily maintain scores for manual or semi-automatic subcriteria to carry out evaluations).

Subcriteria are differentiated according to the methods by which the scores for them are determine– manual, semi-automatic and automatic.

In the case of manual subcriteria, you enter a blanket score for the subcriterion in evaluation of a vendor. The R/3 System takes account of this score in calculating the higher-level main criterion.

Instead of awarding a vendor a blanket score for all its materials, with the semi-automatic subcriteriayou maintain a numbeaverage value of these scores is included as the score for the subcriterion in the score for the higlevel main criterion.

In the case of automatic subcriteria, the rating can be determined from datnormal online activities in the R/3 System. This data enters the vendor evaluation system from statistical files (for example, through the process of automatic updating).

The automatic subcriteria that are predefined in the standard R/3


© SAP AG 1999

Main criteria

Price

Quality

Delivery

Service

SubcriteriaSubcriteria

Price levelPrice historyGR inspectionRejection/complaintsAuditOn-time deliveryQuantity reliabilityShipping instructionsConfirmations

Automatic Subcriteria: Overview

arket

reports, return/ replacement of

ce

rmance to evaluate how well a vendor adheres to h

lies

ubcriterion confirmation to evaluate the degree to which a vendor adheres to the delivery dates set out in confirmations (such as shipping notifications) that the vendor previously sent to you.

You use the subcriterion price level to evaluate the relationship of a vendor’s price to the mprice.

You use the subcriterion price history to evaluate changes in a vendor’s price over time in comparison with the market price.

You use the subcriterion GR inspection (incoming inspection) to evaluate the quality of the materials supplied by a vendor. The quality inspection takes place at the time of goods receipt.

You use the subcriterion rejection/complaints to evaluate how frequently the materials supplied by a vendor are found to be faulty after having successfully passed through incoming inspection (for example, during the production process, on the shopfloor), resulting in additional expense and loss oftime due to reworking, fault rectification, preparation of rejectionparts and so on. You use the subcriterion audit to evaluate the effectiveness of the quality assuransystem an enterprise employs in the manufacture of its products.

You use the subcriterion on-time delivery perfoprescribed delivery dates. You use the subcriterion quantity reliability to evaluate the extent to whica vendor delivers the exact quantities ordered.

You use the subcriterion compliance with shipping instructions to evaluate how a vendor compwith the instructions you issued regarding the shipping or packing of a material.

You use the s


© SAP AG 1999

Purch. organization 1000

Weighting keysWeighting keys

Vendor evaluation

record

Semi-automatic

criteria

Manualcriteria

Auto-matic

criteria

Vendor A

Calculationlog

Vendor Evaluation: Maintenance

r which the weighting shares for a group of main criteria are combined and stored.

y and the scores for

f evaluation are recorded in the vendor evaluation.

Below this are the overall evaluation and the scores for the individual main criteria. The scores for the subcriteria belonging to each main criterion are listed under the heading “Detailed evaluation”.

You can use the Maintain Vendor Evaluation function to maintain all subcriteria (including the manual subcriteria).

You must first assign weighting keys to any vendors that have never been evaluated. The weighting key is a code undeThe R/3 System can calculate the overall score on the basis of the weighting kethe main criteria.

The calculation of the scores for the automatic subcriteria is recorded in a log.

The name of the person responsible and the date o

Changes are listed in the change documentation.

You can record the evaluation the R/3 System has calculated for a vendor in an evaluation sheet andprint it out. The evaluation sheet header shows the name of the person who created the sheet, the dateit was created and the name of the vendor.


© SAP AG 1999

Purch. organization 1000

Weighting keysWeighting keys

Oldvalues

Newvalues

. . .

. . . . . .. . .

AutomaticAutomaticcriteriacriteria

Semi-Semi-automaticautomatic

criteriacriteria

Vendor A

Save

Vendor evaluation

record

Calculationlog

Automatic New Evaluation

he automatic and semi-

of the old and newly computed points scores for all automatic want, you can replace the old scores with the new ones.

ing the SAP Hierarchy or Presentation Graphics function to obtain a better overview. The graphical display has the advantage of enabling you to see at a glance how scores are developing over time.

The Automatic New Evaluation function enables you to update the scores for tautomatic subcriteria for a vendor.

If a vendor has never been evaluated, you must first specify a weighting key.

The manually maintained scores of the last evaluation remain unchanged, so that the results are comparable.

You are provided with a comparison and semi-automatic subcriteria. If you

The calculation is recorded in a log.

You can display the evaluation us


© SAP AG 1999

WeightingWeightingkeykey



AutomaticAutomaticcriteriacriteria

Vendor A Vendor NEW Vendor CVendor B

Vendor evaluation

record

Calculation log

Evaluation in the Background

e

ey n

keys after their creation. You can find relevant records by running the Vendors without weighting keys analysis. From the analysis, you can branch direct to vendor evaluation maintenance.

You can have your vendors regularly evaluated in the background using the Evaluation in the Background function.

To initiate a background processing request for vendor evaluation, you need a variant that defines thnumber interval of vendors to be evaluated, for example.

You can either update existing evaluation records, or have new records created for vendors not yet evaluated.

When creating new evaluation records, you can either assign all new records the same weighting kor have these records created without weighting keys. You must manually reprocess evaluatiorecords without weighting


© SAP AG 1999

Pur. order GR Del. sched.

Sch. line 1

GR

Points score

Smoothing

Calculate% variance

“Del. compl.”ind. X

No quantity reliability update !

Vendor evaluation

CustomizingCustomizingsettings for settings for purchasing purchasing organizationorganization

Goods receipt

Goods receipt

100 pc. 90 pc.100 pc.

100 pc.

Quantity Reliability

r

.

ing factor izing.

on.

ments.

Reversals of goods receipts are not taken into account in vendor evaluation.

You use the subcriterion Quantity reliability to evaluate the extent to which the quantities a vendohas sent you match the quantities specified in your purchase orders.

Before a vendor’s quantity reliability can be determined, the PO item in question must be closed

The R/3 System determines the difference between the GR and PO quantities and converts this difference into a percentage variance.

The points score determined is updated in a statistical record after application of a smoothand is then included in the vendor evaluation. The smoothing factor is defined in Custom

Over- and under-delivery tolerances are not taken into account in the vendor evaluati

There is no evaluation of quantity reliability with respect to scheduling agree


© SAP AG 1999

Pur. order

100 pcs.Statistics-rel.delivery date

Minimum quantitycheckEnd

GR10 pcs.

Pur. order

100 pcs.Statistics-rel.delivery date

GR100 pcs.

Points score

Smoothing

Calculate% variance

Vendor evaluation


Goodsreceipt

Goodsreceipt

12.20 12.20 12.20 12.19

On-Time Delivery Performance

goods receipt against a purchase order, the R/3 System checks whether the specified de

g value, the percentage variance will be relatively low. The points value thus determined

e maintained a minimum delivery percentage and the minimum quantity was not reached, the R/3 System does not determine an on-time delivery performance score for the goods receipt in question.

You use the subcriterion On-time delivery performance to evaluate a vendor’s adherence to deliverydates.

At the time of delivery date (statistics-relevant delivery date) has been adhered to or whether delivery was maearly or late.

If the delivery date was not adhered to, the R/3 System can convert the absolute delivery date variance into a percentage variance using the Customizing parameter Standardizing value for delivery time variance and evaluate the latter. If you assign a low standardizing value, a large percentage variance results for relatively small date variances in days. If you specify a higher standardizinis updated in a statistical record after application of a smoothing formula and included in the vendor evaluation.

If a goods receipt covers several lines of a delivery schedule, this calculation is carried out for each schedule line.

If the delivery date was adhered to, the R/3 System checks any system settings you have maintained for the Customizing parameter Minimum delivery percentage.

If you have not maintained a minimum delivery percentage, receipts of fractions of the PO quantity are also taken into account in the computation of the score for on-time delivery performance.

If you hav


© SAP AG 1999

Calculate

% variance

Points score

Vendor evaluation


Comparisonprice

Market priceAverage priceSingle/solesourcing

<>=?

Info record

Vendor AMaterial 1Effective price

Pc. % Conditions

$

Pc. % Conditions

$

Price Level

/3 System compares the vendor’s valid effective price with erial

price d a

. If you do not set the indicator, the single or sole vendor situation is not taken into

The R/3 System calculates the average score from the sum of the individual scores determined. This average represents the score for the subcriterion.

You use the subcriterion price level to evaluate how a vendor’s price for a material compares with the prices of other vendors or with an average price.

All materials for which the vendor’s conditions have been maintained (for example, in info records) are examined.

To determine a vendor’s price level, the Rthe market price for each material or the average price derived from all info records for the matand determines the percentage variance.

If a material is procured from one vendor only, the Customizing parameter Single/sole vendor determines whether this exceptional situation is taken into consideration in the vendor evaluation. If you have set this indicator, the R/3 System assumes that the effective price of the vendor to be evaluated is the market price when calculating the score for the price level – that is, the marketand the effective price are identical. There is a variance of zero percent and the vendor is awardegood scoreaccount (that is, the R/3 System does not determine a score for the price level in respect of this material).


© SAP AG 1999

84 75 92 88 81Vendor A

RANKING LISTGeneral vendor evaluationGeneral vendor evaluation

Overall Price Qual. Deliv. ServiceOverallOverall PricePrice QualQual.. DelivDeliv.. ServiceService

90

84

81

92

75

90

90

92

76

93

88

74

85

81

84

EVALUATION PER MATERIAL/MATERIAL GROUPGeneral vendor evaluationGeneral vendor evaluation

Overall Price Qual. Deliv. ServiceOverallOverall PricePrice QualQual.. DelivDeliv.. ServiceService84

81

75

90

92

76

88

74

81

84

Vendor A

Vendor C

EVALUATION COMPARISONEvaluation for material 1Evaluation for material 1General vendor evaluationGeneral vendor evaluation

OverallOverall PricePrice QualQual.. DelivDeliv.. ServiceService

Analyses in Vendor Evaluation

Vendor B

Vendor A

Vendor C

Overall Price Qual. Deliv. ServiceOverallOverall PricePrice QualQual.. DelivDeliv.. ServiceService

88 81 93 92 86

ell

dition

ial group, you can specify whether the R/3 System is to search only for materials with a

s

n use

ll ch is composed of the scores relating to deliveries of all materials, is shown in

relation to the evaluation the vendor would obtain if this evaluation were based on one specific material only.

The “Ranking list” sorts your vendors in descending order according to their overall scores. This gives you an overview of those vendors that rank among the best, those that perform moderately wand those that are below average. The scores for the individual main criteria are displayed in adto the overall score. The R/3 System also calculates the average values for the individual scores, enabling you to see by how many points a vendor deviates above or below the average value.

The list of “Evaluations per material or material group” provides you with a ranking list based on a certain material or material group. This analysis enables you to determine which vendors of a particularly important material have performed well, moderately well or poorly. If you have entereda matermaster record (1), only for materials without a master record (2), or for both (no entry) within thigroup.

The Evaluation comparison is an analysis of the general evaluation of a vendor with the latter’s evaluation in respect of a certain material. This analysis differs from the others because you cait to take a closer look at a vendor without comparing this vendor with others. Instead, the overaevaluation, whi


© SAP AG 1999

Vendor Evaluation in Source Determination

RANKING LISTOverall Price Qual. Deliv. ServiceOverallOverall PricePrice QualQual.. DelivDeliv.. ServiceService

90

84

81

92

75

90

Vendor Evaluation

93

88

74

85

81

84

Assign source

Purchase Requisition

90

92

76

Vendor B

Vendor A

Vendor C

Possible Sources:Vendor AVendor BVendor C

ng functionality is integrated with source his provides you with additional information

requisitions. If you select a requisition from the list, the R/3 ll vendors that can supply the requested material.

Executing a price comparison list.

As of Release 4.5A, vendor evaluation reportidetermination and the quotation price comparison list. Tfor decision making when selecting vendors.

The vendor evaluation functionality is available when:

Assigning sources to an individual purchase requisition item. The R/3 System can generate a ranking list for the vendors that are displayed as possible sources.

Assigning and processing purchaseSystem generates a ranking list of a


© SAP AG 1999

XX

XX

XX

XX

Over. Over. PricePrice QualQual.. Del.Del. ServServVendor B

Vendor A

Vendor C

Points scores forautomatic

criteriaWeighting key

Listparameter

General control

parameters

Weighting of main criteria

Weighting of subcriteria

Main criteria

Subcriteria

Pur. org.-specific General

Configuration Options

ettings for the following:

relate to an individual purchasing organization in each case:

meters you can maintain for each individual purchasing organization include the

Applicability period

You make general s

Weighting keys

Main criteria and subcriteria

List parameters and list structure

The following settings

Control parameters

Evaluation criteria and their weighting

Points scores for automatic subcriteria

The control parafollowing:

Best score


© SAP AG 1999

General parametersGeneral parameters Parameters for subcriteriaParameters for subcriteria

Best score

Applicability period

Layout set

Price level

Single/sole vendor

Audit

Average of all lots

Rejection/complaints

As percentage of purchase volume

On-time delivery

Smoothing factor

Std. del. time variance

Min. deliv. percentage

Quantity reliability

Smoothing factor

Shipping instructions

Smoothing factor

Control Parameters: Purchasing Organization

dor

ion of a

vant for each purchasing organization and ow they are to be weighted. Furthermore, each purchasing organization defines its own scoring nge for the evaluation of the automatic subcriteria.

Certain Customizing parameters for vendor evaluation are set specifically on a purchasing-organization basis. For example:

With the parameter Best score you specify the maximum number of points attainable by a venin your scoring range.

The Applicability period determines how far into the past data is used for the evaluatvendor.

The Layout set (form) determines the layout of the printed vendor evaluation sheet.

You also define which evaluation criteria are to be relehra


© SAP AG 1999


Vendor Evaluation: Unit Summary

Discuss the differences between evaluation levelsand various types of evaluation criteria

Illustrate the application of the various functionsfor vendor evaluation

Describe the process of evaluation by using threeautomatic subcriteria as examples

Verify the link between vendor evaluation andsource determination

Demonstrate the use of various analyses invendor evaluation


Exercises

Unit: Vendor Evaluation

•

atic

•

Demonstrate the use of various analyses in vendor evaluation


• Discuss the differences between evaluation levels and various types of evaluation criterion

Illustrate the application of the various functions for vendor evaluation

• Describe the process of evaluation by using three automsubcriteria as examples

Verify the link between vendor evaluation and source determination

•

s with to

vendors’ performance are to be rated. You must also evaluate

1-1 T-REZ## exists. If necessary, correct the material master with the following data. Otherwise, please create a new material master

r: sector: l type: aterial

hasing, MRP 1, MRP 2, Accounting 1

sure: #

up: 20

ry time:0

Price control: V Moving average price: 12

Your organization wishes to score your vendors based on various performance criteria. This can be useful during negotitationyour vendors. To do so, you must define the criteria according which evaluation is to take place, and which areas of your

your vendors on a regular basis in order to be kept up to date.

Check if the material master

with the following data:

Material numbe T-REZ## Industry Mechanical Engineering Materia Raw mViews: PurcPlant: 1000 Base unit of mea PC Purchasing group: Z#Material gro LO5Purchasing value key: 5 MRP type: ND Planned delive 10 Valuation class: 300


1-2 Order the following materials from vendor T-L20F## for your plant 1000, cation 0001:

l: EA##

rice: 20 ate: Today

l: EB##

rice: Delivery date: Yesterday

l: EZ##

Price: 12 Delivery date: Today

storage lo

1st item: Materia T-RQuantity: 50 pc PDelivery d 2nd item: Materia T-RQuantity: 20 pc P 10

3rd item: Materia T-RQuantity: 50 pc

Ignore any warning messages.

1-3 e ou receive a partial delivery of 40 pcs. The second item

is delivered in full. For the third item, you again receive only part of the ordered

Material document: ____________________________________________

Purchase order: _______________________________________________

Post a goods receipt against this purchase order into storage location 0001. For thfirst purchase order item, y

quantity – this time 5 pcs.


1-4 Maintain the vendor evaluation for your vendor T-L20F##, purchasing

_________

1-4-2

gned to this main criterion, how are they eighted, and by which method are their scores determined (automatically,

semi-automatically, manually)?

ubcriterion eighting ethod

organization 1000.

Assign the weighting key 01.

1-4-1 What does this weighting key stand for? ____________

Go to the detail screen for the main criterion Delivery. Which subcriteria have been assiw

S W M

HDelivery. What score does the system arrive at?

1-4-3 ave an automatic new evaluation carried out for the main criterion

Overall score: __________________________________________

Subcriterion On-time delivery performance: __________________

Subcriterion Quantity reliability: ___________________________ Main criterion Delivery: __________________________________


1-4-4 oosing Goto All logs. Which individual cores has the system arrived at for the subcriteria Quantity reliability and

On-time delivery performance?

On-time delivery erformance

Quantity reliability

Display the calculation log, by ch → s

p

Material T-REA##

Material T-REB##

Material T-REZ##

Why was no score calculated for material T-REA## for the subcriter1-4-5 ion

1-4-6 ria

_______________________________ Save the vendor evaluation.

Quantity reliability? ______________________________________________________

Why were no scores calculated for material T-REZ## for the subcriteQuantity reliability and On-time delivery performance?

_______________________


1-5

_________

1-5-3 Points

_______________

1-5-4

____________________________

1-5-5

1-5-6 nce)

1-5-8 e variance is taken as the the

general one or the material-specific one?

1-6 material master record for your material T-REZ## and determine the aterial-specific standardizing value for material

##: ________________________

1-7 ,

1-7-1 etermine the old and new overall scores by comparing the old and new

____________________________________ Save the evaluation.

Take a look at the Customizing settings for vendor evaluation. Make a note of the following settings for purchasing organization 1000:

1-5-1 Weighting of the subcriterion On-time delivery performance:___________________________________________

1-5-2 Weighting of the subcriterion Quantity reliability:____________________________________

score for On-time delivery performance in the case of a percentage variance of +10%:

_______________________________________

Standardizing value for delivery time variance:

__________________________

Minimum delivery percentage:

______________________________________________________

Smoothing factor for Timeliness/Service (On-time delivery performa

______________________________________________________

1-5-7 Smoothing factor for Quantity reliability:_____________________________________________

Which standardizing value for the delivery timbasis for determining the score for On-time delivery performance –

_____________________________________________________

Display the mT-REZ##. Standardizing value for material T-REZ

1-5-1 Add this task to your Favorites.

Update the vendor evaluation for vendor T-L20F##, purchasing organization 1000by performing the Automatic new evaluation function.

Devaluations. Old overall score: _______________________________________ New overall score: __


1-8 ##, T-L20E##, and T-K12B## by performing the Automatic new evaluation function.

*1-9 e current scores of the possible sources. This

1-9-1 that the system will not determine a

ources appears,

1-10 T-K12* and

1-10-1

___________________

1-10-2

_________________

1-11 Vendors: ____________________________________________________

Maintain the vendor evaluation for your vendors T-L20A##, T-L20B

Assign the weighting key 01 to all vendors and save the evaluations.

Occasionally during the source determination process, a buyer would like to see th will enable the buyer to make a well-

informed decision, especially when multiple sources are available for a material.

Ensure, that you have at least two valid sources for the material T-REZ## (vendors from task 1-8) and source automatically. (If a quota arrangement for T-REZ## exists, change the valid to field to yesterday’s date.)

1-9-2 Create a purchase requisition for 10 pc of material T-REA## for plant 1000. The material is needed in 2 weeks.

1-9-3 Ask the system to assign a source. When the list of possible schoose Vendor evaluation.

1-9-4 Assign the vendor with the best price score.

Generate a vendor evaluation ranking list for vendors T-L20*.

Which vendor has the best overall score?

___________________________________

Which vendor has the worst overall score?

_____________________________________

Which evaluated vendors offer material T-REZ##?


Solutions

nit: Vendor Evaluation

1-1 ... → → → eneral) iately or

known

1-3 MaManagement Goods movement → Goods receipt → For Purchase order → PO

Enter your purchase order number, then select Enter. Adjust the quantities for the

1-4

asing organization, then select Enter.

ery and choose Details.

Weightin Method

U

Material Master Material Create (g → Immed... → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

1-2 ... → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/supplying plant

SAP standard menu →.Logistics → terials Management → Inventory →

number known

first and third items.

Select OK for each item, and then Save.

User menu → Vendor Evaluation → Maintain

Enter the vendor and purch

1-4-1 Equal weighting.

1-4-2 Select Deliv

Subcriterion g

On-time delivery 30 3

Quantity reliability 40 2

Shipping instructions

10 6

Notification reliab. 20 B


1-4-3 Choose Auto. New eval/MCrit.

1-4-4 Scores may vary by participant based on completion of prior exercises.

Only a partial1-4-5 delivery of this material was received. The system will only

1-4-6 s

closed for quantity. Since you received less than the minimum delivery

1-5 ect

or Evaluation

Enter

orm : 30

1-5-3 Select es for the

1-5-4

riance: 10 days.

1-5-8 The material-specific one, since MinDelQty/StdDlTmVar from material is selected.

calculate a score for quantity reliability if the purchase order item is closed for quantity.

Again, only a partial delivery of this material was received. The system will only calculate a score for quantity reliability if the purchase order item i

percentage, no score was calculated for On-time delivery performance.

SAP standard menu → Tools → AcceleratedSAP → Customizing → Edit proj→ → → Vendor SAP Reference IMG Materials Management → Purchasing Evaluation → Define Purchasing Organization Data for Vend

1-5-1 Select purchasing organization 1000, then Subcriteria.

criterion 03 (on-time delivery performance is a subcriterion of Delivery).

Weighting of the subcriterion On-time delivery perf ance

1-5-2 Weighting of the subcriterion Quantity reliability: 40

purchasing organization 1000 and choose Points ScorAutomatic Criteria

Points score for On-time delivery performance in the case of a percentage variance of +10%: 80 points

Select purchasing organization 1000 and choose Details.

Standardizing value for delivery time va

1-5-5 Minimum delivery percentage: 30%.

1-5-6 Smoothing factor for Timeliness/Service (On-time delivery performance): 20

1-5-7 Smoothing factor for Quantity reliability: 20


1-6 SAP standard menu: Logistics → Material Master isplay current.

aterial T-REZ##: 20 days

1-6-1 Favorites → Add

1-7

ute.

1-8

Enter the vendor and purchasing organization, then choose Execute. Do this for each vendor.

*1-9

1-9-1 ou created sources of supply and aintained a source list and a quota arrangement for the material T-REZ##.

sing → Master Data → Quota Arrangement → Maintain

→ → Materials Management → Material → Display → D

Select the purchasing view. Standardizing value for m

User menu → Vendor Evaluation → Autom. new evaluation

Enter the vendor and purchasing organization, then choose Exec

User menu → Vendor Evaluation → Autom. new evaluation

During the exercises of TAMM10 ymDeactivate the quota arrangement: ... → Purcha Alternative: However, if at least 2 sources of supply do not exist, please maintain 2 info

hat both sources are valid.

n → Create

1-10

Enter T-K12* in Vendor(s). For maintaining T-L20* please use the multiple

1-11 isplays → Evalns. per mat/gp

Enter T-REZ## in Material, then Execute.

records (vendors T-L20A## and T-L20B). To be sure, check that a source list and a quota arrangement do not exist or t

1-9-2 ... → Purchasing → Requisitio

1-9-3 Edit → Assign supply source

User menu → Vendor Evaluation → List Displays → Ranking lists

selection. Press Copy, then Execute.

User menu → Vendor Evaluation → List D


© SAP AG 2000

Section: Procurement of External Services


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Value Limits for Unplanned Services

Unit Entry and Acceptanceof Performed Services

Unit Invoice Verification

Unit Overview External Services

Unit Master Data

Unit Service Specifications

Unit Optimized Procurement

Content: Procurement of External Services

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

Procurement process for external services

Contents:

External Services


© SAP AG 1999

Describe the process of procuring externallyperformed services

List the relevant purchasing documents

Explain the differences between the procurementof materials and the procurement of services

At the end of this unit, you will be able to:

External Services: Learning Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Your enterprise buys in services and supplies fromexternal sources. You have to familiarize yourselfwith the functionality in the R/3 System thatenables you to describe and keep track ofexternally procured services.

External Services: Enterprise Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Servicespecifications

are created

- User department- PM Plant Maintenance- PS Project System

PaulConnellyTransfer 9,500

Date

Determination ofrequirements

Source determin.

Vendor selection

Bid invitation(RFQ)

Maintain and compare quotations

Purch. order

PO monitoring

Service entry

Serviceacceptance

Invoice verif.

Payment

PO Invoice

??==

Procurement of External Services Cycle

RFQ


© SAP AG 1999

MMMMProcurementProcurement

PMPMPlantPlant

MaintenanceMaintenance

PSPSProject Project SystemSystem

Service no. 1540

- Texts- Units of measure

ApplicationsApplications

Service master record

Purchase order

1NetworkPlantmaintenance

order

Service conditions200

2PReq.

Specs

Service Master Record

ure, for example, hour.

e conditions.

This data can be obtained from various SAP applications.

A service master record contains a service description and a unit of meas

You can assign a price to each service master record via th


© SAP AG 1999

Purchasing document

• General data • Statistics • Messages• Conditions

• General description:Software implementation

• Date: Oct. 31

• Description of service• Qty• Conditions

ServiceServicespecificationsspecifications

Servicelines

Item

Header

Specs

Purchasing Document Layout

rols

An item contains a short text, which is a general description of what you intend to procure. The service specifications are an exact description of the service.

Materials are procured at item level.

Services are procured below item level. The item type D activates the service functions and contor allows you to create service specifications.


© SAP AG 1999

PurchPurch.. ord ord..

Service specificationsService specifications

Outline level

Service line

01 Selection of software components

01 Define requirements

Consultant K4 10 days at 2100 UNI

Adapt components02

01 Component A


02 Test configuration


??Value limit

Unplanned servicesto a max. of 60000 UNI

Service Specifications in the Purchasing Document

Work that is not contained in the outline or service lines cannot be covered with value limits for unplanned services.

You can format complex service specifications clearly using outline levels. You can assign any number of service lines to each outline level.


© SAP AG 1999

Serviceentry sheet

Entry Accept.

FI and CO update

Serviceentry sheet

Total value22000 UNI

Services...

Service Entry and Acceptance

vant postings .

tly cription of

r them. The system checks n the purchase order.

You can set up release procedures for service entry sheets.

The system stores services that have been performed in service entry sheets. The releare made in Financial Accounting and Cost Accounting when the service entry sheets are signed offService entry sheets can be entered and signed off in one transaction or in two steps.

When entering services, you reference the purchase order. You can copy planned services direcfrom the purchase order into the service entry sheet. You do not give an exact desunplanned services or their quantity and price details until you entewhether the unplanned services adhere to the limit defined i


© SAP AG 1999

InvoiceABCSoftware GmbH

26000 UNISheet 1

o.k.

?

Vendor: ABCSoftware GmbHPO no. 0346722PO itm 01

Sheet 1 20000 UNISheet 3 6000 UNI

26000 UNI

Value 20000 UNI

Serviceentry sheet

Vendor invoice

Invoice

31 Mar.

Invoice Verification for Entry Sheet

document

oice

the service entry sheets.

If the system finds any discrepancies, it blocks the invoice for payment.

The invoice verification procedure is carried out with reference to the purchase order.

This means that all service entry sheets signed off for this purchase order are suggested for invverification.

The system compares the prices on the invoice with the prices from

If there are no discrepancies, you can enter and post the invoice.


© SAP AG 1999

Goods Receipt 12345, item 10

Limit adhered to

Service entry sheet 3 Feb.Item 10

Oil filter replacedCost center 123

Limit

Release procedure Acceptance

- Account assignment

Purchase order # 12345 27 Jan.Item 10 Repair printing press

- Precise description of service- Order quantity

Cost control throughimposition of limits !!

MMM

3 Feb.

??????

??

LV !!

MMM

??????

??

Specs.

Stock Material versus External Services

Purchase order # 12345 27 Jan.

Item 10 Material : Steel - 01Order qty. : 250 pc

ing press is broken, for example, the requisitioner may not know

quired

Setting limits allows you to exercise an element of cost control despite such uncertainties.

As their name implies, stock materials are kept in stock and are subject to inventory management. Services, as intangible goods, are procured for immediate consumption.

In the procurement of materials, much information is already available – such as the exact purchase order quantity.

In the procurement of services, in many cases neither the exact service description nor the purchaseorder quantity is known. If a printwhether it needs a few readjustments or whether certain parts must be replaced. The time refor the repairs is often unknown.


© SAP AG 1999

Consumable Material versus External Services

Purchase order

Item 10 Item category

Software forelectron beam welding equipment

Account: Asset 123

Standarditem

No further description

possible


Install software

Account: Asset 123or U

Service item

D

Purchase order

Service specificationpossibleOutline functionLong text per outline leveland service line

Specs.

t of consumable materials (materials for direct g document and the procurement of services.

bject.

flexibility in procurement planning is a result of not having to specify the precise service e you create the purchase

Flexible long texts per outline level and service line are possible.

There are similarities between the procuremenconsumption) in a standard item of a purchasin

They are assigned to an accounting o

There is no inventory management.

Procuring services with MM-SRV has advantages:

You can compile complex sets of service specifications (statements of work) using the outline function.

Greater description, the account assignment, or the exact quantity at the timorder.


© SAP AG 1999

Outline the steps in the external servicesprocurement cycle

List the purchasing documents in the process

Describe the differences between procurementfor materials and services


Course Overview: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Course Overview

able to:

Recognize the terms used for external services

At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be

• Outline the steps in the procurement cycle

• List the purchasing documents that can be used

•

Your company needs to review and decide on the documents required for its external services.

* 1-1 s that are not used for material purchases. Select the orrect term for each definition. Use the glossary if necessary.

ation

aster

escription

Outline

2. ___ urement purposes. Service

3. ___ ions

vels “surfacing” and s

4. ___ Services unknown at purchase order time, so they are specified on the service entry sheet.

Services use several termc

a. Unplanned services

b. Service specific

c. Service m

d. Service

e. Service d

f.

1. ___ Text that precisely defines a service to be procured.

Listing and description of services for procspecifications can contain service items with detailed descriptions or items with value limits for unplanned services.

Levels of text lines that subdivide voluminous sets of service specificaton a hierarchical basis. For example, the service specifications for the construction of a road may contain the outline le“excavation works”. Below these outline levels are the individual itemdefining each specific service (individual task).


5. ___ ocured externally (outsourced). Services are

6. ___ any

reate service specifications (used, for example, for invitations to bid sent to potential subcontractors during the competitive bidding process).

Intangible good that is the subject of business activity and that can be performed internally or prregarded as being consumed at the time of their performance. They cannot be stored or transported.

Master data record with descriptions of all services or work that a comphas to procure frequently. It serves as a source of default data, set by the system when you c


Solutions

Unit: Course Overview

1-1 s used with services

6. c

Term

1. e

2. b

3. f

4. a

5. d


© SAP AG 1999

Contents:


Conditions for Services

Standard Service Catalog

Model Service Specifications

Formulas for Services

Vendor Master Record

Master Data


© SAP AG 1999

Create service master records

Create master conditions

List the benefits of using the standard servicecatalog

Define a model service specification

Describe the organization of the vendor masterrecords


Master Data: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Your company must use master data for serviceentry. To test the upcoming scenarios, project teammembers must create and maintain the servicemasters and conditions.

Master Data: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Leistung Nr.1540- Texte- Mengeneinheiten

PMPMInstand-Instand-haltunghaltung

PSPSProjekt-Projekt-SystemSystem

MMMMBeschaffungBeschaffung

AnwendungenAnwendungen

Leistungsstammsatz

NetzplanInstand-haltungs-

auftrag

Service no. 1540- Texts- Units of measure

PMPMPlantPlant

MaintenanceMaintenance

PSPSProjectProjectSystemSystem

MMMMPurchasingPurchasing

ApplicationsApplications


NetworkMainten-

ance order

Pur. order

1

LV

Requisn

Specs.


ord contains information on the service (work) description such as:

e

itions.

many points in the R/3 System.

ce

Sales and Distribution (Industry and Business Unit)

A service master rec

Descriptive texts

Units of measur

Material group

Valuation class for account determination

Prices can be assigned to each service master record using the cond

Service master data can be used at Examples:

Purchasing

Plant Maintenan

Project System

Service Management


© SAP AG 1999

Staffeln100m 205,-200m 200,-300m 198,-

205,-

1999 2000 2001

210,-

220,-

Leistung Nr. 1580

Menge 1

Mengeneinheit m

Gültigkeitszeitraum1998

Price/quantity scale

100m 205200m 200300m 198

205 UNI

2001 2002 2003

210 UNI

220 UNI

Service no. 1580

Quantity 1

Unit of measure m

Validity period

2000

Conditions for Service Master Records

itions that apply to a service master record.

s.

You can also maintain supplementary conditions.

The price of a service can be defined using the cond

You can store prices for different validity period

The prices can be scaled according to quantity.


© SAP AG 1999

Adoption in Adoption in documentsdocuments

Purchaserequisition

Vendor

- Service no. 1540

1 day 2100 UNI

- Senior consultant 1 day

2100 UNI

15401560

1580

Level of conditions

Service

Determining the Price Using Master Conditions I

stored in the R/3 System in the form of

n estimate)

At the service level, prices are then used automatically as default values in the purchasing document’s service specifications.

Prices for services that are valid over a long period can be service conditions.

At the level of the service (market price/ow

At the level of the service and the vendor

At the level of the service, the vendor, and the plant

In the form of contracts (See the unit Long-Term Documents)


© SAP AG 1999

Purchase order

ABC Software Ltd.- Service no. 1540

Plant 2 (Denver)2000 UNI

- Service no. 1540Plant 1 (New York)

1950 UNI

- Senior consultant 1 day- ABC Software Ltd.- Plant 1 (New York)

1950 UNI

- Senior consultant 1 day- ABC Software Ltd.

2000 UNI

15801560

1540

15801560

1540

Level of conditions

Service ServiceVendor Vendor

Plant

Determining the Price Using Master Conditions II

Adoption in Adoption in documentsdocuments

rders.

The stipulated prices are then used automatically as default values in service specifications.

Service conditions can be used in purchase o

At the level of the service and the vendor

At the level of the service, the vendor, and the plant


© SAP AG 1999

Text module no. Text modulesT1 UnitT1 T1 T1

Masonry workSand-lime bricksSand-lime bricks A240 x 115 x 52240 x 175 x 52Wall thickness 12 cmm2

Wall thickness 24 cmm20102

0201

02

001

Service type 1

Building work

Edition '95

Electricalwork

Edition '97

Plumbingwork

Edition '94

Tilingwork

Edition '96

01

Service type 2

Service type 3

Service type 4

Standard servicecatalog

Standard Service Catalog

dized descriptions of services in the form of individual text modules. The e edition year, the service type and the numbers of the

m from data carriers

Linking of service master records to standard service catalog numbers

The Standard Service Catalog (SSC) is available in addition to the service master file.

The SSC contains standarunique service number is made up of thindividual text modules.

The following functions are possible:

Maintenance of standard service catalogs using the SSC editor

Transfer of external standard service catalogs to the SAP R/3 Syste

Use of standard service catalog numbers in purchasing documents


© SAP AG 1999

Standardized service descriptions

No redundant information

Problem-free communication between Purchasing and theservice provider since descriptions are not ambiguous andservices are identified

Specifications are easy to create using the SSC editor

Advantages of Standard Service Catalogs (SSCs)


© SAP AG 1999

SSCMM-SRV

Specs.

Purchasing document

Value limit5000 for

SSC 037/198

SSC no.037/198

00.02.02.03

T1 T2 T3 T4

0102

020102

0001

0303

03

SSC editor

Service type 037 Edition 1/98

Hangcoarse-grainwood-chip

wallpaper onsloping walls

Purchasing:Purchasing:Straightforward creation of service specsStraightforward creation of service specs

System administratorimports SSC

Wall covering

A Purchasing Document Using a SSC

Once imported or created, the user can select text modules to construct standardized descriptions.


© SAP AG 1999

Specs.

Purch. doc.

Value limit5000 UNI on

model spec A23

Serviceselection

Modelspecification A23

Model spec

ABC Ltd.Contract 46...12Purch. org. 1000

Specs.

User parameter

MSP determinesdefault

Modelspecs.

Defaults:- Fixed vendor- Contract- Purchasing org.

• Cleaning• Interior construction• Pipe-laying• Gardening/mowing

- Multiple re-use of data- Straightforward document creation

Purchasing:System administrator:Single creation of set ofservice specifications

Model Service Specifications

ine

ter use as default values when the model service specification is

The user parameter MSP defines the suggested model specification per user.

Model Service Specifications can store sets of service specifications that you want to use frequently.They can be referenced in various purchasing documents.

A set of model service specifications contains individual service lines and, optionally, an outlrepresenting a hierarchical structure.

Values can be defined for lareferenced.

Purchasing organization

Fixed vendor

Contract document number


© SAP AG 1999

Formulas to Simplify the Calculation of Quantities

Purchasing document

• Define formulas with variablesE.g. VOL01 = calculation of volume

- L x W x H- maximum 5 variables- usual mathematical functions

(+, -, x, /, sin, cos)and constants (e.g. pi, e)

Service entry sheet

Service: 123Dig trench

Unit of measure m3

Quantity ?

The user– chooses formula VOL01 – enters length 2, width 2,

and depth 5 of trench

System calculates value 20m3

Customizing

g quantities in the procurement of externally performed services in

g.

They can include common mathematical functions such as sin, cos and constants such as pi, e.

Formulas are used for calculatinmany purchasing documents.

Formulas have these attributes:

They are freely definable in customizin

They can contain up to five variables.


© SAP AG 1999

General data(client)

Purchasing organization data Accounting data

For example@• Address• Communication

For example:• Order currency• Control data: Automatic PO,

ERS

E.g.:• Account

manage-ment

• Bank data

Organizational Levels of the Vendor Master Record

al aspects.

yment,

The accounting data is stored per company code. Examples are bank information and type of payment.

The vendor master record is structured according to organization

The general data is valid for the entire corporate group (client). An example of general data is the vendor’s address.

Separate purchasing data is maintained per purchasing organization. Examples are terms of paevaluated receipt settlement (ERS) processing, and automatic purchase order processing.


© SAP AG 1999

Create service master records and theirconditions

List benefits of using the standard servicecatalog

Define a model service specification

Describe the organization of the vendor masterrecords


Master Data: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Master Data

, you will be able to:

rds

Describe the organization of the vendor master

At the conclusion of this exercise

• Create service master reco

• Create master conditions

• Define a model service specification

•

Your company will use master data to make service entry easie

You will need service master records to use in re

r.

To test the upcoming scenarios, you must create and maintain service masters and conditions.

1-1 quisitions and purchase orders for often. Use service examples that apply to your company. , for example:

nd repairs

nce

services

service master and add it to your Favorites.

1-1-2 ce master.

n

Base unit of measure:

hour, for example

First service: ___________________________________________

services that are repeated Your company may order

Office cleaning services

Equipment maintenance a

Landscape maintena

Consultant services

Temporary employee

Building contracting …

1-1-1 Find the menu to create a

Create a servi

Description: Your short descriptio

Service category: Service: Purchasing

AU for activity unit or

H for

Material group: 007

Valuation class: Services

Long text is optional. Save it and record the short description for the service. (The text is case sensitive.)


1 Create another service with a different description. The data is otherwsame. Save it and record the short description for the service.

-1-3 ise the

1-2 at you created. Record the service master number

______

1-3 1-3-1 t the service level without specifying a plant or vendor.

d unit (currency) UNI. These conditions can be used

1-3-2 t the service and vendor level. Enter a rate (price) and unit or T-K40A##. These conditions can be used for

1-4 group. Define a Model Service ily.

ification: ##

egory:

our two service master records and a third line with Select an appropriate quantity, rate (price) and unit of line.

Service line item __________ Quantity _______ Rate _____ UOM _____

Second service: _________________________________________

Display the service masters thassigned to each. ADD these to the data sheet: First service number: __________________________________________ Second service number: __________________________________

Your new service masters need default pricing condition records.

Maintain a price aChoose a rate (price) anfor requisitions.

First service price _______________________________________ ADD to the data sheet:

Second service price _____________________________________ Maintain a price a(currency) UNI for vendpurchase orders.

First service price _______________________________________ ADD to the data sheet:

Second service price _____________________________________

Often, you plan to order your new services as aSpecification to reproduce the combination easModel service spec MODEL

Service cat SERV

Currency: UNI

Material group: 007

Purchasing organization: 1000

In the list of services, include yonly a short description. measure for each service

ADD to the data sheet:




*1-5

Has the indicator been set for ERS? (AutoEvalGrSetmtDel) _____________________________________________________

Verify the data for vendor T-K40A## with service master conditions.

1-5-1 What is the vendor’s order currency? ______________________

1-5-2 What are the default purchasing terms of payment? ____________

1-5-3 Has the indicator been set for automatic PO? _________________

1-5-4


Solutions

nit: Master Data

1-1

1-1-1

e

• elect the transaction and then choose →

1-1-2 lect Create new service. Enter the ta enter

1-1-3 lect Create new service. Enter the ta enter

Second Service short description ___________________________

1-2 Service list

er ID in the Created by field and select Execute.

nd service number: ________________________________________

1-3

1-3-1 l t → Service → itions → For service → Add

ADD to data sheet:

U

Logistics → Materials management → Service master → Service → Service master

• Before selecting the transaction, select Add to Favorites to include thmenu path.

S System → User profiles Expand favorites to add just the screen title to Favorites.

Select Favorites and Service Master. Seshort description, service category, and unit of measure. In Basic Dathe material group and valuation class.

First Service short description _____________________________

Select Favorites and Service Master. Seshort description, service category, and unit of measure. In Basic Dathe material group and valuation class.

Logistics → Materials management → Service master → Service →

Enter your Logon Us

ADD to data sheet:

First service number: __________________________________________

Seco

Logistics → Materia s managemen → Service master Service cond

Service number Rate Unit of measure


1-3-2 Logistics Service cond

→ Materia s management → Service master l → Service → itions → For vendor w/o plant → Add

Vendor

Add to data sheet:

T-K40A##

Service number Rate Unit of measure

1-4 → →

short description, an optional search term, vices.

ADD to data sheet:

Logistics → Materials management Service master Model service specification → Create

Enter MODEL##, the service category, a and so on. Select Ser

Service number or description

Quantity Rate (price) Unit of measure

*1-5

t

1-5-4 ERS (AutoEvalGrSetmtDel) NO

1-5-1 Order currency: UNI

1-5-2 Terms of paymen : ZB00

1-5-3 Automatic PO: YES


© SAP AG 1999

Service Specifications

Requisitions

Bid Invitations

Purchase Orders

Contents:

Service Specifications in Requirements


© SAP AG 1999

Define requisitions with a set of servicespecifications that include an outline andservice lines

Describe the use of the approval process fordocuments

List the steps in the Request for Quotationprocess

Create purchase orders by referencing aquotation


Service Specifications: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Your company needs to describe the services youpurchase in great detail. An outline can be used in25% of your documents. Service lines will be usedin 80%.

Bids are required for services without any priororder history if the value is over 5000 UNI.

Service Specifications: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Compile detailed descriptions for yourservices and supplies in requisitions and otherpurchasing documents

Service Specifications: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:


© SAP AG 1999

Requirements for External Services Usage


Acct. assgt. cat.:

Activates external services functionality

D

Purchase order

Specs.

...

UKP

Service specifications notpossible w/o item cat. D

UnknownCost center

Project

ice specifications or statements of work, giving you

This is not possible for material line items.

When creating purchasing documents for services, you must use item category D.

This ensures that you can create a set of servaccess to the service line.


© SAP AG 1999

Example of Service Specifications in a PO

Purch. order

Outline level

Service line

. . . . .

. . . . .

Leistungsverzeichnis

01 Auswahl der Software-Komponenten

01 Anforderungen definieren

Berater/In K4 10 Tage à 2100,- DM

Anpassung der Komponenten02

01 Komponente A


02 Test der Einstellung


Service specifications



Senior Consultant 10 days 2000 per day

Adjustment of software components02

01 Revise Component A

Consultant 5 days 1800 per day

02 Test adjusted configuration


in the hierarchy

May include service lines for any level of an outline

Service Specifications

May include an outline with up to four levels

May include service lines without an outline


© SAP AG 1999

New document Existing data

Model Spec# B23

Purchase requisition

Item 10

Softwareimplementation

Specs.

Requisition# 12345Specs.

Quotation# 22345Specs.

Pur. order# 245678Specs.

PM order# 7778Specs.

Service Selection Classification

Class 12: SoftwareServices

S1S2S3

Compiling Service Specifications and Selection

ions from

The R/3 System supports the search for documents using selections options such as vendor intervals or document date.

Using the Service Selection function, you can easily compile a new set of service specificatexisting purchasing documents and classes of services.

You can reference model service specifications, network operations (Project System), and maintenance orders (Plant Maintenance).

Existing outlines (hierarchical structures for service specifications) can be referenced when creating new outlines. You can choose an entire outline, or an individual outline level.


© SAP AG 1999

Line typeStandard lineContingency line

Service description- Service number- Material group- SSC number- Short/long text- External service number

Quantity fields- Quantity- Quantity recorded (work done)- Overfulfillment tolerances

Price and value fields- Price per unit- Net value

AlternativesBasic lineAlternative line to line 30Bidder‘s line

- Value 123...

Formula

- for user-specific information, e.g. service provider’s social insurance number

User fields - alphanumeric

Service Details

can maintain detailed information.

tity is

rvice line with the values for

There are four user-defined fields, two numeric and two alphanumeric.

For each service line in a set of service specifications, you

External service number is the supplier’s service number.

Overfulfillment tolerances are similar to overdelivery tolerances.

Line type: May be used for a contingency line that is not required or a blanket line whose quanalways one.

Alternatives: May be used for a service that could be substituted for the designated basic line. Bidder’s lines were inserted in a quotation by the vendor.

Formulas that had been defined in customizing can be referenced in a seits variables.


© SAP AG 1999

Service Line Account Assignment

Item 10 Conduct pressuretests

Acct. assgt. cat. K

Document

Service line 10

Cost center1512 Cost center

entered manually

Valuation class3200

The R/3 System determines:- the cost element, and- the default general ledger account on the basis of the valuation class.

Purchasing General ledger

Service master recordcontains the valuation class

Valuation class:3200 External services

Service 10316: Checkwater pressure

The account assignment category in a purchasing document determines the type of cost object you must enter for the service.

The valuation class in a service master record enables the R/3 System to identify the default consumption account of the service.


© SAP AG 1999

Release Procedure with MM Classification

Release codes

CharacteristicMM Classification

Release strategy S4

Value = relevantPurchasingdocument

Item data

Alternative 1 2 3 4 55

1 2 3 4 Purchasingdocument

SAPWorkflow

E-mail

...

item valuePlantVendor

...Purchasing groupMaterial group X

X...XXX...

??

200,000 10004750

001007

Communi-cation

structure

Released!

e item

Release procedures are defined in customizing and are included in LO520 Purchasing Details and Optimization.

The release procedure with a link to classification enables you to specify more release conditions other than value, material group, account assignment and plant.

Using Item Category as a characteristic, you could build release strategies for services that uscategory D.

The release procedure with classification can be used for purchase requisitions and for other purchasing documents including service entry sheets.

The release codes with which a user releases or approves documents are specified in a user’s authorization profile


© SAP AG 1999

Purchaserequisition

RFQs Pricecompar-

isonlist

Purchase order

Bestoffer

Vendor BAngebot

Vendor BAngebot

Vendor AQuotation

Course of the Bid Invitation Process

ase requisitions.

The purchase order is issued to the vendor who submitted the most favorable bid.

Requests for Quotations (RFQs) can be created by referencing purch

Bid or quotation data is entered into the quotation/RFQ document.

The price comparison list facilitates the determination of the best bid.


© SAP AG 1999

Quotation

Specs.

RFQ

Specs.

Doc. type AN

Standard bidding process Global percentage bidding

Not possibleto enter prices

- Specifications- Quantities

RFQ

Specs.

Doc. type ABPrices for each

service line enteredby buyer

- Specifications- Quantities

Quotation

Specs.Prices for each

service line suppliedby service provider

Percentage additions/deductions per outline

level supplied byservice provider

Standard versus Global Percentage Bidding

o provide descriptions of services and bidders in the RFQs.

pplies a percentage deduction from, or an addition to, the prices received from plete

stem.

Two condition types can be applied: header discount KR01 or header surcharge KZ01.

Global Percentage Bidding functionality requires buyers tsuggested prices. The prices are transmitted to prospective

Purchasing buyers wait for quotations from each bidder.

The service provider athe buyers. The additions or deductions can apply to either each group of services or to the comservice specification.

A different document type is used for global percentage bidding – AB in the standard sy


© SAP AG 1999

Comparing Bids Using the Price Comparison List

Purchase order Vendor CService 1 100 UNIService 2 300 UNIService 3 200 UNI

Comparison levelsOutline levelService line

Vendor C100 UNI300 UNI200 UNI

600 UNI

Vendor A150 UNI300 UNI200 UNI

650 UNI

Mean value125 UNI300 UNI200 UNI

625 UNI

Service 1Service 2Service 3

Total Pricecomparison list

Quotation Vendor AService 1 150 UNIService 2 300 UNIService 3 200 UNI

specifications, you must be able to compare prices at different

Selected quotations can be referenced in purchase orders and contracts.

The price comparison list is used to determine the most favorable bid or quotation.

In the case of voluminous service levels of service.

Possible levels for services only:

Price comparison per outline level

Price comparison per service line


© SAP AG 1999


Service Specifications: Unit Summary

Define requisitions with a set of servicespecifications that include an outline and servicelines

Describe the use of the approval process fordocuments

List the steps in the Request for Quotationprocess

Create purchase orders by referencing aquotation


Exercises

Unit: Service Specifications in Requirements Topic: Service Specifications


• Compile detailed descriptions for services and supplies in requisitions or other purchasing documents

ice

n 80% of your documents. Often, lists of services

1-1 for services, you will regularly perform certain tasks. To enu for the activity group

1-2 Create a standard requisition with this data. You will organize an outline to describe

.

me

One month from today

LO540-##

aterial group: 007

1-2-1 Select Enter. Enter a short description for the overall line item.

Your company needs to describe the services it purchases in greatdetail. Outlines can be used in 25% of your documents. Servlines are used iare copied from another document or from a model service specification.

You must create a requisition if the value is over 1000 UNI.

In your role as a buyer focus on these tasks, find and activate the mSAP_MM_BUYER.

1-1-1 Assign it to your user ID.

1-1-2 Read the description of this activity group by selecting Documentation.

the services requested.

Document type: NB

Item category: D

Account assign nt category: U

Delivery date:

Plant: 1000

Purchasing group:

M


1-2-2 to structure your set of service specifications. Add a level to your outline under your initial description. Repeat three times using your own descriptions.

Overal )

pes)

04 Short text (Example: Labor and materials)

1-2-3

ight-hand side, enter your irst service master number with a quantity of 100. What was the source of e price? _______________________________

1-2-4 rvice master record. Order , select a

1-2-5 your model service

1-2-6

L, B and H. The

ntly. Save this requing System → User Profile → Expand favorites

1-2-8

_____

*1-3

Level 04 ____________________________________________________

Use the outline function

l short description (Example: Install Pipe

01 Short text (Example: Set up jobsite)

02 Short text (Example: Lay main pipe)

03 Short text (Example: Connect subsidiary pi

Try different methods to enter services under each outline level.

Select level 01. In the Services screen area on the rfth

Select level 02. In the Services screen area on the right-hand side, enter a short text for a service without a se 100unit of measure, and enter a price. You could enter a detailed description using Goto → Long text for line.

Select level 03. Choose Service selection. Refer tospecification MODEL## and adapt all of its services. Other choices are M-SPEC-1 or M-SPEC-2 for sets of model services.

For level 04 choose Entry variant → Formulas so that your screen fields allow you to enter a formula more easily. Enter a short text. Find the formula for volume and enter values of 10, 15 and 12 for unit of measure is M3 and the gross price is 2 UNI. What is the calculated maximum volume? _____________________________

u enter requisitions freque isition 1-2-7 In your role as buyer, yoscreen as a Favorite us

Save the requisition.


Requisition number: ________________________________

Change the requisition and record the values for each outline level.

Overall ____________________________________________________

Level 01 ____________________________________________________

Level 02 ____________________________________________________

Level 03 ____________________________________________________


Service Specifications in Requirements Exercises

Unit: Service Specifications in Requirements Topic: Bid Invitations

r services using the standard

Create purchase orders by referencing quotations


• Create multiple bid invitations fobidding process

• Compare multiple bids

•

Your company asks for bids when a source cannot be found in the system and the value is over 5000 UNI.

Purchase orders are created from either requisitions or quotations.

2-1

_____________

RFQ: _________________________________________________

2-2 y returned their quotations. Maintain the data in the parison. Be

l

4 _________________ _________________

Your new requisition should be sent to at least two service providers for quotations. Create requests for quotations (RFQ) by copying the requisition.

2-1-1 The document type is AN. The quotations are due in two weeks. Enter a Collective number of LO540## to help track the quotations.

Was the outline reproduced in the RFQ? _____________________

2-1-3 Enter T-K40A## for the first vendor and save the RFQ. Do not exit the screen.

RFQ: ____________________________________

2-1-4 Enter T-K40B## for the second vendor and save.

Your service providers promptlR/3 System. A price for the first service per level is sufficient for comsure that there is a difference!

Outline leve T-K40A## T-K40B##

Total value _________________ _________________

01 _________________ _________________

02 _________________ _________________

03 _________________ _________________

0


The quotation data is entered into the request for quotation (RFQ) and shares the same document number.

2-3

price.

per level.

l.

2-3-4 Mark the second-ranked quotation for a rejection letter.

2-4 Select the SAP standard menu to find the path to create a purchase order,

2-5 ns, the lowest-cost service provider is awarded the

The account is 417000 and the cost

voice tab, select the indicator for service-based IV (and deselect ERS.

urchase order number: ________________________________________

Before you award a purchase order or contract, compare prices for the two quotations you received. Use the collective number to select both at once or enter the two RFQ numbers. Display the Mean value quotation to see the average

2-3-1 Which quotation ranked first overall? _______________________

2-3-2 Select the Services Details to display the individual services

2-3-3 Select Hierarchy Level 4 to display costs per outline leve

*

Vendor/Supplying Plant Known. Add it to your Favorites.

After evaluating the quotatiopurchase order. Use your Favorite. Adopt the services from the quotation so that all of the details are included.

As the buyer, you know the accounting information and change the U unknown account assignment category to K cost center.center is 4110. If you select Auto Repeat AA the same accounting information is applied to subsequent services in the outline.

On the in

Save it.

ADD it to the data sheet.

P


Solutions

Unit: Service Specifications in

Requirements Topic: Service Specifications

1-1

M_BUYER.

masters.

l this menu at any time.

tation.

1-2

1-2-2

.

ction. Enter MODEL##. Select all services

-2-6

easure 0.

→ Expand favorites

Requisition number: _____________________________________

Select Other Menu.

Select Activity group SAP_M

1-1-1 Select Assign users.

Enter your Logon user ID and select Add Users.

Select Yes to Generate profile and compare user

Select User Menu to cal

1-1-2 Select Documen

Requisition → Create

Enter the item category, account assignment category, delivery date, plant, purchasing group, and material group on the initial screen.

1-2-1 Enter a description of your choice for the line item.

Select Outline On/Off. With your cursor on the first line of the outline, select New Subgroup. Enter outline level 01 and your description. Place your cursor on the first line again and repeat for levels 02, 03, and 04.

1-2-3 Select outline level 01. On the right-hand side of the screen, enter your first service master number and quantity100.

The price for the service came from the service condition without a vendor

1-2-4 For level 02 of the outline, enter a short text, quantity 100, your choice of unit of measure and your price.

1-2-5 For level 03, select Service Seleand adapt all services.

1 Entry variant → Formulas.

Select formula VOL01. Enter formula values 10, 15 and 12, unit of mM3, and gross price 2 UNI. The volume is 180

1-2-7 System → User Profile

1-2-8 ADD to the data sheet:


*1-3 equisiton→ Change

R

Outline level Values

Outline total

Level 01

Level 02

Level 03

Level 04


Service Specifications in Requirements Solutions

Unit: Service Specificat

ions in Requirements Topic: Bid Invitations

2-1 ate

isition. Enter your ter.

2-1-1 overview screen, select the line item and Services. Choose a

. Enter T-

2-1-3 Enter vendor T-K40B## and save. RFQ number ________________________

2-2

nd ter a value in the Service screen area on the

, or in the

rocess for the second quotation.

From your user menu, choose RFQ/Quotation → Request for quotation → Cre

Enter the quotation deadline. Select Create referencing requrequisition number, deselect Assigned and choose En

In the Header detail screen, enter the Coll. Number.

In the Create RFQ: Selection List, choose the item and Adopt.

From the Itemlevel in the outline to display its list of services. The outline was reproduced in the RFQ.

2-1-2 Return to the Item overview screen. Select Vendor AddressK40A##. Save the RFQ. RFQ number ____________________

______________________________

RFQ/Quotation → Quotation → Maintain

Enter the first RFQ number. From the Item overview screen, select the first item aServices. Choose an outline level and enright-hand side. Record the values for the quotations as you enter themOutline screen area select Total values.

Repeat the p

Outline level T-K40A## T-K40B##

Total value

Level 01

Level 02

Level 03

Level 04


2-3

e Execute.

nk first. _______________________

n in column R on the right-hand side of the line item, or choose Edit → Fast change, set the rejection indicator and choose

2-4 Logistics → → →

System → User profile → Expand favorites

2-5

Services, Reference your RFQ number, and select Complete.

to Repeat AA.

rvice-based IV indicator on the Invoice tab.

urchase order number: ________________________________________

RFQ/Quotation → Quotation → Price comparison

Enter Collective RFQ LO540##, select Mean value quotation and choos

2-3-1 Record the quotation ra ed

2-3-2 Select Services detail.

2-3-3 Select Hierarchy Level 4.

*2-3-4 Select the second-ranked quotation. Choose Maintain quotation.

Either set the rejectio indicator

Continue and Save.

→ Materials Management Purchasing Purchase order Create → Vendor/supplying plant known

From within the transaction, select

Purchase order is now a Favorite.

Choose Favorite Purchase Order

Copy from your RFQ/Quotation number.

From the Services tab, select the Full Scr.:Services icon.

Choose Select

Select adapt.

Change the account assignment category to K.

Enter account 417000, cost center 4110, and select Au

Set the Se

Save it.


P


© SAP AG 1999

Sources to Assign to a Requisition

Converting Requisitions into Purchase Orders andRelease Orders

Optimized Procurement

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Describe how the the R/3 System determinessources of supply

Convert a requisition into a purchase order orrelease


Optimized Procurement: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Several of your services are scheduled frequently.To process requisitions more efficiently, you willtest the assignment of a service provider fromcontract or condition records.

Optimized Procurement: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Origin of Purchase Requisitions

or

Created manually in user department

Project system (PS)Plant maint. (PM). . .

Generated automatically

Purchaserequisition

se or generated automatically , Service Management, and so on.

Procurement converts purchase requisitions into purchase orders.

Purchase requisitions are created within departments for internal uwithin other processes such as Plant Maintenance, Project System


© SAP AG 1999

Requisition Processing

Create purch.requisition

Determinesource

Release(optional)

Process requisition/If no source determined:

RFQ or assign vendor

Manualor

automatic

Pur. order1

2Requisn. Contract Requisn

o.k.Vendor

Contractrel. order

RFQ

??

s into purchase orders.

r RFQ processing.

Requisition release/approval processing is optional.

From a list of open requisitions, you can automate the conversion proces

If no source is found, you could set the requisition fo


© SAP AG 1999

Suggested Sources

Purchaserequisition- Material groupSoftware consulting

- Service 1580Senior consultant

Rel. order

Pur. order

1

2

Rel. order

Contract

- Mat. Group

Software consulting

Possible sources

- Service 1580

- 250 UNI

Contract- Service 1580

- 260 UNI

Pric

e si

mul

atio

n

Exist?

no yes

- Contracts for service

x

x

x

- Service conditions

- Contracts for material group

Vendor

ConditionsVendor:Miller Corp.

If several sources are suggested, you can determine the most favorable one by carrying out a price simu tion.

If conditions and contracts with service specifications exist for certain material groups, they are suggested as potential sources.

la


© SAP AG 1999

Price Simulation for Source Comparison

Selection of suitable source from those suggested

X

Possible for one or all of the sources found.

Results at individual service or outline level.

Color signals indicate origin of prices.Price available, originates from listed source.

Price available, but originates from conditions for vendor and service, not from listed source.

Price available, but only an own estimate (service condition).

No price available.

urces are suggested.

e individual price and total value

Outline level second line – Total value of all services belonging to the outline level

To help you select a source, you can compare prices if several so

Price comparison is possible for one or all of the sources listed.

For a service line it displays th

For outline levels it displays:

Outline level first line – Total value of all subordinate outline levels


© SAP AG 1999

Customizing Source Determination

Purchaserequisition

- Mat. group 05 Softw. consulting- 1580- 1590- 1600- 1635

-At least one service-All services

Service conditionsVendor Miller Corp.1600 200 UNI

Contract- 1600 . . .

Contract- 1580- 1590- 1600- 1635 . .

Contract

- 5030- 6700- 6720- 6800

Mat. group 05Softw. consulting

At leastone

service

Allservices Service conditions

Vendor Smith Co.1580 180 UNI1590 130 UNI1600 200 UNI1635 95 UNI

Same material group/other services

Customizing

e

the services requested in the requisition

Automatic purchase order processing for services is also set in customizing. The other prerequisite is that the Automatic PO indicator must be set for each vendor master.

Using the Customizing facility Source determination and default values at the client or purchasing organization level, you can define whether:

All contracts and master conditions that contain at least one of the services requested in a purchasrequisition are to be suggested as possible sources or

Only those contracts or master conditions containing all are to be offered for selection or

A search for the material group is possible at item level


© SAP AG 1999

Describe how the R/3 System determinessources of supply

Convert a requisition into a purchase order orrelease


Optimized Procurement: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Optimized Procurement

After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

• Convert a requisition into a standard purchase order or contract release order

• Explain how the SAP System finds sources of supply

You test the source determination facility for the External Services area using data from contracts and conditions.

1-1

0A##

ation

p: #

e group:

r

structure).

and enter a favorable price.

ontract number: ___________________________________________________

1-2

You have negotiated favorable conditions for your first services. Define a value contract.

Vendor: T-K4

Agreement type: WK

Purchasing organiz 1000

Purchasing grou Z#

Item category: D

Account assignment category: U

Plant: 1000

Material/servic 007

Validity end: End of next yea

Target value: 1,000,000 UNI

Enter a short text describing the planned service (e.g. “pipelaying work”) in the item overview. Do not create an outline (hierarchical

Enter your first service

Update your datasheet.

C

You are the buyer who assigns purchase requisitions to vendors and then converts the requisitions into purchase orders.


1-2-1 Check in Customizing whether all contracts containing at least one of the services requested in the requisition are suggested by the system in the source determination process.

1-2-2 Create a new purchase requisition. purchase requisition as

You can use your previously created copy reference.

-2-3 Assign a source to your requisition automatically, using the Assign function. Choose requisitions for your purchasing group and material/service group

1-3 ously been set

1-3-1

1-3-2

requisition. Click the Execute icon.

Which price was drawn: the contract price or the price from the purchase requisition? _________________________________________________

Purchase order no.: ___________________________________________

1

007. Click Assign automatically on the screen.

1-2-4 Save the assignment.

It is possible to have the system automatically convert requisitions with an assigned source into POs. A prerequisite is that the relevant indicator has previfor your vendor and in Customizing for External Services.

Check vendor T-K40A## to see whether the Automatic purchase order indicator has been set. If not, set it.

Take a look at the setting for automatic POs in Customizing.

1-3-3 Create a purchase order automatically. Choose the requisitions for your purchasing group and the above-mentioned vendor. Select New PO per


Solutions

Unit: Optimized Procurement

1-1

i tial screen. Enter your first service.

ontract number: _____________________________________________

1-2

1-2-1

s Management

1-2-3

Choose purchase requisitions for your purchasing group and 0 Click Assign automatically on the screen.

1-2-4

1-3

-3-1

1-3-2

s Management

→ Create matically via Purchase Requisitions.


Outline agreement → Contract → Create

Maintain the data on the ni


C

Source determination

Main SAP Menu → Logistics → Materials Management → Service Entry Sheet → Environment → Customizing or customizing: Materials Management → External Service

Source Determination and Default Values → For Client

Purchase Requisition → Follow-on Functions → Assign

material/service group 0 7.


Contract number: _____________________________________________

Vendor master record

1 Vendor → Purchasing → Change (Current)

Choose the purchasing data. Set the Automatic purchase order indicator.

Main SAP Menu → Logistics → Materials Management → Service Entry → →Sheet Environment Customizing

or customizing: Materials Management → External Service

Source Determination and Default Values → For Client.

→ Follow-on Functions 1-3-3 Purchasing → Purchase Requisition Purchase Order→ Auto


© SAP AG 1999

Unplanned services

Use of value limits

Combination of planned and unplanned services

Value Limits for Unplanned Services

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999


Value Limits: Unit Objectives

Apply value limits to control costs in theprocurement of services and supplies

Create a service specification with unplannedvalue limits for unplanned services


© SAP AG 1999

Value Limits: Business Scenario

Often the services you order are unknown whenyou work with consulting or maintenancecontracts. You can apply limits to control thosecosts. Limits are also used for not to exceedcontract limits.


© SAP AG 1999

Value Limit for Unplanned Services

adhered toLimit

Service entry sheet 3rd Feb.Item 10

Oil filter replaced1 hour 75 UNICost center 123

1

Release procedure Acceptance

Purch. order # 12345 27th Jan.Item 10 Repair printing press

- Precise description of work- Order quantity- Account assignment

Cost control throughimposition of limits !!

??????

Specs.

??

Value limits are a tool of cost control with regard to those services whose exact nature or scope are not known or which you do not want to specify in detail at order entry time.


© SAP AG 1999

Value Limit When Planning/recording Services

Service specifications inthe purchase order

7th April

Service entrysheets



02 Adjustment of software components

Senior Consult. 3 days 2000 / day

01 Revise Component AConsultant 5 days 1800 per day

02 Test adjusted configurationConsultant 3 days 1800 per day








Unplanned services up to maximum 60000??


Modification to Component QConsultant 10 days 2100 per day

Value limit

erformed and entered into the R/3 System, planned services from the relevant dopted directly in the service entry sheet by referencing the purchase order.

red.

e

In the process, the R/3 System checks that the limits have been adhered to as set out in the purchase order.

Planned Services:

The service descriptions, quantities and prices have already been finalized at the time you ordered.

When services are ppurchase order are a

Unplanned Services:

The service descriptions, quantities, and prices have not yet been finalized at the time you orde

The service description, quantity, and price are not entered until the time that the services arrecorded.


© SAP AG 1999

Value Limit: Expected Value

From the business point of view:

The value to which unplanned services are likely to beperformed and recorded

Technically:Used for account assignment and commitment value

Serves as the basis for the release procedure (if one is applied)

Depending on your aims with regard to cost control:Expected value is lower than overall limitExpected value is higher than overall limit

The expected value is added to the total value of the planned services to equal the net value of the document line item.

The Expected Value is the total likely to be performed and charged by the service provider. It need not equal the overall limit.

If the document may be subject to a release procedure, this value represents the value limits portionof the line item.


© SAP AG 1999

Planned Procurement of Services

Purchase order

No value limits

Specs.

- Service 1580- Service 1540

Serviceentry sheet


Plannedservices only

First possibility:

services actually r.

This is appropriate if the services are known at the purchase order time.

If unplanned services are not defined in the purchase order, you can enter performed only if they are included in the service specification of the orde


© SAP AG 1999

Partially Planned Procurement of Services

Purchase order

LimitContract 1 20000 UNIContract 2 10000 UNI

No servicespecifications

Serviceentry sheet- Service 10from contract 1

- Service 24from contract 2

- Service 57from contract 2

Contract limitsbut no planned

services

Second possibility:

This is appropriate if you do not know the scope or the exact nature of the services, but know the area they represent and which contracts set their prices or values.

If limits are set against certain contracts, you can only enter services if they are covered by these contracts. The R/3 System automatically adapts the contract prices.


© SAP AG 1999

Unplanned Procurement of Services

Purchase order

Value Limits

No servicespecifications

Serviceentry sheet


X Unlimited

.

.

.

Unplannedservices only

Not created untilservices actually

performedare entered

Specifications

Third possibility:

This is appropriate if you only know the service provider at purchase order time, but do not have any further information on the quantity or type of service.

If no limit is placed on the value of the services in the purchase order (value unlimited) any servicesperformed can be entered with any quantity and price. The service specifications are not created until the services are actually performed and recorded in the R/3 System, late in the procurement cycle.


© SAP AG 1999

Overall Limit, Sub-limits, Limit w/o Reference

Limit definition

Overall limit100000 UNI

Limit (unspecified)10000 UNI

Purchase orderABC Software Ltd.

10 Software implementation ...

Serviceentry sheet

<_ 60000 UNI model spec A200

Limits on model specsNo. A200 60000 UNINo. B320 50000 UNI

Planned

Unplannedvia limit

...

Unplanned service2000 UNI

Fourth possibility:

Model spec A200

Model spec B320ABC Software GmbH

10 Software Consulting

- Junior consultant - Senior consultant - Head consultant

Limit100000 UNI

services within the sub-limit the

ntered against model service

These limits are appropriate if you have a firm idea of the services involved, but should also allow for various contingencies.

If an overall limit exists and sub-limits are defined, you can enter amounts. The overall limit must not be exceeded. The service specifications are not created until services are actually performed and recorded in the R/3 System.

Within the limits defined above, services up to 60000 UNI can be especification A200, 50000 UNI for B320, and any other services up to 10000 UNI. If you try to exceed 100000 UNI you have reached the maximum overall limit.


© SAP AG 1999

Apply value limits to control costs in theprocurement of services and supplies

Create a service specification wirh unplannedvalue limits


Value Limits: Unit Summary


Value Limits Exercises

Unit: Value Limits

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

• Make use of value limits for the purposes of cost control in the procurement of materials and services.

In many cases, it is not initially clear precisely which

You order various services. However, the service pr

services will be required (what work needs to be done). By using value limits, you can keep a tight rein on the costs of unplanned services.

1-1 ovider cannot say exactly what e number of man-hours, parts, etc.

been done.

rd purchase order)

#

ent category:

1-1-1 100 for the first service. Where does the price come from? ______________________________________________________

the final cost will be (based on the precisneeded) until all the work has actually

Create the following purchase order.

Order type: NB (Standa

Vendor: T-K40A##

Purchasing organization: 1000

Purchasing group: Z#

Account assignm K

Item category: D

Material/service group: 007

Plant: 1000

Enter a short description covering the complete item.

Enter the number of your first service master record and the quantity


1 Set limits for the unplanned services (under Limits). -1-2

if a release (approval)

_________________________________

1-1-3 .

Purchase order no.: ______________________________________

The overall limit is 10000 UNI. This is the maximum value of the unplanned services.

The expected value is 9000 UNI. This value is used procedure is applied.

Enter 5000 UNI under Other limit.

Before saving the data, take a look at the item overview. What is the net price? Which two values were added together to obtain this figure?

_____________________

Save the purchase order



Value Limits Solutions

U

nit: Value Limits

1-1 t

lanned service) and the limit for the expected s) were added together.

1-1-3

Purchase order no.: ____________________________________________

Favori es: Purchase Order

1-1-1 The gross price comes from the master conditions for the services/vendor.

1-1-2 The value of the first service (pvalue (unplanned service

Update your data sheet.


© SAP AG 1999

Entering Services Performed

Acceptance/Approval of Actual Services

Reporting and Purchase Order History

Entry and Acceptance of Performed Services

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Enter planned and unplanned servicesperformed

Approve or accept the services

Display the purchase order history

Execute reports on services


Entry and Acceptance of Services: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Instead of a goods receipt, you enter service entrysheets which track the actual consulting,maintenance or repairs completed. There is noinventory processing required.

For service entry sheets over 2000, you will needtwo approvals. Under 2000 an acceptance issufficient.

Entry and Acceptance: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Creation of an Entry Sheet for Performed Services

Service specifications inthe purchase order

7th April

Service entrysheets



02 Adjustment of software components

Senior Consult. 3 days 2000 / day

01 Revise Component AConsultant 5 days 1800 per day

02 Test adjusted configurationConsultant 3 days 1800 per day








Unplanned services up to maximum 60000??


Modification to Component QConsultant 10 days 2100 per day

Value limit

r reference.

t in the purchase order:

se order.

Unplanned services are allowed only if limits were defined.

You maintain services performed from the purchase orde

Planned services These can be adopted directly in the service entry sheet.

Unplanned services In this case, a precise description, the quantity, and price data are not provided until the services actually performed are entered into the system.

The system checks whether the unplanned services conform to the limits se

Planned services are allowed up to the quantities in the purcha


© SAP AG 1999

Service Entry and Account Assignment

575 UNI

Service entry sheet

Total:

Account assgt - single - multiple

Senior consultant

Junior consultant

Computer hours

1h

1h

1h

250 UNI

225 UNI

100 UNI

Account A 50%

Account A

Account B

PO history

Service entry

GR item 1

GR item 2

575 UNI

225 UNI

350 UNI

Material doc. Financial doc.

Account A

Account B

125 + 100 = 225

125 + 225 = 350

Summation at time ofservice acceptance

Account B 50%

generated, which

The account assignments are debited at the same time in the accounting document.

In the case of external services, a valuated acceptance is carried out.

A goods receipt line item is inserted for each account assignment item.

At the time the entry sheet is accepted, a logistics document (material document) is then controls the updating.


© SAP AG 1999

Message Output for Entry Sheet

Serviceentry sheet

Printer Fax

Linked to message

determination

Message determination is defined in customizing, as it is for purchase orders and other documents.

You can initiate the transmission of service entry sheets in message form manually.

Using the message determination facility, new service entry sheets can be selected automatically andprinted or transmitted at certain time intervals.


© SAP AG 1999

Release Procedure for Service Entry Sheets

Service entrysheet

3

5

= Technical release

= Commercial release and acceptance

Release points:

2 41

Strategy 5

Service entrysheet

can have up to eight levels of approval and uses classification to select the for approval requirements.

NI

First level must approve before the second level can approve

You can subject service entry sheets to a release procedure.

The release strategycharacteristics

An example:

Entry sheet value greater than 5000 U

Entry sheet charged to a cost center

First approval by a logistics manager

Second-level approval by an accounting manager


© SAP AG 1999

One-Step Service Acceptance

Entry Acceptance

Financial postings

Serviceentry sheet

Serviceentry sheet


Services...

t the time of

have the authorization to accept services performed.

e following options:

ntry + service acceptance (one user)

cceptance (user B)

- service acceptance (user A)

If a service entry sheet is not subject to a release procedure, it can be directly accepted aservice entry.

A precondition for this is that you

You have th

One step

- service e

Two steps

- service entry (user A)

- service a

Two steps

- service entry (user A)


© SAP AG 1999

Multi-Step Service Approval

Entry Acceptance

Serviceentry sheet


Services...

Differentiatedworklists

Releaseprocedure

1 2 3Via collective

release

Financial postings

Serviceentry sheet

Serviceentry sheet

heets can be released individually, collective release is the usual approach adopted. This means that you create worklists of all service entry sheets you are required to release within a certain period.

If a service entry sheet is subject to a release strategy, as a rule it must be released (approved) by several individuals (multi-step acceptance/approval).

Although service entry s


© SAP AG 1999

Monitoring Purchase Orders

List of follow-on activities relating to a purchase order

From within the service specifications display function

- General analyses- Analysis of purchase order values- Logistics Information System- Business Information Warehouse

Purchase order history

Comparison of planned/actual values

Purchasing analyses

The purchasing functionality provides a number of ways to obtain information on the activities that a purchase order for services:

d/actual values

ter, or

on System – Standard analysis by service allows you to select by a service aterial group.

MM External Services Management is linked to the Logistics Information System (LIS).

follow from

PO history

Comparison of planne

Purchasing analyses:

List displays – Among the search methods for external services are the service master number or the short text description.

General Analysis – Determines the order value for a certain material group over the last quarwhich purchasing organization is responsible for the largest share of the total order values.

Order Value Analysis – Select by material group and list by net order value, ABC analysis, frequency analysis, and so on.

Logistics Informatimaster number or m

Service entry sheets

List analysis – Select by service master or purchase order.


© SAP AG 1999

Purchase Order History

Pur. order 1234

Specs.

Invoice 5678Vendor ASoftwareimplem. 21000 UNI

Serviceentry sheet

21000 UNI

Serviceentry sheet

List of follow-on activities

- All services performed to date- Entered but not accepted

- All services performed to date- Entered and accepted

All invoices

= SEnt

= GR

= RE-L

21000 UNI

n transactions and events relating to a

ipt.

It records the relevant invoices received from the service provider.

The Purchase Order history is actually a list of all follow-ocertain purchase order item.

It tracks all services actually performed and recorded.

It lists all services that have been accepted that produce a goods rece


© SAP AG 1999

Comparison of Planned/Actual Values

PO 1234

Specs. 01 Selection of softwarecomponents

Service Specs. OutlineTotal Values

50%

Actualin %

Totalvalue

Actualvalue

50000 25000

The Total Values selection also shows the value and percentage that has been performed/entered at the current date.

From the outline view of a set of service specifications you can display the total values of all orderedservices per outline level.


© SAP AG 1999

Enter planned and unplanned servicesperformed

Approve or accept the services

Display the purchase order history

Execute reports on services


Entry and Acceptance of Services: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Entry and Acceptance of Services Performed

be able to:

s

ntry sheets

After completing these exercises, you will

• Enter planned and unplanned service

• Release/accept service e

• Look at the PO history

• Create service reports

Instead of recording a goods receipt, you create service entry sheets listing the consulting services rendered and/or the maintenance and repair work that has been done. There are no inventory management activities.

release (approval) procedure.

Create a service entr

Service entry sheets with a value exceeding 2,000 UNI are subject to a

1-1 y sheet for the purchase order from the unit “Value Limits”.

erv

Second line: a service. Choose a suitable quantity and price com Other limit nor the overall

t if possible.

___________

1-2

1-2-1 al

1-2-2

1-3 if it is not subject to a release procedure. Note the t before and after acceptance.

Service entry sheet no.: ______________________________________________

Enter a short text describing the services that have been performed. Record the following s ices:

First line: Number of service master record, 100 or less for the quantity.

Enter a description forbination that causes neither the

limit to be exceeded.

Approve the entry shee

Save the entry sheet.


Service entry sheet no.: ___________________________________

Release all entry sheets (if they are subject to a release procedure).

You are responsible for releasing the entry sheets from the technicstandpoint. Use the code 01 to effect release. Narrow down the range of entry sheets found by selecting those for your purchasing group.

Now release the entry sheets in the capacity of head of Accounts Payable. Use the release code 02.

Accept the service entry sheetcolor of the traffic ligh

Save the entry sheet.

Make a note of the entry sheet number and update your datasheet.


Solutions

Unit: Entry and Acceptance of Services Performed

1-1

er from the document list or enter the relevant number.

r a short text, the quantity, the unit of measure, and the ervice.

________________________________________

1-2 e se

1-2-1

Z##

e icon.

1-2-2

Z##

1-3 Sheet

ere generated:

• One or more acceptance documents

User menu: Service Entry Sheet

Choose your purchase ord

Click Create entry sheet.

Select the services and click Adopt.

On the second line, enteprice for an unplanned s


Service entry sheet no.: ______

User menu: Collective R lea

Release code: 01

Purchasing group

Click the Execut

Release code: 02

Purchasing group

Click the Execute icon.

User menu: Service Entry

The color signal is green.

Environment → PO History.

At least two documents w

• A service entry sheet


© SAP AG 1999

Vendor invoices referencing a purchase order or aservice entry sheet

Contents:



© SAP AG 1999


Invoice Verification: Unit Objectives

Create an invoice from the service entry sheetdata


© SAP AG 1999

To complete the procurement process, you willenter an invoice into the R/3 System and review theevaluated receipt settlement (ERS) options.

Invoice Verification: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

InvoiceABCSoftware Ltd.

20000 UNISheet 1 Mar. 31

O.k.

?

VendorABCSoftware Ltd.PO 0346722PO item 01

Sheet 1 20000 UNI Sheet 3 6000UNI

26000UNI

Value 20000 UNI

Serviceentry sheet

Invoice from vendor

Invoiceverification

Invoice Verification: Reference to an Entry Sheet

vice entry sheet.

In the event of variances, the invoice can be entered but is blocked for payment.

You enter an invoice with reference to a purchase order.

Using the PO number, all accepted service entry sheets for this PO are offered for selection.

The R/3 System compares the price shown in the invoice with that of the ser

If there are no variances, the invoice can be entered and subsequently paid.


© SAP AG 1999

Service entry

Serviceentry sheet

Goods receipt

MMM

M

Material

=

GR-based invoice verification allows each service entry sheet relatingto a PO to be invoiced separately.

GR-Based Invoice Verification

Externalservice

purchase order, the R/3 System provides you with n

ervice rately.

In the PO history, each invoice item can be assigned to precisely one service entry sheet.

When you enter an invoice with reference to a most of the data in the form of default values. You need only to enter a small amount of informatiodirectly.

GR-based invoice verification (that is, entering invoices for services with reference to the sentry sheet) allows each service entry sheet relating to a purchase order to be invoiced sepa

Only services with approved service entry sheets may be invoiced with GR-based invoice verification.


© SAP AG 1999

Pur. order1

2

Invoice Verification: Data Updates

Financial accounting

Assets

Cost centers

Projects

......

Purchasing and accounting data is updated when an invoice is posted.

Invoiceverification

Invoice Verification uses datafrom Purchasing and the

service and vendor masterrecords.


Vendor master record

Conditions

Serviceentry

Vendorinvoice


© SAP AG 1999

Create an invoice from the service entry sheetdata


Invoice Verification: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Invoice Verification

Generate an invoice from the service entry sheet data

After completing these exercises, you will be able to:

•

e purchase

order and the acceptance or goods receipt document is created once the service entry sheet has been approved.

1-1 ich you recorded in a service entry sheet in the unit Entry and

voice data in Logistics Invoice

s date

alcula

o.:

e lines.

ber: _________________________________________________________________

To complete the procurement process, enter an invoice for yourservice provider. The invoice is compared with th

Your service provider T-K40A## has sent you an invoice for the services performed, whAcceptance of Services Performed. Enter the inVerification.

Document date: Today’

Tax calculation indicator:C te tax

Document n PO number or number of service entry sheet

Basic data: Amount: Enter the Balance amount (shown at the top of the screen on the right).

If no tax code has been set, enter 0i at the relevant point in the servic

Use the Simulate function to generate posting lines on a trial basis.

Invoice num_

ter record or a PO item, each service item is shown in invoice verification and in the PO history of the goods receipt.

If service-based invoice verification has been defined in the vendor mas


Solutions

Unit: Invoice Verification

1-1

Invoice number: ____________________________________________________

Main SAP menu: Logistics → Materials Management → Invoice Verification→Logistics Invoice Verification → Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Look for the PO or entry sheet number on your datasheet. If the amounts yield a zero balance after the data has been entered, you can save the invoice.


© SAP AG 2000

Section: Logistics Information System (LIS)


© SAP AG 1999

Unit Flexible Analysisin LIS

Unit LIS Environment

Unit Data Warehouse Concepts

Unit Standard Analysis in LIS

Unit Early Warning System

Content: Logistics Information System (LIS)

Preface


© SAP AG 1999

LIS: Goals

Gain conceptual information and hands-on experienceof reporting in the LIS systemUse online documentation to resolve implementationand usage issues

This section will enable you to:


© SAP AG 1999

Data Warehouse Concepts

Basic concepts and terminology

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Data Warehouse Concepts: Unit Objectives

Explain how modern data warehouse productsensure availability of information

Define SAP terminology and data warehouseconceptsIdentify the difference between document-independent information and document-specificapplication data



© SAP AG 1999

Flexible analysis

Standard analysisStandard analysis

Advancedanalysis functions


• Selection versions• Authorizations• Hierarchies


EWS Early Warning System

FI

PPMMExternal data SD

Data Warehouse Concepts: Overview

explained in detail - the different information systems of the Logistics Data Warehouse are introduced and the role of this concept in the SAP Open Information Warehouse will be defined.

This unit explains the data warehouse concept in LIS.

The individual levels of this concept are


© SAP AG 1999

Data Warehouse Concept: Business Scenario

Your organization is implementing all R/3 Logisticsmodules. To ensure consistent reporting acrossthe enterprise, management has requested that thesame set of data warehouse reporting tools beused for all logistics analyses.


© SAP AG 1999

Data Warehouse Concepts

OnlineTransactionProcessing

DATAWARE-HOUSE

OLTP

OLAP

Analysis tools

OnlineAnalytical

Processing

Aggregated information

Integrated application modules

Sales and Distribution Finance

ProductionPlanning

MaterialsManagement

External Data

enting

ems form the basis for obtaining information. They

istical data to be analyzed and presented in an efficient and impressive way. They can therefore make a huge contribution towards reducing the time needed to make decisions in modern management.

State-of-the-art data warehouse concepts use a three-tier model as the starting point for implemefficient, integrated information systems.

The three tiers subdivide the flow of data, from data acquisition in the operative systems right through to the presentation of information at the top level.

Integrated, operative applications in OLTP systare filled with large quantities of master and process data. The information systems present this information in a compact and structured form.

This is achieved by compressing the application data to obtain more compact, informative key figures and then managing it separately in the database tables of a data warehouse.

The statistical data obtained in this way can then be analyzed using a variety of analysis tools which are available in the third tier.

These tools offer a wide range of methods that allow stat


© SAP AG 1999

The Logistics Data Warehouse in the SAP System

Quantity

Time

Info Structures

BusinessIntelligence

SAP R/3 SAP R/2

S012S012

LIS Updating

S...S...

S039S039S001S001

OnlineTransactionProcessing

DATAWARE-HOUSE

OLTP

OLAP OnlineAnalytical

Processing

Open Information Warehouse and

ich are maintained in parallel to

Further information systems are available for the Financial Accounting, Controlling, and Human Resources modules.

The Logistics Information System is a component of the SAPprovides information from the areas of Sales and Distribution, Purchasing, Production, Warehouse Management, Plant Maintenance, and Quality Management.

In LIS, important information is stored in individual databases, whthe operational systems. The primary objective here is to transform the detailed data in the operational systems into key figures with a high predictive value.


© SAP AG 1999

OLTPOLTPOLTP

RVRV RFRF

RM-PPSRM-PPS

RM-MATRM-MAT

SAP R/3 SAP R/2FIFISDSD

MMMM PPPP

OLTP systemsMapping of businessprocessesManagement of masterand process data

Non-SAPsystems

QuantityTime

LIS Updating

Online Transaction Processing

LIS updating for processdata processing

ExtractionAggregationCalculation of statistics

, can be

s are anchored in the R/3 OLTP applications via special

o its statistically-relevant components, that is, they

uarantees that LIS information is consistent with operational data. It is

ly, which reduces the system load

ple, LIS update programs of an R/3 System to be supplied with process data from an SAP R/2 application, which means that LIS can become an R/3 OLAP application for an R/2 OLTP System.

Modules from both the SAP R/2 and the SAP R/3 Systems, as well as from non-SAP systemsclassed as integrated application modules at OLTP level.

The huge volumes of data contained in these modules make a detailed overview of business processes difficult to achieve.

The R/3 Logistics Information Systemupdating modules. LIS updating, together with data aggregation, constitutes one of the chief principles of the overall LIS concept.

Update programs reduce the process data down tcumulate relevant data in LIS at regular intervals in terms of objects, and then use formulas and conditions to calculate informative key figures.

Statistical data can be updated in LIS at the same time as the process data is being processed in the application modules. This gequally possible, however, for updating to take place asynchronousin the application systems.

You can also link R/3 LIS components to external OLTP systems.

This allows, for exam


© SAP AG 1999

Logistics Data Warehouse

Info structure: PurchasingInfo structure: PurchasingCharacteristicsPlantMaterialVendor...

Period unit Key figureMonthWeekDay...

Order quantityOrder valueNo. of deliveriesLast purchase order...

QuantityTime Logistics Data Warehouse

Info structuresTransparentAggregation criteria

CharacteristicsPeriod unit

Performance measuresQuantitative keyfiguresQualitative keyfigures

Diverse info structuresavailable in standardsystemEasy-to-use toolsfor creating self-definedinfo structures

Self-Defined Info StructuresSelf-Defined Info Structures

Factory Mgmt.Factory Mgmt. Production/SalesProduction/Sales

PurchasingPurchasing ProductionProductionS&DS&D

Standard Info StructuresStandard Info Structures

tures.

vendor, customer, or material. Organizational elements

is another aggregation option. The data is not only accumulated for each characteristic ata

ach characteristic through the cumulation of ke the

se tools also allow you to group characteristics and key figures together

to suit your needs, resulting in self-defined info structures, which can then be supplied with data via separate update programs.

The individual physical tables in the SAP Information Warehouse are called information strucAll information structures, or info structures for short, have the same structure.

The objects to analyze from the real business world are represented by characteristics in info structures, which are used as a basis for categorizing data. Statistical information is updated and aggregated around characteristics such assuch as purchasing group, material group, valuation area, plant, or storage area can also function as characteristics in information structures.

The time basebut also per period. For each information structure, you can choose a daily, weekly, or monthly daggregation.

Logistics key figures are updated for each combination of characteristics in accordance with the predefined period unit. Key figures are quantitative figures, which convey a concise but meaningfulamount of information. Key figures can be obtained for edata, such as purchase order quantity or production order quantity; however, they can also taform of simple counters, such as 'number of deliveries'.

The SAP R/3 System contains a wide range of standard information structures for different application areas. Easy-to-u


© SAP AG 1999

SAP Business Intelligence

Standard analyses

PROGRAM...

SELECT...

WRITE...

Flexible analyses Self-defined evaluation

Excel...LIL

Quantity

Time

Planning

QuantityTime SAP Business IntelligenceStandard analyses

Large number ofstatistical functionsUnrestricted navigation

Flexible analysesVariable list layoutSelf-defined formulas

Self-defined evaluationsLogical databasesABAP

Logistics InformationLibrary

Key figure classificationRetrieval functions

PlanningDistribution functionsInteractive graphicsForecasting support

Non-SAP productsNative SQLExcel

spectives. They support a large ed

d to suit corporate requirements.

aid of SAP ABAP products, you can perform your own analyses and process

ported by

The Logistics Data Warehouse is open and of course allows you to perform analyses using non-SAP products such as Excel or native SQL.

The Business Intelligence level provides a wide range of methods for online analysis of warehousedata.

Standard analyses enable you to analyze data from a variety of pernumber of statistical functions, allow unlimited navigation, and enable statistical data to be enhancwith background data from the operative systems at OLTP level.

Flexible analyses can be generated via reporting tools and tailoreThey provide a variety of possible layouts, allow you to define your own formulas, and are graphically supported in the same way as the standard analyses.

Furthermore, with theany warehouse information without any problems, since data in the Logistics Data Warehouse is stored transparently.

In addition to the actual data from the operative applications, planned data can also be managed in the Logistics Information System in different versions. The creation of planning data is supspecial tools such as distribution functions, interactive graphical techniques, and proven forecasting methods. You can compare planned data with actual data as part of the standard analyses.


© SAP AG 1999

From Document to Analysis

POVendor: 1000PO date: 05/15/98

10 pc. M-01 @ 1,100 UNI 11,000

10 pc. M-02 @ 1,000 UNI 10,000

Info structurein PurchasingInfo structurein Purchasing

Vendor100010001100

MaterialM-01M-02M-01

Month05/9805/9805/98

Order v.11,00030,00013,000

Material: M-01Month: 05/98

Order value11,00013,000

Vendor10001100

Vendor: 1000Month: 05/98

Order value11,00030,000

MaterialM-01M-02

es of

ombination of the

sed or decreased accordingly. (Example: Vendor 1000, material M-02, month 05/98, old

e

The different analyses can generate lists for all kinds of characteristics combinations using data stored in the info structures.

When a document is posted - as shown here in the example of a purchase order - the key figurthe info structures for the corresponding characteristics combinations are updated.

If no data record exists in the information structure for the characteristics cdocument, a new record is generated and the characteristics and key figures are entered (Example: Vendor 1000, material M-01, month 05/98, purchase order value 11,000).

If the characteristics combination already exists in the info structure, the key figures in the data roware increapurchase order value 20,000 + purchase order value document 10,000 = new purchase order valu30,000).


© SAP AG 1999

Accessing the Logistics Information System

Info System

Link to the application level infosystems in Logistics

Groups of key figures (e.g. purchasingvalues) are listed for the maincharacteristics

Logistics Controlling

Link to the application level info systemsin Logistics

Characteristics and key figures aregrouped by topic in analyses (e.g. materialanalysis)

Info Library

Search for key figures according tovarious subroutines

Search via text

Search via characteristics

Search via info set

Application Level ->Info System

A direct link to the correspondingLogistics Information System is possiblefrom the different application levels (e.g.Purchasing)

Th

- the menu option Information Systems. Here,

- n areas of the Logistics Information System

- vided the application levels. It is, for example, possible to call up the Purchasing Information ystem directly from Purchasing or to call up the Sales Information System from Sales.

e R/3 System offers various possibilities for accessing the Logistics Information System:

- All key figures are managed in the Info Library and can be found using different kinds of searchroutines. If a search was successful, a standard analysis can be executed for a key figure.

Logistics application levels can be accessed usinggroups of key figures (e.g. purchasing values, frequencies) for the main characteristics of an application level are listed in standard analyses.

It is also possible to call up the different applicatiovia Logistics Controlling. Here, characteristics and key figures are grouped by topic in standardanalyses (e.g. material analysis, vendor analysis).

A fourth possibility of calling up the corresponding Logistics Information Systems is proinS


© SAP AG 1999

Data Warehouse Concepts: Summary

Explain how modern data warehouse productsensure availability of information

Define SAP terminology and data warehouseconceptsIdentify the difference between document-independent data and document-specificapplication information



Exercise Data

Symbols Used in the Exercises and Solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Unit Objectives

Business Scenario

Tips & Tricks

Warning or Caution

Data in the Exercises Type of Data Data in Training System Vendors 1000 to 1045 (increments of 5) Purchasing organization 1000 Purchasing group 0-20) 0## (0Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sold-to party 6300-## (00-20) Ship-to party 6300-## (00-20) Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 10 Division 00 for ordering, 07 for reporting Shipping point 1200 Customer statistics group 1 Materials M

DP-## (00 to 20) C1002 to DPC1021

Material statistics group 1

to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

There are 2 sets of exercises for some units. The first set is applicable to the Purchasing Information System. The second set is applicable to the Sales Information System. Choose the exercises that most closely relate

* Exercises marked with a * (asterisk) are additional optional exercises based on the contents of the course.

Exercises

Topic: Basic Concepts and Terminology

Unit: Data Warehouse Concepts

• Identify the difference between document-independent data and document-specific application information.

ng across the enterprise, management has

at m vendors and resell to your customers. Management

would like to track all activities for these products - sales, orders, and goods receipts.

Your organization is implementing all R/3 Logistics modules. In order to have consistent reportirequested that the same set of data warehouse reporting tools be used for all logistics analyses.

Your organization has many resale products, in other words products thyou purchase fro

oose the exercises that most closely relate to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

1-1 e Purchasing Information System URCHIS), check the total value of purchase orders for material M-## in plant

, purchased in the last two months.

There are 2 sets of exercises for this unit. The first set applies to the Purchasing Information System, the second to the Sales Information System. Ch

Using the standard analysis tool within th(P1000

Use the standard analysis for materials.

1-1-1 Record the value, if any.



1-2

1-2-1 der with the following data: Vendor 1000, purchasing organization IDES Germany, a purchasing group of your choice, material M-## and plant 1000.

In order to satisfy future demands, you need to place a purchase order with your vendor.

Use the order type standard purchase order. Create a purchase or

IDES AG Lyoner Stern 231, Frankfurt 60441

06227-1234-0 FAX 06227-1234-999

Purchase Order Order number: 45XXXXXX Vendor: 1000

Terms: 14 Days 3%, Net 30Purchasing organization: IDES Germany Purchasing group: any Requested delivery date: One week from today Item Material Short text Qty Delivery date Net price Plant 10 M-## 10 1000

1-2-2 Save the purchase order and record the purchase order number below:

Using the standar1-3 d analysis tool within the Purchasing Information System

1-3-1 What are the key figures that are automatically displayed?

(PURCHIS), check whether material M-## in plant 1000 has been purchased in the last two months.

1-3-2 Read the online documentation for these key figures.

1-3-3 How can you display all key figures for this material?

1-3-4 What is the technical name of this info structure?










Choose the exercises that most closely relate to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

2-1 Using the standard analysis tool within the Sales Information System (SIS), check the total value of incoming orders for customer 6300-## over the last two months.

There are 2 sets of exercises for this unit. This second set applies to the Sales Information System.

Use the standard analysis for customers.

2-1-1 Record the incoming orders value, if any.


2-2

2-2-1 organization 1000, distribution channel 10, division 00, customer number/sold-to party 6300-##, order number 1234-##, and material number M-01.

The following is a purchase order you have RECEIVED from your customer:

Enter this information as a SALES ORDER. Use order type OR, sales

High Tech Industries AG

Walldorf, DE 06227-1234-0

FAX 06227- 1234-999 Purchase Order

Order number: 1234-## Term D et 30 s: 14 ays 3%, N Request y date: ed deliver One week Item Material Short text Qty Net price Net value 10 M-01 Sunny Sunny 01 10

2-2-2 Save the sales order and record the sales order number below:

2-3 Using the standard analysis tool within the Sales Information System (SIS), check the sales for customer 6300-##.

You will need to change the defaulted division to 07.

2-3-1 What are the key figures that are automatically displayed?


2-3-2 Read the online documentation for these key figures.

2-3-3 How can you display all key figures for this customer?

2-3-4 What is the technical name of this info structure?


Exercise Data

Symbols Used in the Exercises and Solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Unit Objectives

Business Scenario

Tips & Tricks

Warning or Caution

Data in the Exercises Type of Data Data in Training System Vendors 1000 to 1045 (increments of 5) Purchasing organization 1000 Purchasing group 0-20) 0## (0Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 Sold-to party 6300-## (00-20) Ship-to party 6300-## (00-20) Sales organization 1000 Distribution channel 10 Division 00 for ordering, 07 for reporting Shipping point 1200 Customer statistics group 1 Materials

C1002 to DPC1021 M-## (00 to 20) DP

Material statistics group 1


hoose the exercises that most closely relate to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

Exercises marked with a * (asterisk) are additional optional exercises based on the contents of the course.

There are 2 sets of exercises for some units. The first set is applicable to the Purchasing Information System. The second set is applicable to the Sales Information System. C

*


Solutions










1-2 e Purchasing Information System , check the total value of purchase orders for material M-## in plant

, purchased in the last two months.


Using the standard analysis tool within th(PURCHIS)1000

Use the standard analysis for materials.

ng Information System

Enter the material M-##, and plant 1000. The period to analyze should be set to two months by default.

From the first R/3 menu, choose:

Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Purchasi

Standard analyses → Material (double-click)


Execute.

1-1-1

for chosen selection’ will appear if no purchase orders have been created

1-2

1-2-2 lowing data: Vendor 1000, purchasing organization

IDES Germany, a purchasing group of your choice, material M-## and plant 1000.

Record the value, if any.

Record the key figure ‘Order value’. However, the message ‘No data exists

for this material.

In order to satisfy future demands, you need to place a purchase order with your vendor.

Use the order type standard purchase order. Create a purchase order with the fol

IDES AG Lyoner Stern 231, Frankfurt 60441

06227-12 234-999 34-0 FAX 06227-1

Purchase Order

Order number: 45XXXXXX Vendor: 1000

Terms: 14 Days 3%, Net 30Purchasing organiza IDEStion: Germany Purchasing group: any

Requested a One week fromdelivery d te: today Item Material Short text Qty Delivery date Net price Plant 10 M-## 1000 10

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing

Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

the following data in the PO:

tab in the header of the

ermany.

2. Any purchasing group

Choose the purchase order type Standard PO.

You now need to enter

Vendor number 1000

Header (you may have to choose the Org. data purchase order document):

1. Purchasing org. IDES G


Item overview:

1. Material M-##.

2. A quantity of 10 for the material

3. Requested delivery date: one week from today

if there is none defaulted.

1-2-2 Save the purchase order and record the purchase order number

The order number will be generated automatically by the system

1-3 analysis tool within the Purchasing Information System l M-## in plant 1000 has been purchased in the

ng Information System

alyze should be set to two months by

1-3-1

ty. 1-3-3

The full entation.

1-3-3

ey figures available

1-3-4 e?

ield within the standard analysis.

or

�Selection log

012.

4. Enter a price,

5. Plant 1000.

6. Save the purchase order.

below:

when you save the purchase order.

Using the standard(PURCHIS), check whether materiapast two months.


Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Purchasi


Enter the material M-##. The period to andefault.

Execute. What are the key figures that are automatically displayed?

Order value, order quantity, and goods receipt quanti

Read the online documentation for these key figures.

Place the cursor on the key figure description and click F1.description and usage is detailed in the online documHow can you display all key figures for this material?

Double-clicking on any key figure will display all the kin this information structure. What is the technical name of this info structur

Select any f

Click F1.


Extras

S











2-2 Using the standard analysis tool within the Sales Information System (SIS), check the total value of incoming orders for customer 6300-## over the last two months.



alyze should be set to two months by default. Execute.


Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Sales Information System


Enter the customer 6300-##. The period to an


2-1-2

ming orders’. However, the message ‘No data ear if no sales orders have been

2-2

2-2-1 organization 1000, distribution channel 10, division 00, customer number/sold-to party 6300-##, order number 1234-##, and material number M-01.

Record the incoming orders value, if any.

Record the key figure ‘Incoexists for chosen selection’ will appcreated for this customer.

The following is a purchase order you have RECEIVED from your customer:

Enter this information as a SALES ORDER. Use order type OR, sales

High AG Tech Industries

Walldorf, DE 06227-1234-0

FAX 06227-1234-999 Purchase Order

O Term Net rder number: 1234-## s: 14 Days 3%, 30 Reques ry dateted delive : One week Item Material Short text Qty Net price Net value 10 M- 01 Sunny Sunny 01 10

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create

g:

00

rder number 1234-## (use your group number)

M-01.

he quantity for the material.

ial pricing condition tables.

2-2-2 Sav

The sales order number will be generated automatically by the system when you save the sales order.

Enter a standard order (OR).

The only data you need to enter from this PO is the followin

Sales organization 1000

Distribution channel 10

Division

[Enter]

Sold-to party (6300-##)

O

All items:

Material

T

efault automatically from the customer master, the materAll other data will dmaster, and the

Save the order. e the sales order and record the sales order number below:

2-3 Using the standard analysis tool within the Sales Information System (SIS), check the er 6300-##. sales for custom

You will need to change the defaulted division to 07.

rmation System

le-click).

faulted division to 07.

2-3-1

2-3-2

Place the cursor on the key figure description and click F1. The full ntation.

2-3-3

ey figures available

2-3-4 e?

ield within the standard analysis.

or

�Selection log

S001.



Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Sales Info

Standard analyses → Customer (doub

Change the de

Execute.

What are the key figures that are automatically displayed?

Incoming orders, Sales, Credit memos. This may vary, depending on the screen resolution.

Read the online documentation for these key figures.

description and usage is detailed in the online docume

How can you display all key figures for this customer?

Double-clicking on any key figure will display all the kin this information structure. What is the technical name of this info structur

Select any f

Click F1.


Extras



© SAP AG 1999

Standard Analyses in LIS

Functionality of standard analyses

Selection options

Navigation in standard analysis lists

Statistical functions

User settings

Customizing settings for standard analyses

Contents:


© SAP AG 1999

Access, execute, and navigate standard analysislistsUse variants when selectingDefine default settings and statistical functions


Standard Analyses in LIS: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Standard Analyses in LIS: Business Scenario

Your company has decided to analyze therelationships with other firms, specifically vendorsand customers.


© SAP AG 1999

Value selection

Single value selection and ranges

Complex selection

Multiple selection

Selection using self-defined hierarchies

Selection options

Variants

Data Selection

e s

Variants allow you to save a wide range of entries in the selection screen and can be called again whenever required.

The selection screen of the standard analyses offers several options for selecting the characteristicvalues that are used in the analysis.

Apart from single-value selection and selection using value ranges, you can also define complex default values with the exception of single values or ranges of values. Moreover, you can determinseveral characteristic values for the analysis using the matchcode search or self-defined hierarchie


© SAP AG 1999

Chars

Per. to analyze

Pur. organizationMaterialPlant

toto

to

Month to

Material Analysis: Selection

Multiple Selection

Multiple selection ...

Single vals Ranges Single vals Ranges

Multiple selectionAll possibilities of the matchcode search are

available for multiple selection.The choice of matchcodes depends on thechosen characteristic in the selectionscreen. Associated characteristic values canbe selected and copied.

M-01

MaterialMaterial

M-02M-03M-04M-05M-06

001

Mat. Gr.Mat. Gr.

001001001001001

1000

SalesOrg.SalesOrg.

10001000100020002000

Data transferto selection screen

Value Selection

es.

, depending on the selected characteristic. (Example: All materials with material

values allows you to exclude certain characteristic values from this range after entering a range of values. The characteristic values to be excluded can also be defined using single values or ranges.

You can enter a single value or a range of values in every selection screen of the standard analys

Using the 'multiple selection' function, you can also carry out a multiple selection or a complex selection.

For multiple selection, various matchcodes are available for selecting characteristic values with specific attributestype raw material). You can select the result of the matchcode search in a list and copy it into the selection screen.

The complex selection of characteristic


© SAP AG 1999

Advantages of variants:

Simplification of data entry whencarrying out repeated analyses.

You can predefine fixed defaultvalues for the selection ofcharacteristics.

You can enter values in theselection criteria using tablevariables and function modules.

Support for scheduling standardanalyses using selection versions.

Variants

CharacteristicsPlantMRP controllerMaterial

Period to analyzeMonth

Material Analysis: Selection

M-010011000

06.1998

Material Analysis: SelectionMaterial Analysis: Selection

CharacteristicsPlantMRP controllerMaterial

Period to analyzeMonth

A*

Material analysis: selectionChars

Per. to analyze

Pur. organizationMaterialPlant

toto

to

Month to

M-101000

M-201200

11/1998 10/1999

Goto

Save as variant

Get

DeleteDisplay

...Variants...

ntered into the selection screen (see multiple

d to

u to schedule standard analyses in the background. When standard analyses ria, which are

Note that variants are always stored with reference to the analysis.

You can save the values entered into the selection screen by using variants. This is particularly important when a great amount of data has been eselection) and will be required again later on. You can considerably reduce the effort requireenter data when carrying out repeated analyses.

By using variants, you can fix default values which will be made available for many users. Depending on the variant, all analyses thus refer to the same selection contents for all users.

You can also enter values into the selection criteria by using table variables or function modules. Asa result, it is possible to copy user-specific characteristic values into the selection screens.

Variants also enable yoare scheduled using selection versions, the analysis is restricted by selection critedefined with variants.


© SAP AG 1999

You have three options for navigating in the

standard analysis list:

Standard drilldown

Drill down by

Switch drilldown

Navigation in Standard Analysis Lists

al

a

eristic.

Switch drilldown: The whole drilldown can by displayed for another characteristic.

After executing a standard analysis, an initial list is displayed on the screen. Starting from this initistandard analysis list, the system offers three possibilities for navigation.

Standard drilldown: By double-clicking on a characteristic you will access the next level of predefined standard drilldown.

Drilldown by: You can drill down each characteristic according to a different charact


© SAP AG 1999

Standard drilldown

Material

Vendor

Month Material: M-01Vendor Order val. Invoiced

amount60,00040,000

50,00040,000

BrownBauer

Material analysisMaterial Order val. Invoiced

amount100,000200,000

90,000195,000

•

M-01M-02 •

Vendor: BrownMaterial Order val. Invoiced

amount20,00025,000

20,00025,000 •

02/199803/1998 •

Double-click

Double-click

Standard Drilldown

ldown,

standard drilldown will always be displayed. By double-clicking on a characteristic, you can drill down this characteristic to the next characteristic. The result will be displayed in a new list.

Each standard analysis has a specific standard drilldown.

This standard drilldown can have global and user-specific settings. In order to define this drilyou can use all characteristics and the period unit of the relevant info structure.

When you call up a standard analysis, the top level of the


© SAP AG 1999

Drill down byPur. organizationVendor

Material groupMaterial

PlantMonth

Plant Order val. Invoicedamount

60,00040,000

50,00040,000

10002000

Material: M-01


amount100,000200,000

90,000195,000 •

M-01M-02 •

Drill Down By

y characteristic value in this list according to a different characteristic. Therefore, you analyze the key figure values of this characteristic value further according to a different characteristic.

Starting from any list in a standard analysis, you can drill down an


© SAP AG 1999

Switch drilldownPur. organizationVendor

Material groupMaterial

PlantMonth


amountTotalM-01M-02M-03 •

800,000100,00050,000

200,000

750,000100,000

50,000195,000

•

Material analysisPlant Order val. Invoiced

amountTotal10002000

800,000500,000300,000

750,000450,000300,000

Switch drilldown...

Switch Drilldown

e total values of all key figures can be drilled down by any possible characteristic of the standard analysis. You can do this by changing the current drilldown using the function 'Switch drilldown'.

From any list in a standard analysis, th


© SAP AG 1999

StrategyTotal order valueNo. of vendors %

Order value %Vendor %

Order valueVendors

A SegmentB SegmentC Segment

125,00040,00030,000

Cum. ordervalue

VendorA B C

OverviewVendors Order value

1030

120

47114712

•

25,00020,000

•

A Segment ListVendor Order value

ABC Analysis

an either be displayed n graphic form.

You can choose between a list or a graphic for illustrating the ABC analysis.

In the ABC analysis, the values of a characteristic (e.g. vendors) and a particular key figure (e.g. order value) are compared in order to make a classification in three segments.

Various strategies can be used to set the class limits as characteristic or key figure-specific and as percentage or absolute values respectively.

The results are displayed in a cumulative frequency curve with an additional classification into three segments. The sizes of the segments correspond to the setting made when the strategy was selected.

The characteristics and key figures assigned to the individual segment levels cas an absolute value for each segment, cumulated for all segments in lists, or i


© SAP AG 1999

EditMaterial analysisVendor Order value Invoiced

amount

30,00070,000

50,00040,000

Vendor 1Vendor 2

.....Comparisons.....

.....

Edit

Planned/actualPrevious/currentTwo key figures

Planned/actual comparison: Order value

Vendor Planned Actual Difference %Vendor 1Vendor 2

40,00050,000

30,00070,000

- 10,00020,000

25 %40 %

-+.. Comparison with previous year: Order value

Vendor Prev. yr. Current Difference %

..

Vendor 1Vendor 2

50,00050,000

30,00070,000

- 20,00020,000

40 %40 %

-+.. .. .. ..Comparison key figure: Order value - Invoiced amount

Vendor Order value Inv. amt. Difference %

. . . . .Vendor 1Vendor 2

30,00070,000

20,00070,000

- 10,0000,000

33 %0 %

-

Comparisons

version.

.

The data compared is always listed in separate windows. You can analyze the listed characteristics even more precisely by drilling further down by other characteristics.

At each drilldown level, there are three possibilities to carry out comparisons:

The current data of a key figure can be compared to the data of a plan

The values of the previous year can be compared to the current data

The values of any two key figures can be compared to each other.


© SAP AG 1999

General INVCO AnalysisPlant GR

quantityValuatedquantity

10002000 •

5025•

10050

Customer analysis Becker AGMaterial Order

quantityIncomingorders

M-01M-02 •

100,000200,000 •

1013

Goto Other info structureFrom general to specific

From Sales to INVCO

From month to day

Advantages:Good response time

Automatic transfer ofselection parameters

Unrestricted navigation in LIS

Goto.....Info structure.....

.....

Goto Other Info Structure

med a drilldown by characteristic value or

o

e material analysis in purchasing and analyze the materials for this vendor. Note: Since the

les the

ks and

y, for example) to a detailed information structure with a smaller period unit, the selected

periods are converted. For example: January 2000 - April 2000 becomes January 1, 2000 - April 30, 2000.

It is possible to call up one standard analysis from another standard analysis.

This function transfers the selection parameters from the analysis you are already viewing to the analysis you are calling up. If you have already perforpositioned your cursor on a characteristic value of the calling analysis, this characteristic value is transferred to the analysis you have called up.

Example 1: You have created a list for your vendor in a purchasing group analysis in purchasing. You are interested in materials for this vendor. The Goto -> Other info struct. function allows you tcall up thpurchasing group is not available as a characteristic in this analysis, it is ignored in the material analysis

Example 2: You have performed a drilldown by customer for the sales organization 1000 in Saand Distribution and drilled down the customer Becker AG by materials. You are interested instocks for a material. The Goto -> Other info struct. function allows you to go to the material analysis in inventory controlling where you will be provided with information on stocmovements for the material. Since the materials analysis in INVCO does not contain any data relating to sales organizations and customers, both characteristic values are ignored.

Example 3: If you switch from a highly-aggregated information structure (one that is updated monthl


© SAP AG 1999

Material analysisMaterial Order value Invoiced

amount

60,00040,000

50,00040,000

M-01M-02

Materialand vendormaster data

Materialand vendormaster data

...Extras.....

Master data

..... Doc.information

1

2

PO

1

2

PO

1

2

PO

Master Data and Documents

ious standard

The relevant master data depends on the characteristics that can be selected in the analysis (For example: Material analysis in purchasing -> Material and vendor master).

Using list displays, you can call up the relevant master data and documents from the varanalyses in the Logistics Information System.

The selection parameters of the calling analysis are transferred to the relevant reports.

You can call up certain resident documents depending on the data basis in the relevant info structure. (For example: Material analysis in purchasing -> Order documents)


© SAP AG 1999

Standard drilldown1

Preselection of key figures

Default selection period

2

3

4

Initial graphic yes / noDrilldown log in page headerWidth of char./key figure columnDisplay characteristic as text/number

User-specific settings per analysis:User-specific settings per analysis:

List parameters

Default Settings

,

Afterwards, you can still change the selection of key figures and the design of the list layout in the standard analysis.

In every standard analysis, you can make default settings which are valid for every user. In additionthese default settings can be covered by user-specific settings.

You can make default settings for the standard drilldown, a preselection of key figures, the default value of the selection period, and various list parameters in order to design the list layout.


© SAP AG 1999

Access, execute, and navigate standard analysislistsUse variants when selectingDefine default settings and statistical functions


Standard Analyses in LIS: Summary


Exercises

Standard Analyses in LIS

Topic: Navigating in Standard Analysis

Unit: Standard Analyses in LIS

standard analysis lists.

Define default settings and statistical functions

• Access, execute, and navigate

• Use variants when selecting

•

pany has decided to analyze the relationships with other firms, pecifically vendors and customers.

Your coms



asing department would like to analyze the purchasing data in order to determine the vendors with which your company does the most business.

1-1 ard analysis in the Purchasing Information System, create a list of vendors with whom you have done

n

The purch

Using the vendor stand business for the past six months,

g this month. includi

nding on the menu path you choose. For these exercises, use a menu path from the Logistics menu, not from the Information Systems menu.

Note the default key figures may vary, depe


1-1-1 To see which vendors you are ordering from the most, sort the list in descending order based on the key figure Order value.


1-1-2 Change the characteristic display to include the key and the description.

more information.

You may want to change the column width for the characteristic to see

1-1-5 Return to the vendor level of the analysis. What do you notice about the display?

1-1-3 You are interested in seeing which materials were ordered from your top vendor. Using the standard drilldown path, drill down to the materials for the first vendor in the list.

1-1-4 Change the analysis currency to USD. Use exchange rate type M and the current conversion date.

-1-6 You want to perform a new analysis. Cancel the sort order at the vendor

1-1-7 oiced amount. Display only these 10 vendors.

1-1-8

1-1-9 In o ou have been with your top vendor during the past six months, drill down to month for the first vendor on the list. To do this, do not use the standard drilldown path, but go directly to the month.

1level.

Now you are interested in seeing only the top 10 vendors based on the key figure inv

You want to see what percentage of your business is conducted with these vendors. Change the value display to "percent".

rder to see how consistent y


1-1-10 terials you ordered from this vendor in tead of

he month

1-1-11 e the number of purchase order items for the material you material. Look for the

1-1-12 You have decided you want to see the number of purchase order items for

1-1-13 at are the two ways to return list.

You now are interested in which mathe highest order month. To do this, go directly to the "material" insusing the standard drilldown path. Drill down to the materials for twith the highest percent of total order value.

You want to sehave ordered most. Display all the key figures for that key figure PO items.

all the materials displayed. Therefore, you want to add this key figure toyour list.

Return to the vendor level of the analysis. Whto this level? Note: You will lose the key figure you added to your

1-2 To continue your analysis of your top vendors, you will use some of the graphics tools within standard analysis.

To make the graphics more informative, also change the value display back from "percent" to "absolute".

er value (%)" strategy.

.

r value.

3. Look at the list of the vendors that comprise the top 70% of your purchases (the A segment).

Also, change the characteristic display back to description only. This will affect the text on the graphic.

Change the standard analysis list to display a single analysis currency. You can choose the currency.

1-2-1 You want to perform an ABC analysis, displaying how many vendors make up the top 70% of what you buy, the next 20%, and the last 10%. Use the "Order value" key figure for this analysis. Use the "Total ord

1. The graphic displays the number of vendors associated with that proportion of order value

2. Display the overview of this analysis (overview of segments). See how many vendors make up each segment of your orde


1-2-2 You want to see if there is a relationship between the value of the purchase

Your list should include the key figure PO items for this analysis.

e

1. 3 classes

2. Upper limits of order value: choose new defaults.

1-3 uantity of orders and the quantity of invoices from your top vendor.

or, drill down to the material level.

Choose Order quantity and Invoiced quantity for your key figures comparison and graphic.

orders you place with your vendors and the number of items. You will use dual classification for this analysis.

The initial display uses certain default values for the class limits. Change thclass limits to the following:

3. Upper limits of order items: choose new defaults.

From the graphic, display the overview of the segments.

Continuing your vendor analysis, you want to see the relationship between the q

1-3-1 Execute again, a Top 10 analysis of your list of vendors. Starting from yourfirst vend

To see the graphics a little easier, maximize the display.

1-3-2 however, interested in seeing the data in a pie chart format.

2D

an go to the 2D view

W you selected. To see both key figures, go to the group view.

1-3-4 To see both the 3D bar chart and the 2D pie charts, you can display an overview of your graphics.

When you are finished, use the green or yellow arrow to return to standard analysis. Return to the vendor level of your analysis.

SAP Business Graphics display a 3D bar chart by default. You are,

1. Before you display the pie chart, you must select Pie chart from theoptions list.

2. Once you have applied the pie chart option, you coption from the Goto menu.

1-3-3 ith the 2D view, the system defaults to a graphic for the first key figure

1-4 Now tha rmation for your top vendor, you want to see the docum ation.

1-4-1 U the vendor’s address.

1-4-2 Using the top vendor, describe how to display the documents for a vendor, d

1-5 Execute a standard analysis for the Material, create a list of materials for the materials used in this class: M-01 through M-20. Also include materials P-100 and

. Analyze the activities of the past three months, including the current month.

S

1-5-2 Return to the main PURCHIS menu. Execute the analysis again, using the variant.

You would now like to define your own default settings for the Vendor analysis.

YM

1-6-2 In addition to the default key figures, you also require the key figure PO items. All key figures should be displayed without decimal places.

N ur choice). The characteristic key and description should be displayed. You, therefore, need a characteristic column width of 30.

t you have analyzed the summarized infoents that contain this inform

sing the top vendor, describe how to go directly to

irectly from standard analysis.

P-105

1-5-1 ince you regularly use these selections, save these settings as a variant.

1-6

1-6-1 ou would like a drilldown in the order Vendor, Material Group, aterial, and Month.

1-6-3 ormally you view six months of data in a specific currency (of yo

a different analysis, they must be defined for that individual analysis.

If all users require these settings, you can define these in Customizing.

User settings only apply to this analysis. If these settings are required for



Unit: Standard Analyses in LIS Topic: Navigating in Standard Analysis

and navigate standard analysis lists.


• Access, execute,

• Define default settings and statistical functions

pany has decided to analyze the relationships with other firms, pecifically vendors and customers.

Your coms

here are groups of exercises for this unit. This second set applies to the ales Information System.

hoose the exercises that most closely relate to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

TS

C

he most business.

2-1 sing the customer standard analysis in the Sales Information System, create a list

The sales department would like to analyze the sales data in order to determine the customers with which your company does t

Uof customers with whom you have done business for the past six months, including this month.

choose. For these exercises, use a menu path from the Logistics menu, not from the Information Systems menu.

2-1-1 To see which customers you are ordering from the most, sort the list in descending order based on the key figure Incoming orders.

Note the default key figures may vary, depending on the menu path you


2-1-2 Change the characteristic display to include the key and the description.

more information.

You may want to change the column width for the characteristic to see

-1-4 Change the analysis currency to USD. Use exchange rate type M and the

2-1-5 rn to the customer level of the analysis. What do you notice about the display?

2-1-3 You want to know which materials were ordered by your top customer. Using the standard drilldown path, drill down to the materials for the first customer in the list.

2current conversion date.

Retu

2-1-6 You want to perform a new analysis. Cancel the sort order at the customer level.

2-1-7 Now you are interested in seeing only the top 10 customers based on the key figure Incoming orders. Display only these 10 customers.

2-1-8 You want to see what percentage of your business is conducted with these customers. Change the value display to "percent".

2-1-9 In order to see how consistent you have been with your top customer during the past six months, drill down to month for the first customer on the list. To do this, do not use the standard drilldown path, but go directly to the month.


2-1-10 You are now interested in which materials this customer ordered in the m al" i for t f total incoming orders.

2-1-11 Y e c ures for that material. Look for the key figure Invoiced quantity.

2-1-12

ng key figures, since the screen width may be

2-1-13 retu added to your

onth with the highest order value. To do this, go directly to the "materinstead of using the standard drilldown path. Drill down to the materials he month with the highest percent o

ou want to see the invoiced quantity for the material ordered most by thustomer. Display all the key fig

You have decided you want to see the invoiced quantity for all the materialsdisplayed. Therefore, you want to add this key figure to your list. You may need to deselect existiinsufficient to display all required key figures.

Return to the sold-to-party level of the analysis. What are the two ways to rn to this level? Note: You will lose the key figure you

list.


2-2 s To continue your analysis of top customers, you will use some of the graphics toolwithin standard analysis.

To make the graphics more informative, also change the value display back from "percent" to "absolute".

Also, change the characteristic display back to key only.

cy.

2-2-1 k

the lysis. Use the "Total incoming orders" (%) strategy.

1 associated with that proportion of incoming orders.

2. Display the overview of this analysis (overview of segments). See how many customers make up each segment of your sales.

You want to see if there is a relationship between the incoming orders value

its. Change the class limits to the following:

1. 3 classes

2. Upper limits of incoming orders: choose new defaults.

3. Upper limits of order items: choose new defaults.

From the graphic, display the overview of the segments.

Change the standard analysis list to display a single analysis currenYou can choose the currency.

You want to perform an ABC analysis, displaying how many customers ma e up the top 70% of what you sell, the next 20% and the last 10%. Use

Incoming orders key figure for this ana

. The graphic displays the number of customers that are

3. Look at the list of the customers that comprise the top 70% of your sales (the A segment).

2-2-2 and the number of order items from your customers. You will use dual classification for this analysis.

Your list should include the key figure Order items for this analysis.

The initial display uses certain default values for the class lim


2-3

Execute again a Top 10 analysis of your list of customers. From your first customer, drill down to material level.

2-3-2 SAP Business Graphics display a 3D bar chart by default. You are, however, interested in seeing the data in a 2D bar chart format.

D

Continuing your customer analysis, you want to see the relationship between the value of orders and the value of invoices from your top customers.

2-3-1

For your graphic, select Incoming orders and Sales.

1. Before you display the bar chart, you must select bar chart from the 2options list.

2. Once you have applied the "Horizontal bars" option, you can go to the 2D view option from the Goto menu.

ure

When you are finished, use the green or yellow arrow to return to standard analysis. Return to the customer level of your analysis.


2-3-3 With the 2D view, the system defaults to a graphic for the first key figyou selected. To see both key figures, go to the group view.

2-3-4 To see both the 3D vertical bar chart and 2D horizontal bar chart, you can display an overview of your graphics.


2-4 Now that you have analyzed the summarized information for your top customyou want to see the documents that contain this information.

2-4-1 U o directly to the customer’s a

Using the top customc t

2-5 Execute a standard analysis for the material; create a list of materials for those materials used in this class: M-01 to M-20. Also include materials P-100 and P-

. Analyze the activities of the past three months, including the current month.

S

2-5-2 Return to the main SIS menu. Execute the analysis again, using the variant.

woanalysis

2-6-1 Yo , Sold-to party, Material and Month.

In addition to the default key figures, you also require the key figure Order items. All key figures should be displayed without decimal places.

N ou view six months of data in a specific currency (of your choice). The characteristic key and description should be displayed. You,

er,

sing the top customer, describe how to gddress.

2-4-2 er, describe how to display the transactions for a us omer, directly from standard analysis.

105

2-5-1 ince you regularly use these selections, save these settings as a variant.

2-6 You uld now like to define your own default settings for the sales employee .

ou would like a drilldown in the order Sales representative, Sales rganization

2-6-2

2-6-3 ormally y

therefore, need a characteristic column width of 30.

User settings only apply to this analysis. If these settings are requira different ana

in Customizing.

ed for lysis, they must be defined for that individual analysis.

If all users require these settings, you can define these


Solutions Unit: Standard Analyses in LIS

sis Topic: Navigating in Standard Analy

• Access, execute, and navigate standard analysis lists

Use variants when selecting

•


ationships with other firms,

Your company has decided to analyze the relspecifically vendors and customers.

s for this unit. The first set applies to the em, the second to the Sales Information

There are 2 sets of exercisePurchasing Information SystSystem. Choose the exercises that most closely relate to your business function. Do not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

bu

1-1 Using the vendor standard analysis in list of vendors with whom you have done business for the past six months, includi

Logisti gistics Controlling → Purchasing Information System → Standa r (double-click) Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Reporting → Purchasing Information System → Standard analyses → Vendor (double-click) Information Systems → Logistics → Purchasing → Vendor → Purchasing values Leave the selection criteria for the characteristics blank. This will ensure you select all values. Enter a period range to include the past six months. Execute.

The purchasing department would like to analyze the purchasing data in order to determine the vendors with which your company does the most

siness.

the Purchasing Information System, create a

ng this month. There are various ways of calling up the standard analyses.

cs → Lord analyses → Vendo


n the menu path you se exercises, use a menu path from the Logistics menu,

ion Systems menu.

1-1-1 most, sort the list in re Order value.

1-1-2 c display to include the key and the description.

Note the default key figures may vary, depending ochoose. For thenot from the Informat

To see which vendors you are ordering from the descending order based on the key figu

Click once on the key figure "Order value".

View → Sort in descending order Change the characteristi

of 30. 1-1-3 p

dard drilldown path, drill down to the materials for

1-1-4 e analysis currency to USD. Use exchange rate type M and the

1-1-5

s the original currency. Changing the settings

in est level before drilling

en returning to the upper level. 1-1-6 You want to perform a new analysis. Cancel the sort order at the vendor

level.

View → Cancel sort

You may want to change the column width for the characteristic to see more information.

Settings → Characteristic display → Key and description

Settings Column width Characteristic

Alternative possibility: Double-click the column heading.

Enter a column width

→ →

You are interested in seeing which materials were ordered from your tovendor. Using the stanthe first vendor in the list.

Double-click the first vendor. Change thcurrent conversion date.

Settings → Currency → Analysis currency Return to the vendor level of the analysis. What do you notice about the display?

1. The analysis currency ionly affects the level you are working on and below. It does not change for the higher levels. Therefore, to have consistent settings your analysis, make the settings at the highdown.

2. The sort by order value is still active wh


1-1-7 Now you are interested in seeing only the top 10 vendors based on the key f

Click once on the key figure "Invoiced amount".

V

E1-1-8 Y e

vendors. Change the value display to "percent".

1-1-9 x months, drill down to month for the first vendor on the list. To

nth.

first vendor.

→ Month

1-1-10 ou ordered from this vendor in

ighest percent of total order value.

1-1-11

key

Dohig

1-1-12 to

you

Edi igures

On the right side of the display, O items. Select this field by clicking once on that line. Press the left arrow/choose but .

Choose1-1-13 Ret rn

to this level? Note: You will lose the key figure you added to your list.

1. Use the green arrow to go back two levels.

2. Use the menu path View → Basic list.

igure invoiced amount. Display only these 10 vendors.

iew → Top N

nter the number 10.

ou want to see what percentage of your business is conducted with thes

Settings → Value display → Percent In order to see how consistent you have been with your top vendor during the past sido this, do not use the standard drilldown path, but go directly to the mo

Select the

View → Drill down by

You now are interested in which materials ythe highest order month. To do this, go directly to the "material" instead of using the standard drilldown path. Drill down to the materials for the monthwith the h

View → Drill down by → Material You want to see the number of purchase order items for the material you have ordered most. Display all the key figures for that material. Look for the

figure PO items.

uble-click the value of the PO key figure for the material with the hest order value.

You have decided you want to see the number of purchase order items forall the materials displayed. Therefore, you want to add this key figure

r list.

t → Choose key f

scroll down until you find P

ton The field will move from the right to the left of the display.

[Continue/Enter]. urn to the vendor level of the analysis. What are the two ways to retu


1-2 To continue your analys me of the graphics tools w

is of your top vendors, you will use soithin standard analysis.

ore informative, also change the value display olute".

y. cy.

1-2-1 C analysis, displaying how many vendors make

gure for this analysis. Use the "Total order value (%)"

alysis

, 20%, and 10% (these should be the default

ated with that

iew of segments). See how e.

e graphic. This vendors that

of your purchases (the A segment).

You can either:

1. Select the A segment. Then press Details.

Or

2. Return to the graphic with Initial graphic(s), then press "List: A segment" on the right side of the graphic.

To exit the ABC analysis and return to your vendor list, press the yellow arrow.

To make the graphics mback from "percent" to "abs

Also, change the characteristic display back to description only. This willaffect the text on the graphic.

Change the standard analysis list to display a single analysis currencYou can choose the curren

You want to perform an ABup the top 70% of what you buy, the next 20%, and the last 10%. Use the "Order value" key fistrategy.

Select the "Order value" key figure by clicking once at the top of the column.

Edit → ABC an

Select the strategy Total Order value (%).

%As segment sizes, select 70values).

1. The graphic displays the number of vendors associproportion of order value.

2. Display the overview of this analysis (overvmany vendors make up each segment of your order valu

Click on "Overview of segments" on the right side of thwill display each segment (A, B, and C), the number of comprise each segment, and the total order value in each segment.

3. Look at the list of the vendors that comprise the top 70%


1-2-2 You want to see if there is a relationship between the value of the purchase

n until you find "PO items". Press the left arrow/choose he left of the display.

ation:

Edit → Dual class

S

This graphic shows the number of vendors with whom you have placed orders in a certain value range, with the number of items also within a certain range.

ange the

2. of order value: choose new defaults.

3. ms: choose new defaults.

From ents.

Cli ts" on the right of the graphic.

orders you place with your vendors and the number of items. You will use dual classification for this analysis.

Your list should include the key figure PO items for this analysis.

To add the key figure:

Edit → Choose key figures

On the right side of the display, scroll dowSelect this field by clicking once on that line. button. The field will move from the right to t

Choose [Continue/Enter].

To use dual classific

elect "Order value" and "PO items".

The initial display uses certain default values for the class limits. Chclass limits to the following:

1. 3 classes

Upper limits

Upper limits of order ite

Click Class limits on the right of the graphic. the graphic, display the overview of the segm

ck "Overview of segmen

You can return to the graphic by pressing "Initial graphic(s)". Exit the dual classification analysis by pressing the yellow arrow.


1-3

1-3-1 r list of vendors. Starting from your

unt for your key figures

ose [Enter].

layed.

Continuing your vendor analysis, you want to see the relationship between the quantity of orders and the quantity of invoices from your top vendor.

Execute again, a Top 10 analysis of youfirst vendor, drill down to the material level.

Choose Order quantity and Invoiced amocomparison and graphic.

Click once on the order quantity.

Edit → Comparisons → Two key figures

Select "Invoiced quantity". Cho

The key figure comparison list is disp

Choose [Graphics].

1-3-2 at.

1. Before you display the pie chart, you must select Pie chart from the 2D options list.

Options → 2D options

2. Once you have applied the pie chart option, you can go to the 2D view option from the Goto menu.


1-3-3 With the 2D view, the system defaults to a graphic for the first key figure you selected. To see both key figures, go to the group view.

Goto → Groups view

1-3-4 To see both the 3D bar chart and the 2D pie charts, you can display an overview of your graphics.

Goto → Overview

When you are finished, use the green or yellow arrow to return to standard analysis. Return to the vendor level of your analysis.

ier, maximize the display. To see the graphics a little eas

SAP Business Graphics display a 3D bar chart by default. You are, however, interested in seeing the data in a pie chart form


1-4

he vendor by clicking it once.

aster data, use the green or yellow

r,

rmation → By vendor

s, select the document by double-clicking the relevant

rmation, use the green or yellow arrow nalysis.

Now that you have analyzed the summarized information for your top vendor, you want to see the documents that contain this information.

1-4-1 Using the top vendor, describe how to go directly to the vendor’s address.

Select t

Use the menu path Extras → Master data → Vendor master

Specify purchasing organization 1000.

Once you have displayed the vendor marrow to return to the standard analysis.

1-4-2 Using the top vendor, describe how to display the documents for a vendodirectly from standard analysis.

Select the vendor by clicking it once.

Use the menu path Extras → Document info

Enter "Purchasing organization" 1000 and "Scope of list" BEST (purchase orders). You can select additional criteria if you would like.

Choose [Execute].

When the list appearline. Press Display document (F2), or use the menu path Environment →Display document. Alternatively, double-click the relevant line.

Once you have displayed this infoto return to the standard a


1-5 d

the activities of the past three months, including the current month.

Report mation System → Standard analyses → Material (double

On the selection] arrow for the Material.

In the 00 and P-105.

In the

Copy y

On the

, LO930-##, and description. The remainder of the ground processing and need not be completed

1-5-2 menu. Execute the analysis again, using the

variant will now be displayed.

Execute a standard analysis for the Material, create a list of materials for the materials used in this class: M-01 through M-20. Also include materials P-100 anP-105. Analyze

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order →ing → Purchasing Infor-click)

selection screen, select the [Multiple

single value selections, enter P-1

ranges selection, enter M-01 to M-20.

our entries to the selection options in the initial screen.

initial selection screen, the [Multiple selection] arrow is highlighted.

1-5-1 Since you regularly use these selections, save these settings as a variant.

Goto → Variants → Save as variant

Enter your group nameinformation applies to backfor this exercise.

Save these settings. Return to the main PURCHIS variant.

Goto → Variants → Get

Select your variant name.

The settings defined in the

1-6 You wo ettings for the Vendor analysis.

L gistic rchase Order → Reporting → Vendor (double-click)

Y l Group, M

O

Enter your group name, LO930-##.

Click [Choose characteristics]

On the right side of the display, select "Material group". Press the left a y t

Select "Material group". Choose the field you want to move "Material group" above. Choose [Move] then [Continue].

1-6-2 In addition to the default key figures, you also require the key figure PO items. All key figures should be displayed without decimal places.

C

Click [Choose key figures]

Oarrow/choose button. The field will move to the left side of the display.

Select no decimal places for all key figures. Normally you view six months of data in a specific currency (of your c u, t

Choose [Parameters].

Enter 6 as the number of previous periods. Select [With current period]

Enter your required currency in "Analysis currency".

e a characteristic column width of 30.

uld now like to define your own default s

o s → Materials Management → Purchasing → Pu→ Purchasing Information System → Standard analyses

1-6-1 ou would like a drilldown in the order Vendor, Materiaaterial, and Month.

n the initial screen, choose [User Settings].

rrow/choose button. The field will move from the right side of the displao the left side of the display.

hoose [Key figures].

n the right side of the display, select "PO items". Press the left from the right side of the display

1-6-3 hoice). The characteristic key and description should be displayed. Yoherefore, need a characteristic column width of 30.

Select "Key and description".

Defin

Save these settings.



or be defined for that individual analysis.

User settings only apply to this analysis. If these settings are required fa different analysis, they must


Topic: Navigating in Standard Analysis

Unit: Standard Analyses in LIS

lists • Access, execute, and navigate standard analysis



Your company has decided to analyze the relationships with other firms,

specifically vendors and customers.

s that most closely relate to your business function.

There are 2 sets of exercises for this unit. This second set applies to theSales Information System.

Choose the exerciseDo not attempt both, unless you are familiar with purchasing and sales.

The sales department would like to analyze the sales data in order to determine the customers with which your company does the most

2-1 Using the c ist of custome whom you have done business for the past six months, including this mo

There are various ways of calling up the standard analyses.

analyse ustomer (double-click)

Logisti bution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses → Customer (double-click)

Information Systems → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Customer → Incoming orders

Leave the selection criteria for the characteristics blank. This will ensure you select all values.

business.

ustomer standard analysis in the Sales Information System, create a lrs with

nth.

Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Sales Information System → Standard s → C

cs → Sales and Distri


Enter a

Execut

period range to include the past six months.

e.

ay vary, depending on the menu path you se exercises, use a menu path from the Logistics menu,

ion Systems menu.

2-1-1 ng from the most, sort the list in re Incoming orders.

-1-2 isplay to include the key and the description.

Note the default key figures mchoose. For thenot from the Informat

To see which customers you are orderidescending order based on the key figu

Click once on the key figure "Incoming orders".

View → Sort in descending order 2 Change the characteristic d

Key and description

2-1-3 rd drilldown path, drill down to the materials for the first

customer in the list.

Double-click the first customer. Drill down until you reach the material. 2-1-4 Change the analysis currency to USD. Use exchange rate type M and the

current conversion date.

Settings → Currency → Analysis currency 2-1-5 Return to the customer level of the analysis. What do you notice about the

display?

1. The analysis currency is the original currency. Changing the settings only affects the level you are working on and below. It does not change for the higher levels. Therefore, to have consistent settings in your analysis, make the settings at the highest level before drilling down.

2. The sort by incoming orders is still active when returning to the upper level.

2-1-6 You want to perform a new analysis. Cancel the sort order at the customer level.

View → Cancel sort

You may want to change the column width for the characteristic to seemore information.

Settings → Characteristic display →

Settings → Column width → Characteristic

Alternative possibility: Double-click the column heading.

Enter a column width of 30.

You want to know which materials were ordered by your top customer. Using the standa


2-1-7 the key ustomers.

" key figure by clicking once at the top of the

2-1-8 of your business is conducted with these e display to "percent".

2-1-9 o

onth.

2-1-10 are now interested in which materials this customer ordered in the

go Drill down to the materials for the month with the highest percent of total incoming orders.

2-1-11 aterial which the customer has ordered from you most. Display all the key figures for that material. Look for the key figure Invoiced quantity.

Select the characteristic with the highest incoming orders. Double-click the key figure.

Now you are interested in seeing only the top 10 customers based onfigure Incoming orders. Display only these 10 c

Select the "Incoming orderscolumn.

View → Top N

Enter the number 10. You want to see what percentage customers. Change the valu

Settings → Value display → Percent In order to see how consistent you have been with your top customer duringthe past six months, drill down to month for the first customer on the list. Tdo this, do not use the standard drilldown path, but go directly to the m

Select the first customer.

View → Drill down by → Month You highest order month. To do this, do not use the standard drilldown path, but

directly to the "material".

View Drill down by Material You want to see the invoiced quantity for the m

→ →


2-1-12 You have decided you want to see the invoiced quantity for all the materials d ay ni y figures.

E

Oq icking once on that line. Press the left

Press the right arrow/do not choose button. The field will move e display to the right side of the display.

2-1-13 this level? Note: You will lose the key figure you added to your

1. o steps and cancel the selection of

2.

isplayed. Therefore, you want to add this key figure to your list. You meed to deselect existing key figures, since the screen width may be nsufficient to display all required ke

dit → Choose key figures

n the right side of the display, scroll down until you find "Invoiced uantity". Select this field by cl

arrow/choose button. The field will move from the right to the left of the display.

Choose [Continue/Enter].

If insufficient space, deselect one or more key figures, for example "Open orders", or "Open orders quantity". Select this field by clicking once on that line. from the left side of th

Return to the sold-to-party level of the analysis. What are the two ways to return to list.

Click the green arrow to go back twyour TOP N customers.

View → Cancel ranking list.

Use the menu path View → Basic list.


2-2 To continue your analys ers, you will use some of the graphics tools within

is of top customstandard analysis.

ore informative, also change the value display olute".

2-2-1 C analysis, displaying how many customers t you sell, the next 20% and the last 10%. Use

ing .

king once at the top of the

segments). See how r sales.

f the graphic. This customers that n each

0% of your sales (the A segment).

You can either:

1. Select the A segment. Then press Details.

Or

2. Return to the graphic with Initial graphic(s), then press "List: A segment" on the right side of the graphic.

To exit the ABC analysis and return to your customer list, press the yellow arrow.

To make the graphics mback from "percent" to "abs

Also, change the characteristic display back to key only.

Change the standard analysis list to display a single analysis currency. You can choose the currency.

You want to perform an ABmake up the top 70% of whathe Incoming orders key figure for this analysis. Use the "Total incomorders" (%) strategy

Select the "Incoming orders" key figure by cliccolumn.

Edit → ABC analysis

Select the strategy Total Incoming orders (%).

As segment sizes, select 70%, 20%, and 10% (these should be the default values). 1. The graphic displays the number of customers that are associated with

that proportion of incoming orders.

2. Display the overview of this analysis (overview ofmany customers make up each segment of you

Click on "Overview of segments" on the right side owill display each segment (A, B, and C), the number of comprise each segment, and the total incoming orders isegment.

3. Look at the list of the customers that comprise the top 7


2-2-2 You want to see if there is a relationship between the incoming orders value

or this analysis.

croll down until you find "Order items". on that line. Press the left arrow/choose

the left of the display.

nter].

To use dual classification:

E

Select "Incoming orders" and "Order items".

This graphic shows the number of customers from whom you have items

clas following:

1.

3. ults.

Cli n the right of the graphic. From the graphic, display the overview of the segments.

C .

You can return to the graphic by pressing "Initial graphic(s)". Exit the dual classification analysis by pressing the yellow arrow.

and the number of order items from your customers. You will use dual classification for this analysis.

Your list should include the key figure Order items f

To add the key figure:

Edit → Choose key figures

On the right side of the display, sSelect this field by clicking once button. The field will move from the right to

Choose [Continue/E

dit → Dual class

received orders in a certain value range, with the number of order also within a certain range.

The initial display uses certain default values for the class limits. Change thes limits to the

3 classes

2. Upper limits of incoming orders: choose new defaults.

Upper limits of order items: choose new defa

ck "Class limits" o

lick "Overview of segments" on the right of the graphic


2-3

2-3-1

Continuing your customer analysis, you want to see the relationship between the value of orders and the value of invoices from your top customers.

Execute again a Top 10 analysis of your list of customers. From your first customer, drill down to material level.

For your graphic, select Incoming orders and Sales.

Click once on Incoming orders.

Edit → Comparisons → Two key figures

Select "Sales". Choose [Enter].

The key figure comparison list is displayed.

Choose [Graphics].

2-3-2 sted in seeing the data in a 2D bar chart format.


2. Once you have applied the bar chart option by clicking [Continue], you can go to the 2D view from the Goto menu.

Goto → 2D view


SAP Business Graphics display a 3D bar chart by default. You are, however, intere

1. Before you display the bar chart, you must select bar chart from the 2D options list.


2-3-3 With the 2D view, the system defaults to a graphic for the first key figure you selected. To see both key figures, go to the group view.

Goto → Groups view

2-3-4 To see both the 3D vertical bar chart and 2D horizontal bar chart, you can display an overview of your graphics.

Goto → Overview

When you are finished, use the green or yellow arrow to return to standard analysis. Return to the customer level of your analysis.


2-4

ib

ustomer master

ustomer, directly from standard analysis.

ent information → Orders → Orders

onal data]. Specify sales organization 1000. Choose

rmation, use the green or yellow arrow alysis.

Now that you have analyzed the summarized information for your top customer, you want to see the documents that contain this information.

2-4-1 Using the top customer, descr e how to go directly to the customer’s address.

Select the customer by clicking once on the customer.

Use the menu path Extras → Master data → C

When you are finished looking at the customer master data, use the green or yellow arrow to return to the standard analysis.

2-4-2 Using the top customer, describe how to display the transactions for a c

Select the customer by clicking once on the customer.

Use the menu path Extras → Documlist

Change the date to reflect the selection in the analysis.

Select [Organizati[Enter].

When the list appears, select the document by double- clicking on the relevant line.

Once you have displayed this infoto return to the standard an


2-5 nd

of the past three months, including the current month.

rd analyse

On the ] arrow for the Material.

In the d P-105.

In the ranges selection, enter M-01 to M-20.

Copy y

On the

2-5-1

es to background processing and need not be completed

2-5-2 menu. Execute the analysis again, using the variant.

Execute a standard analysis for Material, create a list of materials for those materials used in this class: M-01 through M-20. Also include materials P-100 aP-105. Analyze the activities

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standas → Material (double-click)

selection screen, select the [Multiple selection

single value selections, enter P-100 an

our entries to the selection options in the initial screen.

initial selection screen, the [Multiple selection] arrow is highlighted.

Since you regularly use these selections, save these settings as a variant.

Goto → Variants → Save as variant

Enter your group name, LO930-##, and description. The remainder of the information applifor this exercise.


Return to the main SIS

Goto → Variants → Get

Select your variant name.

The settings defined in the variant will now be displayed.


2-6 You would now like to define your own ployee analysi

Logistianalyse2-6-1 e order Sales representative, Sales

onth.

, choose [User Settings].

E

C

Oight arrow/do not choose button. The field will

y to the right side of the display.

Moving "Month" to the correct position involves two steps:

1. Select "Month". Select the text of Material (the last field). Choose [Move] then [Continue]. The field "Month" will now be second from last.

2. Select Material (the last field). Select the text of Month. Select [Move] then [Continue].

2-6-2 In addition to the default key figures, you also require the key figure Order items. All key figures should be displayed without decimal places.

Choose [Key figures].

Click on [Choose key figures]

On the right side of the display, select "Order Items". Press the left arrow/choose button. The field will move from the right side of the display to the left side of the display.

Select no decimal places for all key figures.

default settings for the sales ems.

cs → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard s → Sales employee You would like a drilldown in thorganization, Sold-to party, Material and M

On the initial screen

nter your group name, LO930-##.

lick on [Choose characteristics]

n the left side of the display, select "Distribution channel" and "Division". Press the rmove from the left side of the displa


2-6-3 Normally you view six months of data in a specific currency (of your choice). The characteristic key and description should be displayed. You, therefore, need a characteristic column width of 30.

Choose [Parameters].

Enter 6 as the number of previous periods. Select [With current period]

Enter your required currency in "Analysis currency".

Select "Key and description".

Define a characteristic column width of 30.


User settings only apply to this analysis. If these settings are required for a different analysis, they must be defined for that individual analysis.



© SAP AG 1999

Exception reporting in standard analysesFilter options in exception analysesPeriodic analyses in Early Warning SystemGrouping exceptionsEvent-driven periodic analyses

Contents:

Early Warning System


© SAP AG 1999

Execute standard analyses with an exceptioncondition as an additional selection optionUse exception analyses as online filtersCreate an automatic weak-point analysis


Early Warning System: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999

Flexible analysis







FI


Early Warning System: Overview

ted selection and checking of weak points within the logistics area. Exceptional situations will be detected by this system and can be transferred to the persons responsible via follow-on processing.

The Early Warning System enables the decision-orien


© SAP AG 1999

Management wants to detect and eliminatepotential problems at an early stage.They require analyses that will search, on aperiodic basis, for exceptional situations, to enablethem to check for weak areas in Logistics.

Early Warning System: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

Complete list of highlighted exceptionalsituations

System-drivenData check(e.g. on a weekly basis)

Event-drivenCheck of changeddata (e.g. daily)

Interactive Periodic Analyses

Filter: Only the exceptionalsituations are output

Customer analysisSold-toparty

Salesorder val.

Orderquantity

100,000230,000350,000

1,0002,000

1,800•

100020003000


Salesorder val.

Orderquantity

230,000350,000

2,000 1,800

20003000

LISdata

Excep

tion

Excep

tion

Fax

Mail

Workflow

Fax

Mail

Workflow

Early Warning System: Functionality

nteractively in the standard analyses, the exceptional situations are highlighted using

In the periodic analysis, a list of the exceptional data is automatically sent to the designated recipient by fax, mail, or workflow.

You can either use the Early Warning System interactively in the standard analyses or run it at regular intervals as a background job.

If you use it icolor codes or filtered in the exception analysis. This allows you to detect exceptional situations at an early stage.


© SAP AG 1999


Incomingorders

Openorders

BuschMillerSchmitt •

543,750787,644653,268

•

1,548,3242,239,7831,323,178

MillerMaterial Incoming

ordersOpenorders

M-01M-02M-03 •

253,750450,633153,268

•

548,3241,258,783

313,127Miller Material: M-02Month Incoming

ordersOpenorders

01/199802/199803/1998 •

53,750250,654113,268

•

249,657578,767216,958

CharacteristicsSold-to partyMaterialMonth

RequirementsOpen orders. > 200,000 redredOpen orders. > 100,000 yellow

Exception

Early Warning System in Standard Analyses

tion in the initial screen of

he quirements of the

exception for at least one month. If you drill down further by double-clicking a sold-to party, the materials that satisfy the exception for at least one month are highlighted.

If you want to use the EWS in the standard analyses, you create an excepthe standard analysis. Carry out the standard analysis as normal.

The characteristics which satisfy the exception are highlighted in color.

Exceptional situations are always checked on the lowest level of aggregation. If an exception occurs at this level, then the entries on a higher level are also highlighted in color.

In the example above, the exception is checked at the level of sold-to party/material/month. Here tsold-to parties are highlighted for which materials exist which satisfy the re


© SAP AG 1999

Exception analysisSold-toparty

Incomingorders

Openorders

Miller

787,6442,239,783

Miller Material: M-02Month Incoming

ordersOpenorders

02/199803/1998

250,654113,268

578,767216,958

MillerMaterial Incoming

ordersOpenorders

M-02 450,6331,258,783

CharacteristicsSold-to partyMaterialMonth

RequirementsOpen orders. > 200,000 redOpen orders. > 100,000 yellow

Exception

Early Warning System as an Online Filter

is with exception, an exception analysis only displays data to which the

. at

ng a sold-to party, all materials are listed that satisfy the exception for at least one month. If you double-click a material, all the months are listed in which the exception is satisfied for this material.

Exceptions can be performed not only in standard analyses but also as independent exception analyses.

Unlike the standard analysexceptional situation applies. The exception acts as a data filter. Data that the exception does not apply to is not displayed.

In the example above, the exception requirement is checked at the sold-to party/material/month levelOnly those sold-to parties are displayed for whom materials satisfy the exception requirements for least one month. If you drill down further by double-clicki


© SAP AG 1999

System-driven- Analysis of entire data- Weekly, for example

Event-driven - Analysis of data changed since the last check- Daily, for example

Information can be sent by

Workflow

Infostructures

Infostructures

EWS

EWS

Periodicanalysis

SD

MM

PP

to the user

Mail Fax

Periodic Analysis

onal situations at an

monthly). If an exceptional situation occurs, you will be processing.

situations.

ticularly important key figures or characteristics using the event-driven dic

ed to decide between system-

driven and event-driven analyses. Although you can create several exceptions for one info structure, you can create only one event-driven analysis for each info structure.

You can schedule a periodic analysis to run as a background job in order to check the dataset for exceptional situations. The existing dataset is systematically checked for exceptiappropriate interval (hourly, daily, weekly,informed via mail, fax, or workflow and you can trigger follow-up

There are two types of periodic analyses:

System-driven: the entire dataset specified for selection is checked for exceptional Use: Month-end closing report, provides an overview of exceptional data

Event-driven: only data that has changed since the last check is read and checked. Use: Monitoring of ongoing transactions and operations at short intervals

It is advisable to monitor parperiodic analysis. In all other cases, for example, a weekly check using the system-driven perioanalysis may be performed.

The following constraints need to be considered when conducting periodic analyses: For each exception only one periodic analysis can be created. Therefore, you ne


© SAP AG 1999

Period to analyzePrevious periods

Future periods

Incl. act.

Exception: Requirements


Future periods

Incl. act.


3

7

No. forecasting per.

Threshold Value Analysis

Separate periods

Incoming orders 200,000≥

2

ab

c

Current period

a + b + c ≥ 200,000 ?

Current period

a b

ActualForecast

a + b ≥ 200,000 ?



Separate periods

Incoming orders 200,000≥


,000.

of periods defines the number of periods to be analyzed. If the option "Separate periods" e

ose the place for the next few periods

(2 in this case) which is based on the number of periods you have selected (7 in this case). A threshold value analysis is then carried out for the forecasted values.

To analyze the threshold value, you enter a threshold value for a key figure and an operator for the threshold value (e.g. incoming orders value > 200,000).

The threshold value in the example above is defined so that the exception is satisfied when the total of the incoming orders values of the last three months, including the current month, exceeds 200The number is selected, each individual period is checked instead of the key figure value total of these threperiods.

Any other currencies are converted into the specified analysis currency, before the check for exceptions takes place.

You can also carry out a threshold value test to analyze future developments. You need to chonumber of forecast periods that you want to test. A forecast then takes


© SAP AG 1999

Current period Current period

Current period Current period


Future periods

Incl. act.


Negative trendPositive trend

Statist. test

Trend Analysis

Trend

Incoming orders


Future periods

Incl. act.


6

6

Negative trendPositive trend

Statist. test

Trend Analysis

Trend

Incoming orders

Trend Analysis

rend if only one period to analyze is selected. If

t

end exists, even if the dataset contains outliers. If a positive trend exists

st periods, a reliable statistical test for

a trend can be performed. If you select only two past periods, the system only determines whether the second period value is greater or less than the first value.

The trend analysis determines whether there is a positive or negative trend in the dataset with regard to the selected key figure.

Based on the dataset and the number of periods to analyze (6 in this case), the system checks whether or not a trend exists. It is not possible to determine a ta positive trend exists and no statistical test has been performed, an exceptional situation will occur ifeach value exceeds the value in the previous period.

If the period to analyze extends over 3 or more periods, you can also carry out a statistical trend test for each individual requirement by means of statistical resources. This is recommended if you wanto know whether a general trand a statistical test has been performed, an exception will occur when the system detects a trend with a probability of 95 %.

If there are 3 or 4 past periods available to carry out a statistical test for a trend, a regression line is drawn upon which the trend is based. If there are 5 or more pa


© SAP AG 1999

Current period

Planned 001Actual

(Actual/planned) . 100 < 90 % ?


Future periods

Incl. act.

Exception: RequirementsException: Requirements


Planned/Actual ComparisonPlanned/Actual Comparison

Separate periods

90<Planning versionPlan realization %

001


Future periods

Incl. act.

Exception: RequirementsException: Requirements

Current period

Planned 001Actual

Forecast

(Forecast/planned) . 100 < 90 % ?

a b


Planned/Actual ComparisonPlanned/Actual Comparison

Separate periods

90<Planning versionPlan realization %

001

2

2

6

Planned/Actual Comparison

tual

compared with the actual data. An l

e planned values by more than 10 %.

ystem creates a forecast for the next two periods, based on the values of es

This kind of analysis enables you to detect potential problems which lie in the distant future.

The planned/actual comparison compares planned data of a specific planning version with acdata. You can check the realization of the plan and determine the weak points with respect to planned/actual values. To do this, you enter the plan realization percentage and an operator.

In the first example, the planned values for a key figure areexceptional situation occurs when the realization of the plan is less than 90 %, i.e. when the actuadata falls short of thNote: The exception is based on the total number of specified periods because the flag "Separate periods" is not set.

In the second example, the sthe last six periods. The total of both forecasted values is compared with the total planned valuassigned to these periods.


© SAP AG 1999

ExceptionsE1: Incom. orders > 200,000 Open orders > 20,000E2: Incom. orders < 200,000 Open orders > 10,000LinkOr

Group Exception: G1Miller Material: M-02Month Incoming

ordersOpenorders

02/199803/199804/199805/199806/199807/1998

25,000 5,000

15,0006,000

12,0009,000

201,000170,000230,000

95,000130,000185,000

Exception: E1CharacteristicsSold-to partyMaterialMonthRequirementsIncom. orders > 200,000Open orders > 20,000LinkAnd

Exception: E2CharacteristicsSold-to partyMaterialMonthRequirementsIncom. orders < 200,000Open orders > 10,000LinkAnd

Multiple Linking Using And and Or

, several requirements can be defined in one exception. These requirements d

If you want to link several requirements using "And" and "Or", use a group exception since a link can also be set in the group exception.

As mentioned beforeneed to be linked with each other using "And" or "Or". Only one link of requirements can be definefor each exception.


© SAP AG 1999

Execute standard analyses with an exceptioncondition as an additional selection optionUse exception analyses as online filtersCreate an automatic weak-point analysis


Early Warning System: Unit Summary


Exercises

Unit: Early Warning System Topic: Exception Reporting in Standard Analyses

• Execute standard analyses with an except

selection option. ion condition as an additional

Use exception analyses as online filters. •

given month, during the past three months. The analysis should include order value and order quantity, but the threshold is based on order value.

Management has noticed that the number of vendors being used has recently risen considerably. An analysis is required to determine vendorssupplying material with an order value of less than 10000 DEM in a


1-1

1-1-1 se the l

number in the

ysis, as well as the current period.

.

.

• standard analyses.

isplay the exception rows in green.


Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to determine which vendorssupply materials with low order values.

Create an exception that analyzes month, vendors, and materials. Ufol owing information: • Use the name EWS-01-##. Include your group

description. • Choose the Purchasing info structure (S012). • Select the Month, Vendor, and Material characteristics. • Include 3 months of data in your anal• Set your analysis currency to DEM. • Use the "Order value" and "Order quantity" key figures• Base your threshold (requirement) on the order value.

(The threshold value is 10,000• Check each period separately.

For follow-up processing: Ensure that the exception is active forD


1-1-3 When you run this analysis with your exception, you should see the message "Settings are copied from the exception". What settings is this referring to? (To see more information, press [?].)

1-1-2 Run standard analysis by vendor for the last three months, using your new exception.

1-1-4 Why do all lines appear in green?

1-1-5 see some lines that are OT green. Why are these lines not green?

Drill down through your characteristics until youN

1-1-6 Do you see all data in this analysis, or only the data that meets the threshold

in your exception?


1-2

1-2-1 What is different about these results?

Run an exception analysis so that you see ONLY those Vendors and Materials that fall below the threshold value.

1-2-2 Drill down through your characteristics. Are there any rows that are NOT green?


em Topic: Periodic Analyses

Unit: Early Warning Syst

• Create an automatic weak point analysis.

ing materials in

Once the exception has been created, management wants the analysis to be carried out periodically. The results will then be sent to you via e-mail.

1-3

1-3-1 l

ber in the


.

t) on the order value.

ly.

•

exception rows in red.

exercise). Send a mail to your user name (LO930-##) for periodic processing.

Management wants to see which vendors are supplyexcess of 100,000 DEM. Order quantities will also be included in the analysis, but the threshold is based on order value.

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to determine which vendors supply materials in excess of this order value.

Create an exception that analyzes month, vendors, and materials. Use the fol owing information:

• Use the name EWS-02-##. Include your group numdescription.

• Choose the Purchasing info structure (S012).

• Select the Month, Vendor, and Material characteristics.

• Include 3 months of data in your anal

• Set your analysis currency to DEM.

• Use the "Order value" and "Order quantity" key figures

• Base your threshold (requiremen

• The threshold value is 100,000.

• Check each period separate

For follow-up processing:

Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. Display theEnsure that the exception is active for periodic analyses (for the next


1-4 e-mail

rd analysis selection criteria lank.

-4-2 Schedule your analysis to run immediately.

1-4-3 View the results of your background job.

-4-4 What do you see in your e-mail?

Schedule a system-driven periodic analysis to run the above exception and send an to yourself with the results.

1-4-1 Create a variant (area to analyze) EWS-## in order to run this analysis in the background. In your variant, leave the standab

1

1

1-4-5 From your e-mail message, how can you go to the exception analysis?


m Topic: Group Exceptions

Unit: Early Warning Syste

• Create a group exception.

anagement wants both analyses combined in one exception.

1-5 alue.

1-5-1

• ber in the

usly, EWS-01-## and EWS-02-##.

t period.

ce you want to see both situations.

• Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. If there is sufficient time, activate the exception for a periodic analysis.

M

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the vendors supplying material of a low order value, or those that have exceeded the excess order v

Create a group exception that combines the two exceptions created previously. Use the following information:

Use the name EWS-03-##. Include your group numdescription.


• Assign the exceptions created previo


• Include 3 months of data in your analysis, as well as the curren

• The link should be OR, sin


You can only assign individual exceptions to the group exception that refer to the same information structure.


1-5-2 analysis by vendors using your new group exception.

1-5-3 Read the online documentation relating to Early Warning System: Overview Allocating Exceptions. Detail the rules that apply to allocating exceptions.

Execute a standardRepeat the steps described in the previous exercise. Substitute the values as explained above.


Topic: Exception Reporting in Standard Analyses

Unit: Early Warning System

Use exception analyses as online filters.

• Execute standard analyses with an exception condition as an additional selection option.

•

s to see ta

t to see incoming orders and incoming order quantities in the analysis, but the threshold is based on incoming orders (currency value).

Each of your divisions within each sales organization has a monthly bookings quota (orders taken) of 50000 DEM. Management wantwhich divisions within which sales organizations have not met their quofor the past three months. They wan



2-1

2-1-1 ivision.

nt) on incoming orders.

ly. •

is active for standard analyses. isplay the exception rows in red.

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the sales organizationsand their divisions that have not met their bookings quota.

Create an exception that analyzes month, sales organization, and dUse the following information: • Use the name EWS-01-##. Include your group number in the

description. • Choose the info structure for the Sales organization (S003). • Select the "Sales organization", "Division", and "Month" characteristics.• Include 3 months of data in your analysis, as well as the current period. • Set your analysis currency to DEM. • Use the Incoming orders and Incoming orders quantity key figures. • Base your threshold (requireme• The threshold value is 50,000. • Check each period separate


Ensure that the exceptionD


2-1-3 When you run this analysis with your exception, you should see the message "Settings are copied from the exception". What settings is this referring to? (To see more information, press [?].)

2-1-2 Run a standard analysis by sales organization for the last three months using your new exception.

2-1-4 Why do all lines appear in red?

Drill down through your characteristics until you see some lines that are NOT red. Why are these lines not red?

2-1-5

2-1-6 Do you see all data in this analysis, or only the data that meets the threshold in your exception?


2-2 e sales organizations and divisions

2-2-1 What is different about these results?

Run an exception analysis so you see ONLY thosthat are not meeting their quota.

2-2-2 Drill down through your characteristics. Are there any rows that are NOT red?





1000000 t


2-3

2-3-1


antity.

on incoming orders.

0.

ly.

•

ws in green.

exercise). Send a mail to your user name (LO930-##) for periodic processing.

Management wants to see which divisions within which sales organizations have considerably exceeded their quota during the past three months. They want to see incoming orders in excess ofDEM. Incoming order quantities will also be included in the analysis, buthe threshold is based on incoming orders (currency value).

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the sales organizations and their divisions that have considerably exceeded their bookings quota.

Create an exception that analyzes month, sales organization, and division. Use the following information:

• Use the name EWS-02-##. Include your group number in the description.

• Choose the info structure for the Sales organization (S003).

• Select the "Sales organization", "Division", and "Month" characteristics.



• Use key figures Incoming orders and Incoming orders qu

• Base your threshold (requirement)

• The threshold value is 1,000,00



Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. Display the exception roEnsure that the exception is active for periodic analyses (for the next


2-4 -driven periodic analysis to run the above exception and send an -mail to yourself with the results.

2-4-1 variant (area to analyze) EWS-## in order to run this analysis in the background. In your variant, leave the standard analysis selection criteria blank.

-4-2 Schedule your analysis to run immediately.

-4-3 View the results of your background job.

2-4-4 What do you see in your e-mail?

Schedule a systeme

Create a

2

2

2-4-5 From your e-mail message, how can you go to the exception analysis?






2-5 nalyses to see the sales organizations

2-5-1

•


t period.


• Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. If there is sufficient time, activate the exception for a periodic analysis.

M

Use the Early Warning System and standard aand their divisions that have not achieved their bookings quota and those that have considerably exceeded their bookings quota.

Create a group exception that combines the two exceptions created previously. Use the following information:

Use the name EWS-03-##. Include your group number in the description.









2-5-2 Execute a standard analysis by sales organization using your new group exception. Repeat the steps described in the previous exercise. Substitute the values as explained above.

2-5-3 Read the online documentation relating to Early Warning System: Overview Allocating Exceptions. Detail the rules that apply to allocating exceptions.


Solutions





•

given month, during the past three months. The analysis should include order value and order quantity, but the threshold is based on order value.

Management has noticed that the number of vendors being used has recently risen considerably. An analysis is required to determine vendorssupplying material with an order value of less than 10000 DEM in a


1-1

1-1-1 se the l

number in the


.

• standard analyses.

isplay the exception rows in green.


Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to determine which vendorssupply materials with low order values.

Create an exception that analyzes month, vendors, and materials. Ufol owing information: • Use the name EWS-01-##. Include your group

description. • Choose the Purchasing info structure (S012). • Select the Month, Vendor, and Material characteristics. • Include 3 months of data in your anal• Set your analysis currency to DEM. • Use the "Order value" and "Order quantity" key figures• Base your threshold (requirement) on the order value.

The threshold value is 10,000. • Check each period separately.

For follow-up processing: Ensure that the exception is active forD


From the Purchasing Information System (PURCHIS) menu, choose:

Early Warning System → Exception → Create

cture S012.

3.

and Material characteristics. Select the

.

9.

hreshold value for your order value key

12.

13. ype 10000 for your threshold t

g].

15. Using the pull-down arrow for "Color in list" (F4), choose color 1, green.

16. [Save] your exception.

1. Enter the name of your exception EWS-01-## and the description of your exception, using your group name. Specify info stru

2. Choose [Enter].

To select characteristics, click [Choose characteristics].

4. Select the Month, Vendor,characteristics in this order, since this will become the default drilldown path for standard analyses when this exception is used

5. Choose [Requirements].

6. Enter DEM as the analysis currency and exchange rate type M (default).

7. Enter 3 for number of periods to analyze. Include the actual period (default).

8. Click [Choose key figures].

Select "Order value" and "Order quantity". Choose [Enter].

10. You now need to establish the tfigure. On the Requirements screen, select the order value by clicking it once.

11. Choose [Define requirement].

Select "Threshold value analysis" and [Continue].

Select the "less than" symbol (<) and tvalue. We are not comparing against forecast, so leave forecasperiods blank. Choose to check each period separately by selecting the "Separate periods" field. [Continue].

14. To choose the exception color, select [Follow-up processin


1-1-2 Run standard analysis by vendor for the last three months, using your new

.

1-1-3 exception, you should see the message "Settings are copied from the exception". What settings is this referring to?

s for the standard drilldown and the key figures are copied currency is also copied from the

1-1-4

the drilldown path, there are entries that do not

1-1-5 Drill down through your characteristics until you see some lines that are not green?


1-2

stem menu by clicking the green

xception analysis

ption is already entered. [Execute]. 1-2-1

They reflect ONLY the data that meets the

1-2-2 Drill down through your characteristics. Are there any rows that are NOT ?

No.

exception.

Standard Analyses � Vendor

Leave all characteristic selection criteria blank

Enter your exception into the field Exception.

Change the Period to analyze to 3 months. Choose [Execute]. When you run this analysis with your

(To see more information, press [?].)

The settingaccording to the exception. The analysisexception.

Why do all lines appear in green?

At the lowest level within meet the threshold. Therefore, the total lines are green, even though some of the detail may not be.

NOT green. Why are these lines

These lines are not exceptions.

in your exception?

All data rows are displayed.

Run an exception analysis so that you see ONLY those Vendors and Materials that fall below the threshold value.

1. Exit from the original report using the yellow arrow. Do not save your analysis.

2. Return to the Purchasing Information Syarrow.

3. Standard analyses � E

4. Enter your exception.

5. Choose [Execute]. Note you are now in the same standard analysis characteristic selection screen. Your exce

What is different about these results?

The numbers are different.threshold criteria. In other words, only the rows whose order value is less than 10000 are displayed.

green





ing materials in


1-3

1-3-1 Create an exception that analyzes month, vendors, and materials. Use the l

• Use the name EWS-02-##. Include your group number in the


.

t) on the order value.

ly.

•

Send a mail to your user name (LO930-##) for periodic processing.

Management wants to see which vendors are supplyexcess of 100,000 DEM. Order quantities will also be included in the analysis, but the threshold is based on order value.

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to determine which vendors supply materials in excess of this order value.

fol owing information:

description.


• Select the Month, Vendor, and Material characteristics.



• Use the "Order value" and "Order quantity" key figures

• Base your threshold (requiremen

• The threshold value is 100,000.



Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. Display the exception rows in red. Ensure that the exception is active for periodic analyses (for the nextexercise).


Repeat the steps 1-13 detailed in the pr

n list (F4), choose color 3, red.

nter your user name. Note that this feature is processing.

1-4

1-4-1 variant (area to analyze) in order to run this analysis in the background. In your variant, leave the standard analysis selection criteria

to analyze → Create

n. Select "System-driven".

ur variant: EWS-##.

5.

ation, you could enter . For this exercise, leave the

ttributes].

7. formation System menu using the green arrow.

evious exercise. Replace the values as described above.

14. To choose the exception color and send an e-mail to yourself, select [Follow-up processing].

15. Using the pull-down arrow for Color i

16. Select "Active for periodic analysis".

17. Select "Send mail to". Eused only with periodic


Schedule a system-driven periodic analysis to run the above exception and send an e-mail to yourself with the results.

Create a EWS-##

blank.

From the Purchasing Information System menu, choose:

Early Warning System � Periodic analysis → Area

1. Enter your exceptio

2. Choose [Create].

3. Enter a name for yo

4. Choose [Create].

[Continue]. Remember you are creating a variant for a background job. You are not running the analysis online, even though you are processing the same screens. In a productive situselection criteria to run this analysisselection criteria blank and choose [A

6. Enter a description of your variant.

[Save]. Return to the Purchasing In


1-4-2

:

ic analysis � Schedule

pear.

1-4-3

AP menu or choose [Inbox] in the info window directly.

1-4-4

1-4-5 can you view the exception analysis?

Choose: Document � Execute

Schedule your analysis to run immediately.

From the Purchasing Information System menu, choose

Early Warning System � Period

Your exception should ap

1. Choose [Schedule].

2. Choose [Immediate].

3. [Save]. You will see the message "Background job for exception EWS-02-## successfully planned."

4. Return to the Purchasing Information System menu using the green arrow.

View the results of your background job.

1. You may already see the SAPoffice express info window. If not, press [Enter].

2. Choose Office �Workplace in the SSAPoffice express

3. Choose [Inbox].

4. Select [Unviewed documents] or [Documents].

5. Double-click your message. You may have to click the "Doc. contents"tab.

What do you see in your e-mail?

Only those characteristic combinations that meet the requirement in theexception.

From your e-mail message, how






1-5 alue.

1-5-1 Create a group exception that combines the two exceptions created



t period.


•

If there is sufficient time, activate the exception for a periodic analysis.

M

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the vendors supplying material of a low order value, or those that have exceeded the excess order v

previously. Use the following information:

description.







Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses.



From the Purchasing Information System (PURCHIS) menu, choose:

ing your group name. Specify info structure S012.

analyze. Include the actual period

-02-##.

g is defined.

. [Save] your group exception.

1-5-2 analysis by vendors using your new group exception. Repeat the steps described in the previous exercise. Substitute the values as

1-5-3 Read the online documentation relating to Early Warning System: Overview to allocating exceptions.

2. me

3.

ion tic reference determines the characteristics and their

4. se exceptions with key figures for which you have an authorization

Early Warning System → Grouping → Create

1. Enter the name of your exception EWS-03-## and the description of your exception, us

2. Choose [Enter].

3. Enter DEM for the analysis currency and exchange rate type M (default).

4. Enter 3 for number of periods to (default).

5. Select the link "OR".

6. Allocate the exceptions EWS-01-## and EWS

7. Check that follow-up processin

8

Execute a standard

explained above.

Allocating Exceptions. Detail the rules that apply

The online documentation provides the solution:

1. Only individual exceptions can be assigned to an exception group, that is, no other exception group can be assigned to an exception group.

All exceptions in the exception group must refer to the sainformation structure, that is, you can only assign those exceptions which have the same underlying information structure.

All exceptions must have the same characteristics and the same sequence of characteristics so that the standard analyses and exception analysis are displayed in the same way. The first assigned exceptwith a characterissequence for all of the exceptions, which can be assigned to the exception group.

You can only assign tho






•

s to see ta

t to see incoming orders and incoming order quantities in the analysis, but the threshold is based on incoming orders (currency value).

Each of your divisions within each sales organization has a monthly bookings quota (orders taken) of 50000 DEM. Management wantwhich divisions within which sales organizations have not met their quofor the past three months. They wan



2-1

2-1-1 ivision.

nt) on incoming orders.

• r standard analyses.

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the sales organizationsand their divisions that have not met their bookings quota.

Create an exception that analyzes month, sales organization, and dUse the following information: • Use the name EWS-01-##. Include your group number in the

description. • Choose the info structure for the Sales organization (S003). • Select the "Sales organization", "Division", and "Month" characteristics.• Include 3 months of data in your analysis, as well as the current period. • Set your analysis currency to DEM. • Use the Incoming orders and Incoming orders quantity key figures. • Base your threshold (requireme• The threshold value is 50,000. • Check each period separately.

For follow-up processing: Ensure that the exception is active fo


Display the exception rows in red.

From the Sales Information System (SIS) menu, choose:

.

2.

3. ct characteristics, click [Choose characteristics].

onth, Sales organization, and Division.

lldown path for standard analyses when this exception is

5. equirements].

urrency and exchange rate type M

7. er of periods to analyze. Include the actual period

8.

9. g orders" and "Incoming orders qty" key figures.

ur incoming s

11.

12. [Continue].

shold

o check each period separately by selecting the d. [Continue].

4), choose color 3, red.

2-1-2 onths using

→ Sales organization

Leave all characteristic selection criteria blank.

Enter your exception into the field Exception.

Choose [Execute].

Early Warning System → Exception → Create

1. Enter the name of your exception EWS-01-## and the description ofyour exception, using your group name. Specify info structure S003

Choose [Enter].

To sele

4. Select the characteristics MSelect the characteristics in this order, since this will become thedefault driused.

Choose [R

6. Enter DEM as the analysis c(default).

Enter 3 for numb(default).

Click [Choose key figures].

Select the "IncominChoose [Enter].

10. You now need to establish the threshold value for yoorders key figure. On the Requirements screen, select incoming orderby clicking it once.

Choose [Define requirement].

Select "Threshold value analysis" and

13. Select the "less than" symbol (<) and type 50000 for your threvalue. We are not comparing against forecast, so leave forecast periods blank. Choose t"Separate periods" fiel

14. To choose the exception color, select [Follow-up processing].

15. Using the pull-down arrow for Color in list (F


Run a standard analysis by sales organization for the last three myour new exception.

Standard analyses


2-1-3 exception, you should see the message "Settings are copied from the exception". What settings is this referring to?

s for the standard drilldown and the key figures are copied currency is also copied from the

2-1-4

2-1-5 Drill down through your characteristics until you see some lines that are t red?


All data rows are displayed.

When you run this analysis with your

(To see more information, press [?].)

The settingaccording to the exception. The analysisexception. Why do all lines appear in red?

At the lowest level within the drilldown path, there are entries that do not meet the threshold. Therefore, the total lines are red, even though some of the detail may not be.

NOT red. Why are these lines no

These lines are not exceptions.

in your exception?


2-2

enu using the green arrow.

xception analysis

n screen. Your exception is already entered.

2-2-1

2-2-2 Drill down through your characteristics. Are there any rows that are NOT

No.

Run an exception analysis so you see ONLY those sales organizations and divisions that are not meeting their quota.

1. Exit from the original report using the yellow arrow. Do not save your analysis.

2. Return to the Sales Information System m

3. Standard analyses → E

4. Enter your exception.

5. Choose [Execute]. Note you are now in the same standard analysis characteristic selectio

6. Choose [Execute]. What is different about these results?

The numbers are different. They reflect ONLY the data that meets the threshold criteria. In other words, only the rows whose incoming orders are less than 50000 are displayed.

red?





1000000 t


2-3

2-3-1 Create an exception that analyzes month, sales organization, and division.



antity.

on incoming orders.

0.

ly.

•

Management wants to see which divisions within which sales organizations have considerably exceeded their quota during the past three months. They want to see incoming orders in excess ofDEM. Incoming order quantities will also be included in the analysis, buthe threshold is based on incoming orders (currency value).

Use the Early Warning System and standard analyses to see the sales organizations and their divisions that have considerably exceeded their bookings quota.

Use the following information:

description.


• Select the "Sales organization", "Division", and "Month" characteristics.



• Use key figures Incoming orders and Incoming orders qu

• Base your threshold (requirement)

• The threshold value is 1,000,00



Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses. Display the exception rows in green. Ensure that the exception is active for periodic analyses (for the nextexercise).


Send a mail to your user name (LO930-##) for periodic processing.

Repeat the steps 1-13 detailed in the previous exercise. Replace the

14. To choose the exception color and send an e-mail to yourself, select

dic analysis".

17. Select "Send mail to". Enter your user name. Note that this feature is

2-4 Schedu e-mail elf with the results.

2-4-1 run this analysis in the

→ Periodic analysis → Area to analyze → Create

en".

4.

5. d n though you are

ductive situation, you could enter

2-4-2

tem menu, choose:

Periodic analysis → Schedule

ear.

3. [Save]. You will see the message "Background job for exception EWS-02-## successfully planned."

4. Return to the Sales Information System menu using the green arrow.

values as described above.

[Follow-up processing].

15. Using the pull-down arrow for "Color in list" (F4), choose color 1, green.

16. Select "Active for perio

used only with periodic processing.


le a system-driven periodic analysis to run the above exception and send anto yours

Create a variant (area to analyze) EWS-## in order tobackground. In your variant, leave the standard analysis selection criteria blank.

From the Sales Information System menu, choose:

Early Warning System

1. Enter your exception. Select "System-driv

2. Choose [Create].

3. Enter a name for your variant: EWS-##.

Choose [Create].

[Continue]. Remember you are creating a variant for a backgrounjob. You are not running the analysis online, eveprocessing the same screens. In a proselection criteria to run this analysis. For this exercise, leave the selection criteria blank and choose [Attributes].

6. Enter a description of your variant.

7. [Save]. Return to the Sales Information System menu using the green arrow.

Schedule your analysis to run immediately.

From the Sales Information Sys

Early Warning System →

Your exception should app

1. Choose [Schedule].

2. Choose [Immediate].


2-4-3

→ Workplace in the SAP menu or choose fice express info window directly.

2-4-4

2-4-5 n you view the exception analysis?

Choose: Document → Execute.

View the results of your background job.

1. You may already see the SAPoffice express info window. If not, press [Enter].

2. Choose: Choose Office [Inbox] the SAPof

3. Choose [Inbox].

4. Select [Unviewed documents].

5. Double-click your message. You may have to click the "Doc. contents"tab.

What do you see in your e-mail?

Only those characteristic combinations that meet the requirement in theexception. From your e-mail message, how ca






2-5 nalyses to see the sales organizations

2-5-1 Create a group exception that combines the two exceptions created



t period.


•

If there is sufficient time, activate the exception for a periodic analysis.

M

Use the Early Warning System and standard aand their divisions that have not achieved their bookings quota and those that have considerably exceeded their bookings quota.

previously. Use the following information:

description.







Ensure that the exception is active for standard analyses.



From the Sales Information System (SIS) menu, choose:

ing your group name. Specify info structure S003.

analyze. Include the actual period

-02-##.

g is defined.

. [Save] your group exception.

2-5-3 by sales organization using your new group exception. Repeat the steps described in the previous exercise. Substitute the

2-5-3 Read the online documentation relating to Early Warning System: Overview ns.

2. me

3.

ion tic reference determines the characteristics and their

4. se exceptions with key figures for which you have an authorization

Early Warning System → Grouping → Create

1. Enter the name of your exception EWS-03-## and the description of your exception, us

2. Choose [Enter].

3. Enter DEM for the analysis currency and exchange rate type M (default).

4. Enter 3 for number of periods to (default).

5. Select the link "OR".

6. Allocate the exceptions EWS-01-## and EWS

7. Check that follow-up processin

8

Execute a standard analysis

values as explained above.

Allocating Exceptions. Detail the rules that apply to allocating exceptio

The online documentation provides the solution

1. Only individual exceptions can be assigned to an exception group, that is, no other exception group can be assigned to an exception group.

All exceptions in the exception group must refer to the sainformation structure, that is, you can only assign those exceptions which have the same underlying information structure.

All exceptions must have the same characteristics and the same sequence of characteristics so that the standard analyses and exception analysis are displayed in the same way. The first assigned exceptwith a characterissequence for all of the exceptions, which can be assigned to the exception group.

You can only assign tho


© SAP AG 1999

Flexible analyses reporting in LIS

List layout in the Report Writer

Maintaining sets and set hierarchies for selection

LIS evaluations in Report Writer

Contents:

Flexible Analyses in LIS


© SAP AG 1999

Use flexible analyses as an additional option forobtaining information in LISMaintain additional selection options in theflexible analyses, using sets and set hierarchiesFind and enhance LIS evaluations in Report Writer


Flexible Analyses in LIS: Unit Objectives


© SAP AG 1999


Flexible analysis






FI


Flexible Analyses in LIS: Overview

IS allow

the Report Writer functionality is available to you when you use flexible analyses. To be able to use the full Report Writer functionality, you have to edit the reports using the Report Writer transactions.

In addition to the standard analyses, the flexible analysis technique allows you to display the contents of the information structures in a different way again. The flexible analyses in Lyou to use part of the functionality available in the Report Writer, a tool for creating reports that is located in other SAP applications such as G/L Accounting and Cost Center Accounting.

Please note that only part of


© SAP AG 1999

Management often requires report layouts tailoredto suit individual needs. This includes comparisonof figures for different periods.

Flexible Analyses in LIS: Business Scenario


© SAP AG 1999

VendorMaterialMonth

Change EvaluationCharacteristics

March 1993 April 1993

Order valueNo. of PO

items

662418

842

240

7526161049

445

240,000100,00040,00060,000

114,00075,00065,000

TotalSmith Inc.

Printer 6512Computer H217

Morgan Inc.Laser printerPC

200,00090,00040,00050,000

110,00060,00050,000

Order valueNo. of PO

items

Order valueNo. of POitems

Change EvaluationKey figures

157157 005005398398

Pick-uptechnique

Self-Defined Evaluations

ne view, yet list online.

eristics and key figures from different information

e the "Evaluation" function to describe the reporting function in LIS. The "Evaluation"

You can choose characteristics and key figures using a pick-up technique. It is also possible to define the list layout by simply selecting the data you require.

The flexible analyses in LIS are used in the same way as a report generator: you use a menu to describe the content and format of the list you require and, at the touch of a button, the respective program is generated in the background. The resulting list displays a large number in othe flexible analyses offer you a broad spectrum of options for interactively editing the

In comparison to standard analyses, flexible analyses have the following advantages:

This technique enables you to combine charactstructures or DDIC tables in one list.

You can choose between a variety of layouts.

You can use your own formulas to calculate new key figures for existing ones.

You can usconcept contains a program object that controls the collection and formatting of data for evaluation purposes.


© SAP AG 1999

List

DDICtablesDDICtables

Infostructures

Infostructures

Evaluationstructure

Evaluationstructure

Evaluationstructure

EvaluationEvaluation

Datapresentation

Datacollection

Logicaldata view

Physicaldata basis

Database tablesDatabase tables

LIS table descriptionLIS table description

ReportsReports

From Data Basis to Data Presentation

structures control the way in which the evaluations collect data. They describe

An evaluation tabase tables.

n

When you run an evaluation, a list of data is displayed at the data presentation level, which you can change and interpret using a variety of functions.

In LIS, the evaluation the possible data sources of your evaluations. These data sources can be information structures or normal DDIC tables.

An evaluation structure chiefly consists of a list of characteristics and key figures. structure can also contain characteristics and key figures from different physical da

The name of an evaluation structure must begin with "ZF" (example: ZFMARA).

Evaluations are created with reference to evaluation structures. The characteristics and key figures ian evaluation structure can form the rows and columns of your evaluation list.

When evaluation structures and evaluations are generated, Report Writer objects are created in the background. They can also include libraries for evaluation structures and reports for evaluations.


© SAP AG 1999

List

S012S012

S012CharsM1M2

Key figuresK1K2

XYZ1CharsM1M2FormulasLayout

Key figuresK1K2

Datapresentation

Datacollection

Logicaldata view

Physicaldata basis

Information structureInformation structure

Evaluation structureEvaluation structure

EvaluationEvaluation

Simple Example

racteristics of the corresponding

n

o the data presentation for a simple example. In this example, the data does not originate

from different data sources, and the evaluation structure was generated by creating the information structure.

Each information structure in LIS automatically has an evaluation structure with the same name. This evaluation structure contains all the key figures and chainformation structure. This makes it easy for you to create evaluations for both standard informatiostructures as well as for self-defined information structures.

The above illustration shows the process from the physical data basis (in this case an information structure) t


© SAP AG 1999

MaterialVendorMonth

Change EvaluationChars Key figures Type Formula

Order quantityGoods receipt qtyGR qty - Order qty

Choose chars from evaluation

structure

Choose key figures from evaluation

structure

Create formulas from

key figures Charact. Order qty GR qty GR - Ord. qtyMaterial Vendor Month

Layout control

Type selection for monthNormal displayColumn comparison char. per key fig.Column comparison key fig. for char.Characteristic for selection only

Column repetitions2

Charact. K1 K2Material Vendor Month

Charact. K1 K2Material Vendor

05/98 06/98Charact. K1 K2 K1 K2Material Vendor

K1 K2Charact. 05/98 06/98 05/98 06/98Material Vendor

Evaluations: Options

on type for eristic.

ues for your own additional key figures from the values of in

You can define various layout parameters such as line texts, line totals, numeric and date formats when you create an evaluation. However, you can also change them in the generated list.

In addition to making your own characteristic and key figure selection, there are further options for creating your own evaluation.

The evaluation type enables you to change the position of characteristics in a list. For example, you can define column comparisons of characteristics for each key figure, or of key figures for each characteristic, or a characteristic only for selection purposes. You can define an evaluatiseveral characteristics. Column comparisons, however, are only possible for one charact

The layout of the subsequent lists can be displayed schematically for control purposes.

Formulas allow you to calculate the valexisting key figures. After the formula has been created, you can change the position of the valuesthe list using the key figures function.


© SAP AG 1999

Evaluation: Result

Created by H.SmithCharacteristics** Material* M-01 04/1998 05/1998 06/1998* M-02

Order value 1,100,000 500,000 100,000 180,000 220,000 400,000

Graphics withselection technique

Sortby columns

Store textsTitle pageHeaderFooterLast pageComments

Layout parametersLine textsLine totalsNumeric and dateformatsColumn width....

Define threshold valuesas data filters

Save snapshots in extracts

ExportMaintain Threshold ValueConditionConditionThreshold val.Ref. column Order value

>200,0001

Currency translation

Local drilldown bycollapsing and

expanding

Office integration

Executing an Analysis: Functionality

The lists generated when you execute an evaluation are Report Writer reports. A number of special functions are available when displaying these reports, as shown in the above slide.


© SAP AG 1999

Use flexible analyses as an additional option forobtaining information in LISMaintain additional selection options in theflexible analyses, using sets and set hierarchiesFind and enhance LIS evaluations in Report Writer


Flexible Analyses in LIS: Summary


Exercises

Topic: Flexible Analysis Reporting in LIS

Unit: Flexible Analyses in LIS

• Use flexible analyses as an additional means of acquiring information in LIS

irements also include calculating new key figures by applying athematical formulas to existing key figures.

Management often requires report layouts tailored to suit individual needs, including a comparison of key figures for different periods.

These requm




1-1 Management requires the following report layout:

Order Quantity

Average Order Value

**** Purchasing organization 4321415 *** IDES Germany 4321415 ** KBB Black Pump 2070 200790 97* Slug for fly wheel 6 688 6736 97

05/1997 87 8439 9706/1997 40 3880 9707/1997 44 4268 9708/1997 76 7372 9709/1997 40 3880 9710/1997 60 5820 9711/1997 57 5529 9712/1997 63 6111 9701/1998 40 3880 9704/1998 141 13677 9705/1998 40 3880 97

* Support base 1 1382 34054 9705/1997 148 14356 9706/1997 142 13774 9707/1997 84 8148 9708/1997 09/1997 10/1997 11/1997 12/1997 01/1998 04/1998 05/1998

** SMP GmbH * Deluxe Gas Tank

05/1997

vel. llows:

urchasing Organization sing Organization

** Vendor * Material

The lowest level of detail for this report is Month.

* Asterisks indicate the summation leThe summation levels are as fo**** Total P*** Purcha


1-1-1 Using the report, list the characteristics and key figures for this evaluation.

Characteristics Key figures

1-1-2 Using the standard analysis, determine which SAP information structure provides this information.

Note: For the next exercises, we will use the evaluation structure with the same name, which was generated automatically with the information structure.

1-1-3 Is the key figure "Average" in the evaluation structure?

1-1-4 U

E

ly ure.

• verage". The formula should be

hen executing the

• Do not include the evaluation in a transport request.

1-1-5 Execute your evaluation. You must regenerate the report group. Accept the default set names. There is a future exercise using sets.

sing the evaluation structure S012, create the evaluation EV##, valuation 1 for group ##.

• Select the characteristics you listed above. Ensure that they are in the order specified by the summation levels.

• Select the key figures you listed above. Note that you can select ontwo of the three key figures in the report from the evaluation structCreate a new key figure called "Acalculated as follows: Order value / Order quantity

• Save your evaluation. The report will be generated wreport for the first time.


1-2

1-2-1 Scroll throughout your report using the page up and page down buttons. On what page does the data start?

Experiment with the layout of your report.

1-2-2 scription of the characteristics on each row. Also

hange the column width to 45 to accommodate both fields.

1-2-3 show totals for total organizations, urchasing organization, and vendor. Change the summation levels back.

Display the key and dec

Change the summation levels to p

The level number corresponds to the number of asterisks in the summation level row. Level 4 is the total for this report.

1-2-4 isplay only those lines whose order values are over 10000.

1-2-5 again. Highlight those rows whose incoming orders are ing them in red. Afterwards, deactivate the threshold

alue condition.

-2-6 Sort the report in ascending order by "Order value".

Enter text on the title page. Include the date and time the report was output. Make sure you save the text. Display your new text.

1-2-8 Exit the report. Do not save the settings. Do not save the report as an extract.

D

Display all rows over 10000 by displayv

1

1-2-7


1-3 information as above. This report is a comparison between the current period and the previous period, for the above

formation. This report layout is as fo

Qu rdlu

era

Management has another report with the same

in llows:

Order antity O er Va e

Av ge

Current Previous Current Previous Current Previous *** Purchasing organization 4 4321415 321415 ** IDES Germany 4 4 321415 321415 * KBB Black Pump 1 12070 2070 200790 200790 94 94 Slug 97 for fly wheel 688 688 66736 66736 97 Support base 1382 1382 134054 134054 97 97

1-3-1 compare the relevant periods. Create a new evaluation:

• se 2 columns. Use "Layout control"

Execute your evaluation for the current month and the previous month. You must select to regenerate the report group.

1-3-3 What is different about the selection screen for this report?

Using the same evaluation structure as above (S012), create a new evaluation that willEW##, evaluation 2 for group ##. Use the evaluation already created above as a model.

Change the characteristic type from "Month" to "type 1" - Comparison of characteristic per key figure. Chooto get an idea of what the report will look like. Save your evaluation. Do not include it in a transport request.

1-3-2

1-3-4 What is different about the display of this report?

*1-4

-4-1 Send the report to yourself from within the report via express office mail.

Read the e-mail you just received. In order to receive the "express mail," press [Enter]. You may need to press [Enter] a second time.

Mail a copy of this report to yourself.

1

1-4-2

Topic: Maintaining Sets and Set Hierarchies for Selection


Maintain additional selection options in the flexible analyses, using sets and set hierarchies

•


ce d

ailable in flexible analysis. This means that you will have to set up another reporting structure using sets to reflect the same reporting hierarchy.

1-5 on, this time using flexible analysis. You want to replace the vendors in your report with the vendor regions defined below. Your reporting structure is as follows:

Europe

The result and layout of the flexible analyses are of paramount importanfor management. They would like to see some hierarchical reports baseon the reporting nodes you set up for standard analysis. Unfortunately, these hierarchies are not av

Once again, you want to perform an analysis based on vendors by regi

Germany Great Britain

North South

1000 1001 1004

1012 1002 008 1

1014 1003

015 1 1005

1006

1010

1011

1020


1-5-1 tinct range of vendors, you first need to create a basic set o

-

.

.

- g entries. Do NOT enter the short text of the line, since this will ovet pp dicato s

Since there is no disf all vendors in Southern Germany that corresponds to the above

reporting structure.

Create a basic set SGermany-## that only includes the vendors in Southern Germany. Table S012.

- Create the set using vendors, field name LIFNR

- Enter Southern Germany-## as a description

- No additional data is needed in the header. Enter the vendors, using the followin

rride the vendor’s text. Do not select et. he su ress in r. Save the

No. From value

To value Short text of set line SI

001 1001

002 1002

003 1003

004 1005

005 1006

006 1010

007 1011

008 1020

1-5-2 Create a basic set com any. Name

- Enter the vendors, using the following entries. Do NOT enter the short text of t since ve t. e the set.

prising of the vendors in Northern Germthe set NGermany-##.

- Enter Northern Germany-## as a description.

he line, this will o rride the vendor’s tex Sav

No. From value


001 1000

002 1012

003 1014

004 1015


1-5-3 Cre me the set


ate a basic set comprising of the vendors in Great Britain. NaGB-##.

- Enter Great Britain-## as a description.


No. From value


001 1004

002 1008

1-6

1-6-1 Northern and Southern

scription.

• → Subordinate sets ppropriate in screen.

To include the new sets in the predefined hierarchical structure, you need to create a further two single sets.

Create a single set containing the vendors fromGermany. Name the set Germany-##.

• Enter Germany-## as a de

• Enter the following data:

Choose ma

Goto tenance

to call up the a

No. Set ID Set short text SI

001 NGermany-## Northern Germany-##

002 SGermany-## Southern Germany-##

1-6-2 Germany and Great Britain.

ription.

• → Subordinate sets to call up the appropriate in screen.

Create a single set containing the vendors fromName the set Europe-##.

• Enter Europe-## as a desc

• Enter the following data:

Choose Goto ma tenance


001 Germany-## Germany-##

002 GB-## Great Britain-##

1-6-3 Execute your flexible analysis EV-## using your new single set Europe-##.

1-6-4 What difference(s) do you notice in this report?


Topic: LIS Evaluations in Report Writer


t Writer

• Change column widths to varying lengths.

• Find and enhance LIS evaluations in Repor

SAP Report Writer in LIS. Your task is to determine how the Report Writer is used in LIS and whether its entire functionality can be leveraged.

1-7

Execute the evaluation EW##, the comparison analysis created previously. Specify the current month and year, and previous month and current year.

1-7-2 C te the following information for your analysis:

Your company is also using the

Identify the links between LIS and the Report Writer.

1-7-1

omple

Table

Library

Report

Report group


1-7-3 hat column widths have been defined for the available format groups?

Colum width

W

n

Format group 1

Format group 2

Format group 3

Format group 4

Format group 5

The column width figure refers to format group, not the column number.

1-7-4 Can variable column widths be assigned in flexible analysis?

1-7-5 Identify the current format groups assigned in your report.


1-7-6

1. .

5. llowin the key figures: (Field FGr)

Change the format group definition of the report in Report Writer. Follow these steps:

Access Report Writer by changing the definition of your report Extras → Change definition.

2. To edit the column block, choose Goto → Columns.

3. To change the set, select the column block and then choose Edit → Change set.

4. Select the Set ID for the key figures by double-clicking to display the key figures.

Assign the fo g format group to

Order value Format group 2

Order quantity Format group 3

Average Format group 4

6. tries. Use the green arrow to return to Change Report:

7. cuted

analysis.

8. Press [Yes] when asked "Regenerate report group?"

-7-7 Check that the format groups have been assigned.

-7-8 Change the format groups 2, 3, and 4 to the following column widths:

Colum

Save your enColumns screen. If message "Do you want to create them?" appears, press Enter.

Execute the report (Report → Execute). The report has to be exesince the report definition has changed. This can be executed directly from Report Writer, or alternatively from the flexible

1

1

n width

Format group 2 20

Format group 3 8

Format group 4 12


*1-8 riter, display the following information: Using Report W

Do not CHANGE any settings, unless instructed in the exercise. These settings are used in other reports within the system.

-8-1 Display your report in Report Writer.

1-8-2 Display the rows of the report and display the set of the row block.

1-8-3 Display the columns of the report and display the set of the column block.

1-8-4 isplay the text of your report.

1-8-5 Display the header of the report.

1

D

The extensive functionality of Report Writer is covered in CA710-Advanced Functions of the Report Writer, a 3 day course.







These requm





Incoming

O OrdeQuanti

Average SalePric

rders Incoming

r ty

s e

******Total Organization 540000 100 5400***** Sales Organization Germany 1540000 00 5400**** Direct Sales 420000 80 5250*** Pumps 105000 35 3000** Northern Germany 105000 35 3000* Becker Berlin 65000 25 2600 Pump cast steel 25000 5 5000 Pump standard 49000 20 2450 PVC – custom 1000 20 50* Minerva Energy 31000 10 3100 Pump cast steel 11000 5 2200 Pump chrome 20000 5 4000*** Motorcycles 3 715000 45 000** Northern Germany 40000 40 525* Becker Berlin 40000 40 525 HD Brake system 30000 20 150 HD Helmet 10000 20 500** Southern Germany * Crystal Clear SAPSOTA Fun Driver **** Service *** Pumps ** Northern Germany * Becker Berlin 1 Year Service Spare Parts Contract *** Motorcycles ** Southern Germany * Crystal Clear 1 Year Service

mation level. follows:

rganization Channel

* Sold-to Party

The lowest level of detail for this report is Material.

* Asterisks indicate the sumThe summation levels are as***** Sales O**** Distribution*** Division ** Sales District




2-1-2 Using the standard analysis, determine which SAP information structure provides this information.

Note: For the next exercises, we will use the evaluation structure with the same name, which was generated automatically with the information structure.

2-1-3 Is the key figure Average Selling Price in the evaluation structure?

2-1-4 U

E

• should be calculated

hen executing the

• Do not include the evaluation in a transport request.

2-1-5 Execute your evaluation. You must regenerate the report group. Accept the default set names. There is an exercise using sets later on.

sing the evaluation structure S003, create the evaluation EV##, valuation 1 for group ##.

• Select the characteristics you listed above. Ensure that they are in the order specified by the summation levels.

• Select the key figures you listed above. Note that you can select only two of the three key figures in the report from the evaluation structure. Create a new key figure called ASP. The formula as follows: Incoming Orders / Incoming Orders Quantity

• Save your evaluation. The report will be generated wreport for the first time.


2-2

2-2-1 Scroll throughout your report using the page up and page down buttons. On what page does the data start?


2-2-2 Display the key and description of the characteristics on each row. Also

change the column width to 45 to accommodate both fields.

Change the summation levels to show totals for sales organization, distribution channel, and division. Change the summation levels back.

2-2-3

The level number corresponds to the number of asterisks in the summation level row. Level 6 is the total for this report.

-2-4 Display only those lines whose incoming orders are over 5000.

2-2-5 again. Highlight those rows whose incoming orders are over 10000 by displaying them in red. Afterwards, deactivate the threshold value condition.

-2-6 Sort the report in ascending order by incoming orders.

Enter text on the title page. Include the date and time the report was output. Make sure you save the text. Display your new text.

2-2-8 Exit the report. Do not save the settings. Do not save the report as an extract.

2

Display all rows

2

2-2-7


2-3 ith the same information as above. This report is a parison between last period and the prior period, for the above information.

his report layout is as follows:

ng g

tity A al

Management has another report wcomT

Incomi Orders Incomin Orders Quan

verage S es Price

Current P Cur Prev C Prerevious rent ious urrent vious******Total Organization 540000 540000 100 100 5400 5400***** Sales Organization 1 1Germany

540000 540000 00 00 5400 5400

**** Direct Sales 420000 420000 80 80 5250 5250*** Pumps 1 105000 05000 35 35 3000 3000** Northern Germany 1 1 3 305000 05000 5 5 3000 3000* Becker Berlin 65000 65000 25 25 2600 2600 Pump cast steel 2 2 50 505000 5000 5 5 00 00 Pump standard 49000 49000 20 20 2450 2450 PVC – custom 1000 1000 2 20 0 50 50* Minerva Energy 31000 31000 1 10 0 3100 3100 Pump cast steel 11000 11000 5 5 2200 2200 Pump chrome 20000 20000 5 5 4 4000 000*** Motorcycles 3 3 7 715000 15000 45 45 000 000** Northern Germany 40000 40000 40 40 525 525* Becker Berlin 40000 40000 40 40 525 525 HD Brake system 30000 30000 2 20 0 150 150 HD Helmet 10000 10000 2 20 0 500 500** Southern Germany 275000 275000 5 5 55000 55000* Crystal Clear 5 5275000 275000 5 5 5000 5000 SAPSOTA Fun 2 2 5 575000 75000 5 5 5000 5000**** Service 1 120000 20000 20 20 6000 6000*** Pumps 20000 20000 10 10 2000 2000** Northern Germany 1 120000 20000 0 0 2000 2000* Becker Berlin 1 120000 20000 0 0 2000 2000 1 Year Service 10000 10000 5 5 2000 2000 Spare Parts 10000 10000 5 5 2000 2000*** Motorcycles 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000** Northern Germany 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000* Crystal Clear 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000 1 Year Service 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000

The lowest level of detail for this report is Material. The summation level structures are the same as the previous report.


2-3-1 n structure as above, S003, create a new evaluation

•

• se 2 columns. Use "Layout control"

Execute your evaluation for the current month and the previous month. You must select to regenerate the report group.

-3-3 What is different about the selection screen for this report?

2-3-4 What is different about the display of this report?

*2-4

-4-1 Send the report to yourself from within the report via express office mail.


Using the same evaluatiothat will perform this period comparison. You must add the characteristic Month to facilitate this.

• Create a new evaluation: EW##, evaluation 2 for group ##. Use the evaluation already created above as a model.

Add Month to your list of characteristics. You can attach it to the end of the list.

Change the characteristic type from "Month" to "type 1" - Comparison of characteristic per key figure. Chooto get an idea of what the report will look like. Save your evaluation. Do not include it in a transport request.

2-3-2

2


2

2-4-2



• Maintain additional selection options in the flexible analyses, using sets and set hierarchies


on these

are not available in flexible analysis, so you must set up another reporting structure using sets to reflect the same reporting

2-5 ividual sales district lines in

st first set

The result and layout of the flexible analyses is a top priority for management. They would like to see some hierarchical reports basedthe reporting nodes you set up for standard analysis. Unfortunately,hierarchies

hierarchy.

You again want to perform an analysis based on groups of sales districts, this time using flexible analysis. You want to replace the indyour report with the groups as defined below. In order to do this, you muup sets of sales districts. Your reporting structure:

Germany USA

NorthernGermanyDE0010

SouthernGermany DE0015

USA Westernregion US0020

EasternGermany DE0025

WesternGermany DE0020

USA Northernregion US0010

USA Midwestregion US0015

NorthernFranceFR0010

France

USA Easternregion

US0025

EasternFranceFR0025

WesternFrance FR0020

SouthernFranceFR0015

Mexico

Region 3 MX0020

Region 1 MX0010

Region 2 MX0015

Region 4 MX0025


2-5-1 Create a basic set corresponding to

- prises the

- stricts for group ## as a description.

Enter the four areas for the values listed above. Enter the following data: Select the su d. Save t t.

the above reporting structure.

Create a basic set District-## for table S003, which comranges above.

- Create the set using a sales district, field name BZIRK.

Enter Di

-

ppress indicator so only the set totals are displayehe se

No. From value


001 DE0000 DE9999 Germany X

002 FR0000 FR9999 France X

003 US0000 US9999 USA X

004 MX0000 MX9999 Mexico X

2-5-2 Execute your flexible analysis for your original Set ID District-##.

report using your

2-5-3 What do you notice about your new report?


*2-6 rt to show the complete hierarchy of your sales districts. In

2-6-1 Germany-##, France-##, USA-## and Mexico-##. Do NOT select the suppress indicator. This will allow you to see the details of each sales district.

2-6-2

our value lines should be as follows:

You now want the repoother words, you want to see the subtotals for each group of sales districts AND the total for each district.

Create a basic set for each group of districts. Name the sets

Create a single set All-Districts-##, containing the four basic sets you created above.

Y

No. Set ID Short text SI

001 Germany-## y German

002 France-## France

003 USA-## USA

004 Mexico-## Mexico

Do NOT select the suppress indicators in this set.

-6-3 Execute the flexible analysis using your new single set All-Districts-##.

2-6-4 What difference(s) do you notice in this report?

2




• Find and enhance LIS evaluations in Report Writer


, Report Writer. Your task is to identify how the Report Writer is used in LIS and whether you can make use of all Report Writer functionality.

2-7

Execute the evaluation EW##, the comparison analysis created previously. Specify last month and year, and prior month and year.

2-7-2 C te the following information:

Your company is also using SAP’s reporting tool

Identify the links between LIS and Report Writer.

2-7-1

omple

Table

Library

Report

Report group


2-7-3 What column widths have been defined for the available format groups?

Colum width n

Format group 1

Format group 2

Format group 3

Format group 4

Format group 5


2-7-4 Can variable column widths be assigned in flexible analysis?

2-7-5 Identify the current format groups assigned in your report.


2-7-6

1. .

5. the key figures: (Field FGr).

Change the format group definition of the report in the Report Writer. Follow these steps.

Access Report Writer by changing the definition of your report Extras → Change definition.




Assign the following form

at groups to

Incoming orders Format group 2


ASP Format group 4


7. cuted

analysis.

8. Press [Yes] when asked "Regenerate report group?"

-7-7 Check that the format groups have been assigned.

-7-8 Change the format groups 2, 3, and 4 to the following column widths:

Colum



2

2

n width

Print class 2 20

Print class 3 8

Print class 4 12


2-8* riter, display the following information: Using Report W


-8-1 Display your report in Report Writer.

-8-2 Display the rows of the report and display the set of the row block.

-8-3 Display the columns of the report and display the set of the column block.

-8-4 Display the texts of the report.

2-8-5 Display the header of the report.

2

2

2

2



Solutions






These requm





Order Quantity

Average Order Value

**** Purchasing organization 4321415 *** IDES Germany 4321415 ** KBB Black Pump 2070 200790 97* Slug for fly wheel 6 688 6736 97

05/1997 87 8439 9706/1997 40 3880 9707/1997 44 4268 9708/1997 76 7372 9709/1997 40 3880 9710/1997 60 5820 9711/1997 57 5529 9712/1997 63 6111 9701/1998 40 3880 9704/1998 141 13677 9705/1998 40 3880 97

* Support base 1 1382 34054 9705/1997 148 14356 9706/1997 142 13774 9707/1997 84 8148 9708/1997 09/1997 10/1997 11/1997 12/1997 01/1998 04/1998 05/1998

** SMP GmbH * Deluxe Gas Tank

05/1997

vel. The s:

urchasing Organization sing Organization

** Vendor * Material

The lowest level of detail for this report is Month.

* Asterisks indicate the summation lesummation levels are as follow**** Total P*** Purcha




Purchasing organization ty Order quanti

Vendor Order value

Material Average

Month

1-1-2 mation

cises we will use the evaluation structure with the same name, which was generated automatically when the information structure was created.

1-1-3

PURCHIS) menu, choose:

tion → Create

on structure: S012

#,

PURCHIS) menu, choose: tion → Create

D• s you listed above. Ensure that they are in the

ristics from the list: Purchasing organization

teristics, they are in alphabetical order you want to see them on the report.

Using the standard analysis, determine which SAP defined inforstructure provides this information.

You can call up this information using S012-Purchasing. Note: For the next exer

Is the key figure "Average" in the evaluation structure?

From the Purchasing Information System (

Flexible analyses → Evalua

Evaluati

[Enter] No. This must be calculated using a formula.

1-1-4 Using the evaluation structure S012, create the evaluation EV#Evaluation 1 for group ##. From the Purchasing Information System (Flexible analyses Evaluation structur

→ Evaluae: S012

Evaluation: EV## Description: Evaluation 1 for group ## [Enter]

o not copy from an existing evaluation. Select the characteristicorder specified by the summation levels. 1. [Characteristics] 2. Select the following characte

Vendor Material Month Note that as you select the characorder, not in the


3.

4. it

f the window.

place "Purchasing organization" ABOVE "Material".

• valuation structure.

ing key figures from the list:

lue

• erage". The formula should be

3. y figure "Average".

lank line. Double-click lick "Order quantity".

ula should be:

5.

6. " n the last column of your report. Click [Key figures].

py] hen executing the

[Save] • Do not include the evaluation in a transport request.

[Copy + close]

If necessary, move "Purchasing organization" to the top of the list by double-clicking the heading "Characteristics" or double-clickif it is already at the top of the list. In the window that appears, double-click "Sales organization", which will then turn blue. Thenselect "Material" and click [Move] at the bottom oThis will

5. Move "Vendor" above "Material" in the same way. Double-click"Vendor". Click "Material" once. Click [Move].

6. [Copy] Select the key figures you listed above. Note that you can select only two of the three key figures in the report from the e

1. [Key figures]

2. Select the follow

Order quantity

Order va

3. [Copy + close]

4. [Copy] Create a new key figure called "Avcalculated as follows: Order value / Order quantity

1. Click "Order quantity" once.

2. Choose [Insert formula] or Edit → Insert Formula

Enter the name of your ke

4. Enter your formula. Tab to the first be". Enter ‘/’ to divide. Double-c"Order valu

Your form

'S012-NETWR'/'S012-MENGE'

[Copy].

You must now change the order of your key figures so "Averageappears iMove "Order value" above "Average". Double-click "Order quantity", turning it blue. Click "Average" once. Click [Move].

7. [Co• Save your evaluation. The report will be generated w

report for the first time.


1-1-5 up. Accept the

low arrow.

tion structure S012 and your evaluation EV## should appear.

ow be generated. You will see a series of generating… messages. These only provide information.

ction screen, choose purchasing organization 1000 and a lete the set names specified for this

ther default set names.

1-2

1-2-1 the page up and page down buttons. On es the data start?

1-2-2 oth fields.

ut → Tab: Lead column

ion

: Width = 45

1-2-3 ls for total organizations, nge the summation levels back.

out → Tab: Rows terval:

2

[Continue]

Execute your evaluation. You must regenerate the report grodefault set names. There is a future exercise using sets.

Exit from the create transaction using the yel

Flexible analyses → Evaluation → Execute

The evalua

[Execute]

Your report will nand compiling…

Click [Execute].

In the selematerial range of M-01 to M-20. Deselection.

Accept all o

[Execute]


Scroll throughout your report using what page do

On page 2.

Display the key and description of the characteristics on each row. Also change the column width to 45 to accommodate b

Settings → Report layo

[Define report layout]

Contents: Key and descript

Lead column

[Continue] Change the summation levels to show totapurchasing organization, and vendor. ChaSettings → Report laySummation inFrom level To level 4

The level number corresponds to the number of asterisks in the summation level row. Level 4 is the number for this report.

original display: terval:

To level 99

To change back to theSummation inFrom level 0


1-2-4

lue condition:

lumn 1 Order value

1-2-5 gain. Highlight those rows whose incoming orders are them in red. Afterwards, deactivate the threshold

10000

lected rows (red)"

back to the original display:

old value

1-2-6

column once.

organization, the

1-2-7 e the date and time the report was output. play your new text.

nt to generate further lines, select the first line and

riable] and the required variable t width to display the text variables.

Scroll to the start of the report. Your text is displayed here.

Display only those lines whose order values are over 10000. → Threshold value Edit

Threshold vaActive Condition >

Threshold value 10000

Reference co

[Continue] Display all rows aover 10000 by displayingvalue condition.

Edit → Threshold value

Threshold value

[Display extras]

Select "Highlight se

[Continue]

To deactivate, or change

Edit → Thresh

Click [Active]

[Continue] Sort the report in ascending order, by "Order value".

Select "Order value" by clicking the

Edit → Sorting → Ascending

The report will be hierarchically sorted, meaning first the purchasing organizations will be sorted. Within each purchasing vendors will be sorted. Within each vendor, the materials will be sorted, and so on, down to the month within each material.

Enter text on the title page. IncludMake sure you save the text. Dis

Settings → Texts → Title page

Enter a text. If you wachoose [Insert line] or Edit → Insert line.

Select as variable type: [General text vaname. For the format, enter a sufficien

[Save] the text when you are finished.


1-2-8 Exit from the report. Do not save the settings. Do not save the report as an extract.

Management has another report with the same information as above. This report is a comparison between the current period and the prior period, for the above information. This report layout is as follows:

Order quantity v Average Order alue

Current Previous Current Previous Current Previous *** Purchasing organization 4 4 321415 321415 ** IDES Germany 4 4 321415 321415 * KBB Black Pump 12070 2070 200790 200790 194 94 Slug for fly wheel 688 688 66736 66736 97 97 Support base 1382 1382 134054 134054 97 97

1-3-1 n perform this period comparison. Create a new evaluation: EW##,

evaluation 2 for group ##mo

PURCHIS) menu, choose:

tion → Create

e: S012

• 2 columns. Use "Layout control" to

ick "Month".

n of char. per key figure."

olumns.

→ Layout → Layout control

e]

1-3-2

low arrow.

alyses → Evaluation → Execute

ow be generated.

Click [Execute].

Using the same evaluation structure as above, S012, create a new evaluatiothat will

. Use the evaluation already created above as a del.

From the Purchasing Information System (


Evaluation structur

Evaluation: EW##

Description: Comparison for group ##

Copy the data from reference evaluation: EV##.

Change the characteristic type of "Month" to "type 1" - Comparison of characteristic per key figure. Chooseget an idea of what the report will look like. Save your evaluation. Do not include it in a transport request.

1. Click "Month" once, then [Type]. Or double-cl

2. Select "Compariso

3. Enter 2 c

4. [Copy]

5. [Layout control] or Edit

6. [Continu

7. [Save] Execute your evaluation for the current month and the prior month. You must select to regenerate the report group.


Flexible an

[Execute]

Your report will n


1-3-3

for two months. Enter the following data: revious month and year.

efault set names.

1-3-4

There are two lines in the column headings to allow for the comparison of figure.

*1-4

1-4-1 e report via express office mail.

to save the selected data?"

do not specify a password.

ecipient.

).

1-4-2

e

].

report, you must re-execute it by

Press the green arrow until you return to your original report.

What is different about the selection screen for this report?

The selection screen now askscurrent month and year, and p

Accept the d

[Execute]. What is different about the display of this report?

characteristics (month) per key


Send the report to yourself from within th

Press [Send report] or Report → Send.

Press [Yes] when asked "Do you want

Enter a description, if you would like.

For this exercise,

Press [ENTER].

Enter a note, if you would like.

Enter your user name LO930-## as the r

Select [Express mail] (lightening icon

Press [Send] or Document → Send. Read the e-mail you just received. In order to receive the "express mail," press [Enter]. You may need to press [Enter] a second time.

When the "express mail" message appears, click [Inbox]. This will takyou into your mailbox.

Select [Unviewed documents] or [Documents].

Double-click your message. Accept your note, if you would like, by clicking [Enter]. You may have to select the tab [Document contents

Note that to see the results of yourclicking [Execute].






on these

are not available in flexible analysis, so you must set up another reporting structure using sets to reflect the same reporting hierarchy.

1-5 rs by region, this time using flexible analysis. You want to replace the vendors in your report with the vendor regions as defined below. Your reporting structure:

Europe


Once again, you want to perform an analysis based on vendo

Germany Great Britain

North South

1000 1001 1004

1012 1002 008 1

1014 1003

015 1 1005

1006

1010

1011

1020


1-5-1 tinct range of vendors, you first need to create a basic

-

- Cre

URCHIS) menu, choose:

luation → Execute

ou need to search for the table, be sure to select the search range.

e field name LIFNR (Vendor).

You can als

- Do NOT enter the ndor text. Do

t s e sup ca

Since there is no disset of all vendors in Southern Germany that corresponds to the above reporting structure.

Create a basic set SGermany-## that only includes the vendors in Southern Germany. Table S012.

ate the set using vendors, field name LIFNR.

From the Purchasing Information System (P

Flexible analyses → Eva

Tools → Sets → Create

Set ID: SGermany-##

Table: S012. If y"Reporting" in

Set type: Basic

[Enter]

Specify th

[Enter]. - Enter Southern Germany-## as a description.

o enter the description in the header data. No additional data is needed in the header.

Enter the vendors, using the following entries. short text of the line, since this no

will override the vetor. Save the set.

’select th press indi

No. From value


001 1001

002 1002

003 1003

004 1005

005 1006

006 1010

007 1011

008 1020

Choose [Values] or Goto maintenance scree

→ Values to call up the appropriate n.

e values.

[Save]

Enter th


1-5-2 Create a basic set com any. Name


prising of the vendors in Northern Germthe set NGermany-##.

- Enter Northern Germany-## as a description.


No. From value


001 1000

002 1012

003 1014

004 1015

Create a basic set com1-5-3 me the set


prising of the vendors in Great Britain. NaGB-##.

- Enter Great Britain-## as a description.


No. From value


001 1004

002 1008

1-6

e vendors from Northern and Southern e the set Germany-##.

n

-

Subordinate sets ppropriate in screen.

To include the created sets in the predefined hierarchical structure, you need to create a further two single sets.

1-6-1 Create a single set containing thGermany. Nam

[E ter]

- Enter Germany-## as a description.

Enter the following data: → Choose

maGoto

tenance to call up the a


001 NGermany-## Northern Germany-##

002 SGermany-## Southern Germany-##

[Save]


1-6-2 Create a single set containing the vendors from Germany and

ame the set Europe-##.

-

Choose scre

Great Britain. N

[Enter] - Enter Europe-## as a description.

Enter the following data: Goto

en. → Subordinate sets to call up the appropriate maintenance


001 Germany-## Germany-##

002 GB-## Great Britain-##

[Save]

1-6-3 ##.

URCHIS) menu, choose

tion → Execute

e: S012

: EV##

et name for Vendors with your new single set .

mmation levels will be

iew → Line hierarchy → Expand all

1-6-4

2. The report now shows six summation levels instead of the four levels in the previous reports.

Execute your flexible analysis EV-## using your new single set Europe-

From the Purchasing Information System (P


Evaluation structur

Evaluation

[Execute]

Replace the default sEurope-##

[Execute]

If you expand the report fully, the number of sudisplayed.

V

What difference(s) do you notice in this report?

1. Subtotals are displayed for the individual regions.




t Writer



r. Your task is to identify the relationship between Report Writer and LIS and whether you can make use of all Report Writer functionality.

1-7

1-7-1 eated previously. month and current year.

nd current year. 1-7-2 n for your analysis:

E → Technical information

Your company is also using SAP’s reporting tool, Report Write


Execute the evaluation EW##, the comparison analysis crSpecify the current month and year, and prior


Specify the current month and year, and prior month aComplete the following informatio

xtras

Table S012

Library 3AJ

Report 23AJEW##

Report group Depending on system assignment


1-7-3

→ Report layout → Tab: Columns → ther format groups]

wid

What column widths have been defined for the available format groups?

For information on the column widths assigned to the format groups, choose:

Settings [O

Columnth

Format group 1 15

Format group 2 15

Format group 3 10

Format group 4 8

Format group 5 0


1-7-4

t group

1-7-5

e column with the cursor, then choose

e selected key

ormat group 0 corresponds to a column width of 15.

Can variable column widths be assigned in flexible analysis?

The width in the format group can be changed, however the formaassigned to the columns is defined in the Report Writer. Identify the current format groups assigned in your report.

Select the appropriate key figur

Settings → Column attributes

The title bar now displays the active format group for thfigure column.

F


1-7-6

1. .

5. the key figures: (Field FGr).

y


Access Report Writer by changing the definition of your report Extras → Definition → Change





at groups to

Order quantit Format group 2

Order value Format group 3

Average Format group 4


7. cuted

analysis.

up?"

1-7-7


1-7-8

Settings → Column attr ed for each key figure column)

Colum idth

Save your enColumns screen. If message "Do you want to activate them?" appears, press Enter.


8. Press [Yes] when asked "Regenerate report gro

Check that the format groups have been assigned.



The title bar now displays the active format group for the selected key figure column.

Change the format groups 2, 3, and 4 to the following column widths:

ibutes (Chang

n w

Format group 2 20

Format group 3 8

Format group 4 12

For all key figure columns:

Settings → Report layout → Tab: Columns → [Other format groups]




1-8-1

1-8-2 d display the set of the row block.

→ Display

1-8-3 s of the report and display the set of the column block.

→

are detailed. 1-8-4 ts of the report.

are displayed. 1-8-5

Goto → Header

Display your report in Report Writer.

Access Report Writer by displaying the definition of your report. Extras → Definition → Display. Display the rows of the report an

Choose Goto → Row overview.

Click Row block once, and then choose [Display set], or Edit set.

The characteristics of your report are detailed. Display the column

Goto → Columns

Click Column block once, and then choose [Display set], or Edit Display set.

The key figures of your report Display the tex

Goto → Texts

The texts specified in your report

Display the header of the report.








These requm





Incoming

O OrdeQuanti

Average SalePric

rders Incoming

r ty

s e

******Total Organization 540000 100 5400***** Sales Organization Germany 1540000 00 5400**** Direct Sales 420000 80 5250*** Pumps 105000 35 3000** Northern Germany 105000 35 3000* Becker Berlin 65000 25 2600 Pump cast steel 25000 5 5000 Pump standard 49000 20 2450 PVC – custom 1000 20 50* Minerva Energy 31000 10 3100 Pump cast steel 11000 5 2200 Pump chrome 20000 5 4000*** Motorcycles 3 715000 45 000** Northern Germany 40000 40 525* Becker Berlin 40000 40 525 HD Brake system 30000 20 150 HD Helmet 10000 20 500** Southern Germany * Crystal Clear SAPSOTA Fun Driver **** Service *** Pumps ** Northern Germany * Becker Berlin 1 Year Service Spare Parts Contract *** Motorcycles ** Southern Germany * Crystal Clear 1 Year Service

mation level. follows:

rganization Channel

* Sold-to Party

The lowest level of detail for this report is Material.

* Asterisks indicate the sumThe summation levels are as***** Sales O**** Distribution*** Division ** Sales District




Sales organization Incoming orders

Distribution channel Incoming order quantity

Division Average Selling Price (ASP)

Sales district

Sold-to party

Material

2-1-2

cises we will use the evaluation structure with the same name, which was generated automatically when the information structure was created.

2-1-3 cture?

enu, choose:

tion → Create

on structure: S003

No. This must be calculated using a formula.

Using the standard analysis, determine which SAP defined information structure provides this information.

You can call up this information using S003 Sales Organization. Note: For the next exer

Is the key figure Average Selling Price in the evaluation stru

From the Sales Information System (SIS) m


Evaluati

[Enter]


2-1-4

enu, choose:

tion → Create

e: S003

ion: Evaluation 1 for group ##

D• ove. Ensure that they are in the

ummation levels.

aracteristics from the list:

channel

teristics, they are in alphabetical order you want to see them on the report.

4.

en old-to party" once. Click [Move] at the bottom of the

the same way until they are in the lined above.

• key figures you listed above. Note that you can select only the report from the evaluation

ey figures from the list:

quantity

close]

Using the evaluation structure S003, create the evaluation EV##, Evaluation 1 for group ##.



Evaluation structur

Evaluation: EV##

Descript

[Enter]

o not copy from an existing evaluation. Select the characteristics you listed aborder specified by the s

1. [Characteristics]

2. Select the following ch

Sales organization

Distribution

Division

Sales district

Sold-to party

Material

Note that as you select the characorder, not in the

3. [Copy + close]

Move "Sales organization" to the top of the list by double-clicking the heading, "Characteristics". In the window that appears, double-click "Sales organization", which will then turn blue. Thclick "Swindow. This will place "Sales organization" ABOVE "Sold-to party".

5. Move all other characteristics in order out

6. [Copy] Select the two of the three key figures in structure.

1. [Key figures]

2. Select the following k

Incoming orders

Incoming orders

3. [Copy +

4. [Copy]


• The formula should be calculated

2.

3.

ine. Double-click g orders". Enter ‘/’ to divide. Double-click "Incoming

5.

6. hange the order of your key figures so ASP n the last column of your report. Click [Key figures].

py] hen executing the

report for the first time.

2-1-5 the report group. Accept the

the create transaction using the yellow arrow.


nly provide information.

es organization 1000 in the selection screen. Delete the set names specified for this selection.

Accept all other default set names.

[Execute]

Create a new key figure called ASP.as follows: Incoming Orders / Incoming Orders Quantity

1. Click "Orders quantity" once.

Choose [Insert formula] or Edit → Insert Formula

Enter the name of your key figure "ASP".

4. Enter your formula. Tab to the first blank l"Incominorders quantity". Your formula should be:

'S003-AENETWR'/'S003-AEMENGE'

[Copy].

You must now cappears iMove "Incoming orders quantity" above "ASP". Double-click "Incoming orders quantity", turning it blue. Click "ASP" once. Click [Move].

7. [Co• Save your evaluation. The report will be generated w

[Save] • Do not include the evaluation in a transport request.

Execute your evaluation. You must regeneratedefault set names. There is an exercise using sets later on.

Exit from

Flexible an

The evaluation structure S003 and your evaluation EV## should now appear.

[Execute]

Your report will now be generated. You will see a series of generating…and compiling… messages. These o

Click [Execute].

Choose sal


2-2

2-2-1 hout your report using the page up and page down buttons. On es the data start?

2-2-2 oth fields.

ut → Tab: Lead column

ion

: Width = 45

2-2-3 he summation levels back.

out → Tab: [Rows]

terval:

3

[Continue]


Scroll througwhat page do

On page 2. Display the key and description of the characteristics on each row. Also change the column width to 45 to accommodate b

Settings → Report layo

[Define report layout]

Contents: Key and descript

Lead column

[Continue] Change the summation levels to show totals for sales organization, distribution channel, and division. Change t

Settings → Report lay

Summation in

From level

To level 5

The level number corresponds to the number of asterisks in the summation level row. Level 6 is the number for this report.

original display:

terval:

2-2-4 hose incoming orders are over 5000.

ld value condition:

1 Incoming orders

[Continue]

To change back to the

Summation in

From level 0

To level 99 Display only those lines w

Edit → Threshold value

Thresho

Active

Condition >

Threshold value 5000

Ref. column


2-2-5 again. Highlight those rows whose incoming orders are them in red. Afterwards, deactivate the threshold

d value

lected rows (red)"

back to the original display:

ld value

2-2-6

ing the column once.

n channels will be sorted. Within each distribution channel, the

2-2-7 e the date and time the report was output. play your new text.

t

le th to display the text

2-2-8 the report. Do not save the settings. Do not save the report as an extract.

Display all rows over 10000 by displayingvalue condition.

Edit → Threshol

[Display extras]

Select "Highlight se

[Continue]

To deactivate, or change

Edit → Thresho

Click [Active].

[Continue]

Sort the report in ascending order, by incoming orders.

Select incoming orders by click

Edit → Sorting → Ascending

The report will be hierarchically sorted, which means that first the sales organizations will be sorted. Within each sales organization, the distributiodivisions will be sorted, and so on, down to the material within each sold-to party. Enter text on the title page. IncludMake sure you save the text. Dis

Settings → Texts → Title page

Enter a text. To create additional lines, select the first line and use [Inserlines] or Edit → Insert line.

Select as variable type: [General text variable] and the required variabname. For the format, enter a sufficient widvariables.

[Save] the text when you are finished.

Scroll to the start of the report. Your text is displayed here. Exit from


2-3 information as above. This report is a parison between the current period and the prior period, for the above

formation. This report layout is as follows:

ng ng

tity A al

Management has another report with the samecomin

Incomi Orders Incomi Order Quan

verage S es Price

Current P Cur Prev C Prerevious rent ious urrent vious******Total Organization 540000 540000 100 100 5400 5400***** Sales Organization 1 1Germany

540000 540000 00 00 5400 5400

**** Direct Sales 420000 420000 80 80 5250 5250*** Pumps 1 105000 05000 35 35 3000 3000** Northern Germany 1 1 3 305000 05000 5 5 3000 3000* Becker Berlin 65000 65000 25 25 2600 2600 Pump cast steel 2 2 50 505000 5000 5 5 00 00 Pump standard 49000 49000 20 20 2450 2450 PVC – custom 1000 1000 2 20 0 50 50* Minerva Energy 31000 31000 1 10 0 3100 3100 Pump cast steel 11000 11000 5 5 2200 2200 Pump chrome 20000 20000 5 5 4 4000 000*** Motorcycles 3 3 7 715000 15000 45 45 000 000** Northern Germany 40000 40000 40 40 525 525* Becker Berlin 40000 40000 40 40 525 525 HD Brake system 30000 30000 2 20 0 150 150 HD Helmet 10000 10000 2 20 0 500 500** Southern Germany 275000 275000 5 5 55000 55000* Crystal Clear 5 5275000 275000 5 5 5000 5000 SAPSOTA Fun 2 2 5 575000 75000 5 5 5000 5000**** Service 1 120000 20000 20 20 6000 6000*** Pumps 20000 20000 10 10 2000 2000** Northern Germany 1 120000 20000 0 0 2000 2000* Becker Berlin 1 120000 20000 0 0 2000 2000 1 Year Service 10000 10000 5 5 2000 2000 Spare Parts 10000 10000 5 5 2000 2000*** Motorcycles 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000** Northern Germany 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000* Crystal Clear 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000 1 Year Service 100000 100000 10 10 10000 10000

The lowest level of detail for this report is Material. The summation level structures are the same as the previous report.


2-3-1 n structure as above, S003, create a new evaluation

• . Use the

enu, choose:

tion → Create

e: S003

• it to the end of

ristics], then [Selection list].

lose]

• 2 columns. Use "Layout control" to

ick "Month".

n of char. per key figure."

olumns.

→ Layout → Layout control

e]

7. [Save]

Using the same evaluatiothat will perform this period comparison. You must add the characteristic Month to facilitate this.

Create a new evaluation: EW##, evaluation 2 for group ##evaluation already created above as a model.



Evaluation structur

Evaluation: EW##

Description: Comparison for group ##

Copy the data from reference evaluation: EV##

Add Month to your list of characteristics. You can attach the list.

1. Click [Characte

2. Select Month

3. [Copy + c

4. [Copy]

Change the characteristic type of "Month" to "type 1" - Comparison of characteristic per key figure. Chooseget an idea of what the report will look like. Save your evaluation. Do not include it in a transport request.

1. Click "Month" once, then [Type]. Or double-cl

2. Select "Compariso

3. Enter 2 c

4. [Copy]

5. [Layout control] or Edit

6. [Continu


2-3-2

low arrow.


ow be generated.

2-3-3

o months. Enter the following data: revious month and current year.

efault set names.

2-3-4

There are two lines in the column headings to allow for the comparison of characteristics (month) per key figure.

Execute your evaluation for the current month and the prior month. You must select to regenerate the report group.


Flexible an

[Execute]

Your report will n

Click [Execute]. What is different about the selection screen for this report?

The selection screen now asks for twcurrent month and year, and p

Accept the d

[Execute]. What is different about the display of this report?


*2-4

2-4-1 e report via express office mail.

to save the selected data?"

do not specify a password.

ecipient.

).

2-4-2

e

report, you must re-execute it by

Press the green arrow until you return to your original report.


Send the report to yourself from within th

Press [Send report] or Report → Send.

Press [Yes] when asked "Do you want

Enter a description, if you would like.

For this exercise,

Press [ENTER].

Enter a note, if you would like.

Enter your user name LO930-## as the r

Select [Express mail] (lightening icon

Press [Send] or Document → Send.


When the "express mail" message appears, click [Inbox]. This will takyou into your mailbox.

Select [Unviewed documents] or [Documents].

Accept your note, by double-clicking it or by clicking [Enter]. You may have to select the tab [Document contents].

Note that to see the results of yourclicking [Execute].






on these

are not available in flexible analysis, so you must set up another reporting structure using sets to reflect the same reporting hierarchy.

2-5 ividual sales district lines in


You again want to perform an analysis based on groups of sales districts, this time using flexible analysis. You want to replace the indyour report with the groups as defined below. In order to do this, you must first set up sets of sales districts. Your reporting structure:

Germany USA

NorthernGermanyDE0010

SouthernGermany DE0015

USA Westernregion US0020

EasternGermany DE0025

WesternGermany DE0020

USA Northernregion US0010

USA Midwestregion US0015

NorthernFranceFR0010

France

USA Easternregion

US0025

EasternFranceFR0025

WesternFrance FR0020

SouthernFranceFR0015

Mexico

Region 3 MX0020

Region 1 MX0010

Region 2 MX0015

Region 4 MX0025


2-5-1

- prises the

-

nu, choose:

luation → Execute

eate

the search range.

e field name BZIRK (Sales district).

der data.

- he values listed above. Enter the following data: Select the suppress indicator so only the set totals are displayed. Save the set.

Create a basic set corresponding to the above reporting structure.

Create a basic set District-## for table S003, which comranges above.

Create the set using a sales district, field name BZIRK.

From the Sales Information System (SIS) me

Flexible analyses → Eva

Tools → Sets → Cr

Set ID: District-##

Table: S003. If you need to search for the table, be sure to select "Reporting" in

Set type: Basic

[Enter]

Specify th

[Enter].

- Enter Districts for group ## as a description.

You can also enter the description in the hea

No additional data is needed in the header. Enter the four areas for t

No. From value


001 DE0000 DE9999 Germany X

002 FR0000 FR9999 France X

003 US0000 US9999 USA X

004 MX0000 MX9999 Mexico X

Choose [Values] or Goto maintenance screen.

→ Values to call up the appropriate

e four ranges.

[Save]

Enter th


2-5-2

nu, choose

tion → Execute

e: S003

: EV##

et name for "Sales district" with your new basic set .

2-5-3

The sales district has been replaced with the short text of the set line.

Execute your flexible analysis for your original report using your Set ID District-##.

From the Sales Information System (SIS) me


Evaluation structur

Evaluation

[Execute]

Replace the default sDistrict-##

[Execute] What do you notice about your new report?


*2-6 rt to show the complete hierarchy of your sales districts. In

2-6-1 Germany-##, . Do NOT select the suppress indicator. of each sales district.

→ Report Painter → Report te

any-##

names, be sure to select Reporting in the search range.


T as en a

ue of set line I

You now want the repoother words, you want to see the subtotals for each group of sales districts AND the total for each district.

Create a basic set for each group of districts. Name the sets France-##, USA-## and Mexico-##This will allow you to see the details

From the main R/3 menu, choose:

→ Ad Hoc Reports Information Systems Writer → Set → Crea

Set ID: Germ

Table: S003

To search table

Set type: Basic

[Enter]

Specify th

[Enter].

Description: Germany

Choose [Values] or Goto → Values to call up the appropriate maintenance screen.

he b ic entries scre should be s follows:

No. From val To value Short text S

001 DE0000 DE9999 Germany

[Save]

Set ID: France-##


T as en et

ue t of set line I

Table: S003

Set type: Basic

[Enter]

Specify th

[Enter].

Description: France

Choose [Values] or Goto → Values to call up the appropriate maintenance screen.

he b ic entries scre for this s should be as follows:

No. From val To value Short tex S

001 FR0000 FR9999 France

[Save]

Perform the same steps for USA and Mexico.


2-6-2 C a et All-Dc d

Your value lines should be as follows:

text

reate single s istricts-##, containing the four basic sets you reate above.

No. Set ID Short SI

001 Germany-## Germany

002 France-## France

003 USA-## USA

004 Mexico-## Mexico

Do ress indicators in this set.

ll-Districts-##

Single set

ion: All districts

2-6-3 using your new single set All-Districts-##.

rmation System (SIS) menu, choose


V##

ith your new single set All-

[Ex2-6-4

1. Subtotals are displayed for both the sales district groups and the individual sales districts.

2. The report now shows seven summation levels instead of the six levels in the previous reports.

NOT select the supp

Set ID: A

Table: S003

Set type:

[Enter]

Specify the field name BZIRK (Sales district).

[Enter].

Descript

Enter the four basic sets. Choose Goto → Subordinate sets to call up theappropriate maintenance screen.

[Save]. Execute the flexible analysis

From the Sales Info

Flexible an

Evaluation structure: S003

Evaluation: E

[Execute]

Replace the default set name for sales district wDistricts-##.

ecute] What difference(s) do you notice in this report?




t Writer



, Report Writer. Your task is to identify how the Report Writer is used in LIS and whether you can make use of all Report Writer functionality.

2-7

2-7-1 eated previously. onth and year.

nd prior month and year. 2-7-2 n:

E → Technical information

Your company is also using SAP’s reporting tool


Execute the evaluation EW##, the comparison analysis crSpecify the current month and year, and prior m


Specify the current month and year, aComplete the following informatio

xtras

Table S003

Library 3AE

Report 23AEEW##

Report group Depending on system assignment


2-7-3

→ Report layout → Tab: Columns → ther format groups]

wid

What column widths have been defined for the available format groups?

For information on the column widths assigned to the format groups, choose:

Settings [O

Columnth

Format group 1 15

Format group 2 15

Format group 3 10

Format group 4 8

Format group 5 0


2-7-4

t group

2-7-5


e selected key

ormat group 0 corresponds to a column width of 15.

Can variable column widths be assigned in flexible analysis?

The width in the format group can be changed, however the formaassigned to the columns is defined in Report Writer. Identify the current format groups assigned in your report.



The title bar now displays the active format group for thfigure column.

F


2-7-6

1. .

5. FGr).


Access Report Writer by changing the definition of your report Extras → Definition → Change





at groups to the key figures: (Field

Incoming orders Format group 2


ASP Format group 4


7. cuted

analysis.

up?"

2-7-7

column with the cursor, then choose

2-7-8

Settings → Column at ged for each key figure column)

Colum



8. Press [Yes] when asked "Regenerate report gro

Check that the format groups have been assigned.

Select the appropriate key figure

Settings → Column attributes.

The title bar now displays the active format group for the selected key figure column.

Change the format groups 2, 3, and 4 to the following column widths:

tributes (Chan

n width

Format group 2 20

Format group 3 8

Format group 4 12

For all key figure columns:

→ Report layout Settings → Tab: [Columns] → [Other format groups]




2-8-1

ying the definition of your report.

2-8-2 d display the set of the row block.

→ Display

2-8-3 s of the report and display the set of the column block.

→

are detailed. 2-8-4 ts of the report.

t are displayed. 2-8-5

Goto → Header

Display your report in Report Writer.

Access Report Writer by displa

Extras → Display definition. Display the rows of the report an

Choose Goto → Row overview.

Click Row block once, and then choose [Display set], or Edit set.

The characteristics of your report are detailed. Display the column

Goto → Columns

Click Column block once, and then choose [Display set], or Edit Display set.

The key figures of your report Display the tex

Goto → Texts

The texts specified in your repor

Display the header of the report.



© SAP AG 1999

LIS Environment: Overview


Flexible analysis






FI


This unit describes how LIS data can be transferred to Excel, providing an additional reporting option within the Logistics Information System.


© SAP AG 1999

LIS Environment: Business Scenario

Management would like to view statisticaloverviews in Excel format, as this is their usualbusiness practice.


© SAP AG 1999

Material

M-01M-02M-03

Excel

Ordervalue10,00020,00025,000

9001,000 750


Flexible analysis

Standard analysis

Transfer of LIS Data to Excel

Orderquantity

ready discussed within the early warning systems and

This unit focuses on data transfer from standard analyses to Excel.

You can transfer data to Excel using all the reporting functions alLogistics Information System. Standard analyses, selection versions,flexible analyses provide easy-to-use tools for transferring data.


© SAP AG 1999

Transfer from Standard Analyses to Excel

Material Analysis PURCHIS

Save list in fileUnconverted

Rich text formatSpreadsheet

Choose characteristicsPOrgVendorMaterialMat groupPlantMonth

Export list objectStore in SAPofficeStore as PC fileExcel SAP MacrosExcel displayExcel pivot table

Material

M-01M-02M-03

Excel

Ordervalue10,00020,000

9001,000

25,000 750

Orderquantity

HTML format

Material Ordervalue

Orderquantity

100,000200,000150,000300,000

9001,0002,5002,657

•

M-01M-02M-03M-04

Transfer to XXLSave to PC file

...PrintExportSend...

Material analysis

L ng and

gures transferred are the key figures in the current standard analysis list.

equent editing using another

acros (SAP-XXL List Viewer).

Excel Pivot table: You can display and edit the list using Excel.

You can transfer data from standard analyses (including selection versions and Early Warning System) to Excel in two different ways.

One method is to save the current content of a list locally as an ASCII file using the 'Save to PC file'function with the spreadsheet option. You can then open this file in Excel.

The other option is implemented via the function 'Transfer to XXL'. Data is transferred to the XXinterface in the form of a list object. XXL (Extended Excel) comprises the tools for displayimanipulating list objects from R/3 applications. You first have to define the characteristics to be transferred. The fiDepending on the software installed on your computer, you can use XXL to transfer data to the following media:

SAPoffice: You can save the list object to the SAPoffice inbox. From there you can send the list object or save it in a folder.

PC file: You can save the list object to the local file system for subsdisplay media at your disposal.

Excel display: Table display with all characteristics combinations.

Excel SAP macros: You can display and edit the list using SAP M


© SAP AG 1999

Editing a PC File in Excel

File xyz.xlsMaterial;order val..¶M-01;10000;900¶M-02;20000;1000¶

Graphics

Statistic functionsSumAverageVarianceMinimumMaximum...

Material Ordervalue

Invoicedamount

10,00020,00025,000

10,00019,00026,000

M-01M-02M-03

Calculated key figures Difference

0-1,000+1,000

Material

M-01M-02M-03

Excel

Ordervalue10,00020,00025,000

Invoicedamount10,00019,00026,000

has been created using the standard analysis and the 'Save to PC file' function with the

After you have loaded this file to an Excel worksheet, the complete Excel graphics and statistics functionality is available to you.

When a file'Spreadsheet' option, a semicolon is used as a field delimiter and a new line is created as a recorddelimiter.

The file content consists exclusively of the list contents of the saved standard analysis. It is not possible to transfer several characteristics from one list.


© SAP AG 1999

Graphics

Calculated key figuresNew1 = Invoiced amount - order valueNew2 = ((Invoiced amount - order value)/order value) * 100. . . . . = . . . .

XXL - Excel Display


Material

M-01M-01M-02

XXL Excel display

Ordervalue10,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount10,00019,00026,000

Plant

100011001000

Advantages

All characteristics combinations in onelist

Complete Excel functionality

Pivot table can be created from display

Disadvantage

Characteristics combination cannot bechanged

s transferred using the function 'Excel Display', one characteristic or a

ow. You cannot change it subsequently in Excel. However, you can convert a list created

using the 'Excel Display' function into a Pivot table, where you can change the characteristics sequence.

When an XXL list object icombination of several characteristics are transferred to an Excel worksheet with the associated keyfigures of the current list.

You can edit the contents of this Excel worksheet using the complete Excel graphics and statistics functionality.

However, the sequence of the characteristics is fixed according to their sequence in the transferdialog wind


© SAP AG 1999

XXL - Excel SAP Macros

Graphics Statistic functionsStatistic functionsSumAverageVarianceMinimumMaximum...

SumAverageVarianceMinimumMaximum...

Calculated key figuresCalculated key figuresNew1 = Invoiced amount - order valueNew2 = ((Invoiced amount - order value)/order value) * 100. . . . . = . . . .

New1 = Invoiced amount - order valueNew2 = ((Invoiced amount - order value)/order value) * 100. . . . . = . . . .

Material

M-01

M-02

XXL Excel SAP Macros

Ordervalue10,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount10,00019,00026,000

Plant

100011001000

Advantages

All characteristics combinations in onelist

Sequence of characteristics can bechanged

Separate columns for calculated keyfigures

Disadvantage

Characteristics cannot be removed fromthe list

XXL List Viewer, the Excel macro technique is used to generate a separate worksheet with its own menu and functions. Some of the standard Excel functionality is not supported in this environment.

Another option to transfer data from the standard analysis list to Excel is to use macros. In the SAP-


© SAP AG 1999

XXL - Excel Pivot Table


Calculated key figuresNew1 = Invoiced amount - order valueNew2 = ((Invoiced amount - order value)/order value) * 100. . . . . = . . . .

Material

M-01

M-02

XXL Excel Pivot Table

Ordervalue10,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount10,00019,00026,000

Plant

100011001000

Advantages

Optional layout design

Optional combination and sequence ofcharacteristics

Calculated key figures

Filter functions

Statistics functions

Complete Excel graphics functionality

Deriving several Pivot tables from theoriginal Pivot table

Graphics

are the free selection of for layout design.

The most important functions for Pivot tables are shown in the next slides.

As compared to other transfer options, transfer of an XXL list object to Excel as a Pivot table provides an optimal range of functions. The main advantages of this option characteristics and their sequence and a large number of easy-to-use options


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Optional Layout Design

Material

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount15,00019,00026,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06

Move columnsusing the mouse

MaterialM-01

M-02

XXL Excel Pivot TableDataOrder valueInvcd amnOrder valueInvcd amnOrder valueInvcd amn

Result15,00015,00020,00019,00025,00026,000

Month1998/06

1998/07

1998/06

Material

M-01M-02


Invcdamount15,00026,000

1998/06Ordervalue15,00025,000

Invcdamount19,000. . .

1998/07Ordervalue20,000. . .

MaterialM-01M-02


1998/0720,000. . .

Order value1998/0615,00025,000

1998/0719,000. . .

Invoiced amount1998/0615,00026,000

ur requirements by simply clicking on a

ent of

cteristics combination.

Comparison of the characteristic values for the individual key figures.

You can design the layout in Pivot tables according to yocolumn and moving it.

For example, the following layout options are available:

List of key figures in individual columns. You can use the mouse to change the arrangemkey figures.

All key figures in one column with the key figures for one chara

Comparison of all key figures for the values of a characteristic.


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Characteristics Combination and Sequence

Pivot Table Wizard (after)

Finish

Order value

Month

Material

Invcd amn

Column

DataRow

Month Order value

Invcd amnMaterial

Pivot Table Wizard (before)

Finish

Order value

Month

Material

Invcd amn

Column

DataRowMonth

Order valueMaterialMaterial

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06

Month

1998/06

1998/07


Ordervalue15,00025,00020,000

Invcdamount15,00026,00019,000

Material

M-01M-02M-01

before

after

just the layout in a dialog box. Here you can move characteristics and key figures from a

pool to the appropriate position in a planning board or move them from the planning board back to the pool.

You can interactively change the arrangement of characteristics and key figures using the mouse, oryou can ad


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Calculated Key Figures

Material

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount15,00019,00026,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06 Right mouse button

.....

.....FormulaField.....

Calculated field.....

Insert calculated fieldName Diff1Formula = Invoiced amount - order value

Create

DeleteMaterialMonthOrder valueInvcd amount Add field OK

Material

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount15,00019,00026,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06

Diff1

0-1,0001,000

right mouse button, you can go to a dialog window where you can create calculated fields. Enter a formula name and use the existing data fields and the operators available to create a formula.

By clicking on the


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Filter and Sort Functions

All characteristic values

Hide characteristic values

Choose individual characteristicvalues

Filter key figures byunits

Sort characteristics by values

Sort key figures by values

Filter by highest or lowest n-values of key figures

Filter andsort functions

in a lower . You can sort key figures by their values. However, sorting by key

figures is only possible for the characteristic values of the lowest characteristic in the characteristics sequence.

Pivot tables provide various sort and filter functions:

You can show or hide characteristics values or define them to display only one of the characteristics values at a time.

You can filter key figures by the highest or lowest n values. For example, only the 10 highest values of a key figure are shown for all the characteristic combinations selected.

You can also filter key figures by units. For example, it is possible to build up a list of materials that are managed only as pieces.

You can always sort characteristics by their values. This also applies to characteristicshierarchy level in the table


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Statistics Functions

Material

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06

Pivot Table Wizard

Finish

Order value

Month

MaterialColumn

DataRowMonth

Sum oforder value

Material

Average/Order value

Pivot Table FieldMaterialAutomaticCustomNone

OK

SumNumberAverageMaximumMinimum....

Material

M-01

SumAverageM-02SumAverageTotal

XXL Excel Pivot TableSumorder value15,00020,00035,000 8,75025,00025,00012,50060,000

Month

1998/061998/07

1998/06

Averageorder value 7,50010,00035,000 8,75012,50025,00012,50020,000

Double-click

dow by double-clicking

the totals of all the data relating to a characteristic combination and use the statistics functions already mentioned. For example, it is possible to calculate the average of all data rows for a key figure.

In addition to calculating formulas, Pivot tables provide other statistical functions in lists.

You can define the contents of result lines for a characteristic in a dialog winon the associated field. Result lines of characteristics may contain sums, averages, number, maximum, minimum, standard deviations and other statistical calculations.

For key figures you can list


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Graphics

Graphics types

Column

Bar

Line

Pie

XY (Scatter)

Area

Doughnut

Radar

Surface

Bubble

Stock

Month

1998/071998/081998/09


Ordervalue15,00025,00020,000

Invoicedamount15,00024,00021,000

0

10000

20000

30000

1998/07 1998/08 1998/09

25%33%

42%

1998/071998/081999/09

ls.

When you select an area within a Pivot table and click on the graphics icon, a dialog window appears. System prompts will then help you to create the graphic.

To create graphics for the contents of Pivot tables, you can use the standard Excel graphics too


© SAP AG 1999

Pivot: Creating Pivot Tables from a Pivot Table

Pivot Table WizardExcel database or listExternal data sourceConsolidation areasOther Pivot table

Finish

Pivot Table Wizard

Finish

Order value

Month

Material

Invcd amn

Column

DataRow

Month Order value

Invcd amn

XXL Excel Pivot Table 2

Ordervalue40,00020,000

Invcdamount41,00019,000

Month

1998/061998/07

Material

M-01

M-02


Ordervalue15,00020,00025,000

Invcdamount15,00019,00026,000

Month

1998/061998/071998/06

.....Pivot Tab.Externaldata.....

Data

key figures, but still want to keep your current table, you can generate other Pivot tables on the basis of the original one. This enables you to view the same set of data from two or more perspectives.

If you want to see the data in a Pivot table in another layout and sequence of characteristics and


© SAP AG 1999

Transfer to Excel from Flexible Analysis

Evaluation: Result

Created by H.SmithChars** Material* M-01 04/1998 05/1998 06/1998* M-02

Order value1,100,000 500,000 100,000 180,000 220,000 400,000

The complete Excel functionality is

available

Export to presentation server

Configure export to MS Excel

Open fileParameters for applicationExport only

Program

File name c:\partest.rpw

Word processingHTML format

DBASE formatWK1 format

SpreadsheetExcel

Local file Application server

MaterialM-0104/199805/199806/1998M-02

Excel test.rpwOrder value1,100,000 500,000 100,000 180,000 220,000 400,000

r

ou can hide or show characteristics at all hierarchy levels. You cannot change the sequence of characteristics after the transfer. However, it is possible to change the sequence of key figure columns.

You can also transfer data from flexible analyses to Excel. The data is transferred in Report Writeformat (RPW file). The full standard functionality is available to you in Excel.

After the data has been transferred to Excel, y


Exercises

n Excel Topic: Reporting Data in Excel

Unit: LIS Environment Topic: Standard Analysis Data i

• Display and process LIS data in Excel format.

Management would like to view statistical overviews in Excel format, as is is their usual business practice.

1-1 standard analysis for Vendors in Purchasing organization 1000 for the past year. Use the key figures Order value, Invoiced amount and Order

1-2 Transfer the data to EXCEL as PIVOT Table. Select all characteristics except for

1-3

1-3-1 key figures from columns to rows, so that the key figures are shown against each month in rows. Afterwards, move the key figures back into columns.

1-3-2 s, so y figures are shown against each month in columns. This is

similar to Comparison of Key Figures per Characteristic in flexible analysis.

1-3-3 Column Comparison of

Characteristic per Key Figure in flexible analysis. Afterwards, move the characteristic Month back to the row.

th

Execute a 1000 to 1045

quantity.

Country. Save data in EXCEL, as Group##.

Move the columns and rows within your EXCEL spreadsheet.

Change the position of the Data

Change the position of the characteristics Month from row to columnthat the ke

Change the position of the Data key figures so that the each key figure is displayed per month. This is similar to


1-4 Wizard. An alternative method to moving columns and rows is to use the Pivot Table

olbar enu

4. You can now work in this Pivot

.

The right-hand side of the diagram is the unused area - Characteristics and Key Figures.

1-4-1 Using the Pivot Table Wizard, move Plant onto the Page.

Change the sequence in the Row to Material, Vendor, and Month. Remove Purchasing organization and Material group.

1-4-3 Change the sequence in the Data. The first key figure should be Sum of PO quantity. This is the original key figure Order quantity.

1-5

Create a new field calculated on the basis of Invoiced Amount - Order ue

Select the to Pivot Table. If the toolbar is not visible, use mpath View → Toolbars. Select Pivot Table.

Then use Pivot Table → Wizard, or use the Wizard icon.

The wizard displays step 3 of Table Wizard window.

The diagram consists of:

The first column is the Page.

The second column is the Row

The third column is the Data.

1-4-2

You now require a new calculated key figure Outstanding Invoice Value.

1-5-1 Val .

Exit the Pivot Table Wizard. To return to the standard spreadsheet layout, select Finish.

1-5-2 Using e Pivot Table Wizard, remove all key figures EXCEPT, Sum of and Sum of Outstanding Invoice

alue.

thOrder Value, Sum of Invoiced Amount V


1-6 You need to filter and sort the data, for example, if you want to see only the data for a particular characteristic, or require the top number of materials.

Exit the Pivot Table Wizard. Return to the standard spreadsheet layout.

You want to see the data only for Plant Hamburg. Include this plant in the key figure selection.

-6-2 You want to see the data for Plants Hamburg and Berlin.

-6-3 Display only these plants in rows, before Material.

Select materials based on unit of measure PC. Base this on the key figure Purchase Order Quantity 2

You are interested in the 5 highest order values of materials for each vendor. Afterwards, cancel the filter.

1-6-1

1

1

1-6-4

1-6-5

idth of the Material.

Just click and drag Month outside the range of the spreadsheet. This will remove it to the unused area of the Pivot Table Wizard.

Sort the vendors by order value. Afterwards, cancel the sort.

To have a clearer picture, increase the column w

Additionally, remove the characteristic Month.

1-6-6

rag Plant and Material outside the range of the

spreadsheet. This will remove them to the unused area of the Pivot Table Wizard.

To have a clearer picture, remove the characteristics Plant and Material. Just click and d


1-7 You would now like to see a report with the following layout:

Material (All)

Total order value

Month Total

1997/04 1245722.77

1997/05 2476832.98

1997/06 1110773.91

1997/07 2924277.69

1997/08 112797021.2

1997/09 19763403.65

1997/10 2521296.12

1997/11 2853055.26

1997/12 2512750

1998/01 1468513.31

1998/02 1158577.7

1998/03 0.29

1998/04 1577862.38

Grand total 152410087.2

1-7-1 Construct the layout.

Use the Pivot Table Wizard to easily manipulate your layout.

-7-2 Display a 3-D Column graphical representation of this report.

The previous graphic showed the totals for all materials. Select one material and display this graphically.

1-7-4 Change the text for the graphic, to read the specific material text. Show the legend and the data table.

1

1-7-3


Solutions

n Excel Topic: Reporting Data in Excel

Unit: LIS Environment Topic: Standard Analysis Data i

• Display and process LIS data in Excel format.

Management would like to view statistical overviews in Excel format, as is is their usual business practice.

1-3 standard analysis for Vendors in Purchasing organization 1000 for the past year. Use the key figures Order value, Invoiced amount and Order

ing → Purchasing Information System

Enter the Purchasing organization 1000, Vendors 1000 to 1045 and the period to

The key figures Order value, Invoiced amount, and Order quantity should default

1-4 Transfer the data to EXCEL as PIVOT Table. Select all characteristics except for

rt → Transfer to XXL.

untry.

table".

Choose File → Save as GROUP##.

th

Execute a 1000 to 1045

quantity.


Logistics → Logistics Controll

Standard analyses → Vendor

analyze should be one year. [Execute].

automatically.

Country. Save data in EXCEL, as Group##.

Vendor analysis → Expo

Deselect Cty - Co

Choose [Enter].

Select processing mode "Excel pivot


1-3

1-3-1 key figures from columns to rows, so that the key figures are shown against each month in rows. Afterwards, move the

1-3-2 s, so y figures are shown against each month in columns. This is

similar to Comparison of Key Figures per Characteristic in flexible

1-3-3 Column Comparison of

Characteristic per Key Figure in flexible analysis. Afterwards, move the

onth].

To return, move [Month] under [Material group].

Move the columns and rows within your EXCEL spreadsheet.

Change the position of the Data

key figures back into columns.

Click and drag [Data] to under [Month].

To return to the original position, move [Data] above [Total]. Change the position of the characteristics Month from row to columnthat the ke

analysis.

Click and drag [Month] to in front of [Data]. Change the position of the Data key figures so that the each key figure is displayed per month. This is similar to

characteristic Month back to the row.

Click and drag [Data] and move it to in front of [M


1-4 Wizard. An alternative method to moving columns and rows is to use the Pivot Table

olbar enu

4. You can now work in this Pivot

.

The right-hand side of the diagram is the unused area - Characteristics and Key Figures.

1-4-1 Plant onto the Page.

1-4-2 Change the sequence in the Row to Material, Vendor, and Month. Remove

ed area.

1-4-3 Change the sequence in the Data. The first key figure should be Sum of PO

Click and drag [Sum of PO qty] into the first position.

Select the to Pivot Table. If the toolbar is not visible, use mpath View → Toolbars. Select Pivot Table.

Then use Pivot Table → Wizard, or use the Wizard icon.

The wizard displays step 3 of Table Wizard window.

The diagram consists of:

The first column is the Page.

The second column is the Row

The third column is the Data.

Using the Pivot Table Wizard, move

Click and drag [Plant] to Page.

Press [Finish] to see the result.

Purchasing organization and Material group.

Click and drag [Purchasing organization] to the unus

Click and drag [Material Group] to the unused area.

Click and drag the other characteristics into the correct order.

quantity. This is the original key figure Order quantity.


1-5

Create a new field calculated on the basis of Invoiced Amount - Order ue

You now require a new calculated key figure Outstanding Invoiced Amount.

1-5-1 Val .

Exit the Pivot Table Wizard. To return to the standard spreadsheet layout, select Finish.

mount".

The system automatically formats the field correctly. However, you must

ect Order value.

'Invcd amnt- Order val."

1-5-2 Pivot Table Wizard, remove all key figures EXCEPT, Sum of Order Value, Sum of Invoiced Amount and Sum of Outstanding Invoiced

ed area.

res into the correct sequence.

ress [Finish] to see the result.

Select an existing key figure.

Click the right-hand mouse button.

Select the Insert option.

In the "Insert Calculated Field" window, specify the name of the new key figure name - "Outstanding Invoiced A

Place the cursor in the formula field.

remove the defaulted ‘0’.

Scroll down the list of fields.

Double-click to select Invoiced amount.

Enter a minus sign in the formula field.

Repeat this for the other key figure. Double-click to sel

Ensure the formula reads = '

Select [Add] and then [OK]. Using the

Amount.

Click and drag the key figures not required. Drop into the unus

Click and drag the other key figu

P


1-6 You need to filter and sort the data, for example, if you want to see only the data for a particular characteristic, or require the top number of materials.

Exit from the Pivot Table Wizard. Return to the standard spreadsheet layout.

1-6-1 You want to see the data only for Plant Hamburg. Include this plant in the

In the field adjacent to Plant, you will see (All). Select the downward mn to view all possible plants.

1-6-2 burg and Berlin.

In the "Pivot Table Field" window, click the Plant(s) not required to hide them. Press [OK].

key figure selection.

arrow in this colu

Select Hamburg.

Deselect Hamburg

You want to see the data for Plants Ham

Double-click the characteristic Plant.

Note that this results display will make no reference to the hidden characteristic values!

1-6-3 aterial.

1-6-4 Select materials based on unit of measure PC. Base this on the key figure

Use the Pivot Table Wizard to drag the [PO qty2] field to the [Page]

In the field adjacent to [PO qty2], you will see (All). Select the downward s column to view all possible units of measure.

Select PC.

Display only these plants in rows, before M

Click and drag [Plant] to before Material

Purchase Order Quantity 2

column. Choose Finish to display the results.

arrow in thi


1-6-5 You are interested in the 5 highest order values of materials for each vendor. Afterwards, cancel the filter.

idth of the Material.

Just click and drag Month outside the range of the spreadsheet. This

aracteristic Material. A dialog box will appear.

d show Top 5.

rt.

lect [Manual].

Sort the vendors by order value. Afterwards, cancel the sort.

To have a clearer picture, increase the column w

Additionally, remove the characteristic Month.

will remove it to the unused area of the Pivot Table Wizard.

Double-click the ch

Select [Advanced].

In the AutoShow options, select [Automatic] an

Press [OK] twice, to return to the spreadsheet.

The characteristic [Material] is now shown in blue to indicate so

To remove the filter, double-click the characteristic [Material].

Select [Advanced]. In the AutoShow options, se

Press [OK] twice, to return to the spreadsheet. 1-6-6

rag Plant and Material outside the range of the

spreadsheet. This will remove them to the unused area of the Pivot

aracteristic [Vendor]. A dialog box will appear.

].

elect [Manual].

ress [OK] twice, to return to the spreadsheet.

To have a clearer picture, remove the characteristics Plant and Material. Just click and d

Table Wizard.

Double-click the ch

Select [Advanced].

In the "AutoSort" options, select [Ascending

Change ‘Using field’ to ‘Sum of Order val’.

Press [OK] twice, to return to the spreadsheet.

To remove the sort, double-click the characteristic [Vendor].

Select [Advanced]. In the "AutoSort" options, s

P


1-7 You would now like to see a report with the following layout:

Material (All)

Total order value

Month Total

1997/04 1245722.77

1997/05 2476832.98

1997/06 1110773.91

1997/07 2924277.69

1997/08 112797021.20

1997/09 19763403.65

1997/10 2521296.12

1997/11 2853055.26

1997/12 2512750

1998/01 1468513.31

1998/02 1158577.7

1998/03 0.29

1998/04 1577862.38

Grand total 152410087.2

1-7-1 Construct the layout.

Use the Pivot Table Wizard to easily manipulate your layout.

istics and key figures to the unused area.

].

1-7-2

Select the characteristics of all months and the data for the key figure

Select a 3-D Column. Press [Finish] to see the result.

For ease, move all character

Move [Material] to [Page

Move [Month] to [Row].

Move [Order value] to [Data].

Press [Finish] to see the result. Display a 3-D Column graphical representation of this report.

[Sum of Order Value].

Choose Insert → Chart, or click Chart Wizard.


1-7-3 The previous graphic showed the totals for all materials. Select one material

n to view all possible materials.

1-7-4 Change the text for the graphic, to read the specific material text. Show the

aph outline. Using the right-hand mouse button,

e" field, enter the following values, in a continuous string.

s the material text,

: =Sheet1!B4

d.

If you select another material, the graphic and the legend title will

Click the edge of the graph outline. Using the right-hand mouse button,

ata Table]. Select Show [Data Table].

Press [OK].

and display this graphically.

In the field adjacent to [Material], you will see (All). Select the downward arrow in this colum

Select a material.

legend and the data table.

Click the edge of the grselect [Source Data].

Select the [Series] tab.

In the "Nam

Equal sign

Name of sheet

Exclamation mark

Cell number which contain

For example

Press [OK].

The name of the material should now appear in the title of the legen

change.

select Chart Options.

Select the [D


© SAP AG 1999

Materials Management

Processes inProcurement

LO020 5 days

Inventory ManagementLO510 3 days

Invoice Verification3 daysLO515

Consumption-BasedPlanning andForecasting

LO525 2 days

Procurement ofExternal Services

LO540 2 days

Foreign TradeLO640 3 days

QM in ProcurementLO715 2 days KANBAN

LO235 2 days

Batch ManagementLO955 3 days

Pricing in Purchasing2 days LO521

Cross-FunctionalCustomizing in MM

5 days LO550

Purchasing Details andOptimization

LO520 3 days

Cross-ApplicationBusiness Processes inSD and MM

LO925 2 days

Level 2 Level 3

rd courses in the MM module. e of how many topics are covered in standard courses in the

c 0, TAMM20 & TAMM30:

ycle Counting and Inventory Sampling (TAMM10)

MM20 & TAMM30)

here is no forecast in the academy)

the following courses: LO235, LO640, LO715, LO925. If you are terested in subjects contained in these courses, please visit the relevant courses or the related Advanced Academy” courses.

With the help of this slide you may inform yourself about the standaFurthermor you are able to get an ideaTeamSAP A ademy courses TAMM1

LO020: all subjects (TAMM10)

LO510: all subjects (TAMM10, special unit in TAMM30)

LO511: Physical Inventory: Overview, C

LO515: nearly all subjects (TAMM30)

LO520: all subjects (TAMM10, some specials in TA

LO521: overview & important details (TAMM30)

LO525: ca. 60 % (TAMM10, t

LO540: ca. 60 % (TAMM20)

LO550: all subjects (TAMM30)

LO955: overview & important details (TAMM30)

Not covered in the academy are in“


© SAP AG 1999

Financial Accounting

Financial Accountingand Reporting

AC010 5 days Real EstateManagement

AC290 5 days

Asset AccountingAC305 4 days

Special Purpose LedgerAC220 5 days

Human Resources

HR050 5 days

Funds Management:Processes, Organizationand Configuration

AC700 5 days

EC-CS:Consolidation Functions

AC660 5 days

FI-LC:Consolidation Functions

*AC240 5 days

R/3 For Auditors

**AC900 4 days

Inflation Accounting

CA550 3 days

Level 3Level 2C

onsolidation

Financial ClosingAC205 2 days

Additional FinancialFunctionality

AC260 2 days General Ledger/Accounts Payable/Accounts ReceivableConfiguration

AC200 5 days

Travel ManagementTravel Expenses

AC270 3 days Travel ManagementTravel Planning

AC275 1 day

** from July 2000 on


© SAP AG 1999

Controlling

Cost Managementand Controlling

AC040 5 days

Cost CenterAccounting

AC410 3 days

Product Cost PlanningAC505 3 days

Profitability AnalysisAC605 5 days

Profit CenterAccounting

AC610 2 days

Executive InformationSystem (EIS) 1 -Reporting

AC615 2 days

Level 2 Level 3

Cost CenterAccounting:Extended Functionality

AC412 2 days

Activity Based CostingAC420 2 days

Cost Object Controllingfor Products

AC510 3 days

Transfer PricesAC650 2 days

Executive InformationSystem (EIS) - Settingup the System

AC620 2 days

Overhead OrdersAC415 2 days

Cost Object Controllingfor Sales Orders

AC515 3 days

Actual Costing /Material Ledger

AC530 2 days

Executive InformationSystem (EIS) 3 -Business Planning

AC625 1 day


© SAP AG 1999

Human Resources 4.6 (1)

Level 3Level 2

Human Resources

HR050 5 days

Employee Self ServiceHR250 3 days

OrganizationalManagement

HR505 3 days

Travel ManagementTravel Expenses

AC270 3 days

CompensationManagement

HR540 3 days

Reporting inHR

HR580 3 days

Training and EventManagement

HR515 3 days

Time EvaluationHR310/311 5 days

Configuration ofMaster Data

HR305 3 days

Configuration of TimeRecording

HR306 3 days

BenefitsAdministration

HR325 3 days

RecruitmentHR315 3 days

seeHR2

Configuration of HRSystem Controls

HR307 2 days

Programming in HR

HR350 5 days

Technical Topics inHuman Resources

HR530 3 days

CATS The CrossApplication Time Sheet

CA500 2 days

PersonnelDevelopment

HR510 3 days


© SAP AG 1999

Human Resources 4.6 (2)

Human Resources

HR050 5 days

Payroll Reporting(Country-Specific)

HR7xx 2 days

Level 2 Level 3

Payroll Configuration

HR400 5 days

Country-SpecificPayroll

HR4xx 3 days

Configuration ofMaster Data

HR305 3 days Introductionto Payroll

HR390 2 days


© SAP AG 1999

Logistics Execution

Transportation

LO611 3 days

Processes inLogistics Execution

LO140 3 days

Level 2 Level 3

Additional Topics inWarehouseManagement

LO531 3 days

Shipping

LO610 2 days Cross-FunctionalCustomizing in SD

LO650 3 days

WarehouseManagement

LO530 3 days


© SAP AG 1999


Level 2 Level 3

Processes in Salesand Distribution

LO150 5 days

ShippingLO610 2 days

Pricing in SDLO620 3 days

TransportationLO611 2 days

Foreign TradeLO640 3 days

Credit and ReceivablesRisk Management

LO645 2 days

Cross-ApplicationBusiness Processesin SD and MM

LO925 2 days

SalesLO605 4 days

Sales SupportLO604 1 day

Sales WorkshopLO606 1 day

Cross-FunctionalCustomizing in SD

LO650 3 days

BillingLO615 2 days


© SAP AG 1999

Production Planning

Level 2 Level 3

ManufacturingPlanning &Execution forDiscrete & Repetitive

LO050 5 days

EngineeringChangeManagement

LO980 3 days

BatchManagement

LO955 3 days

KANBAN

LO235 2 days

Classification

LO985 3 days Special Features ofLIS in Production

LO275 2 days

Logistics InfoPlanning

LO935 2 days

CAP Calculation ofStandard Values

LO720 2 days RepetitiveManufacturing

LO225 3 days

Capacity Planning

LO230 5 days

LogisticsInformationSystem (LIS)Reporting

LO930 2 days

Basic DataPart 2

LO206 3 days Basic Data forDiscreteManufacturing

LO205 3 days

ProductionOrders

LO215 5 days

ProductionPlanning

LO210 5 days

VariantConfiguration Part 1

LO990 5 days VariantConfiguration Part 2

LO991 3 days


© SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Controlling

Cost Managementand Controlling

AC040 5 days

Financial Accountingand Reporting

AC010 5 days

Profit CenterAccounting

AC610 2 days

EC-CS: ConsolidationFunctions

AC660 5 days

Financial ClosingAC205 2 days

E C - E I S:Executive Information System

E C - B P:Business Planning

E C - P C A: Profit Center Accounting

Level 3

Special PurposeLedger

AC220 5 days

E C - C S: ConsolidationConsolidation ofInvestments

Executive InformationSystem (EIS) 3 -Business Planning

AC625 1 day Executive InformationSystem (EIS) 1 -Reporting

AC615 2 days

Level 2

Enterprise Controlling Financial AccountingControlling

Executive InformationSystem (EIS) 2 -Setting up the System

AC620 2 days

EC-CS: IntegrationAC665 3 days


Frequently-used Menu Paths

LO020 4.6 Processes in Procurement Activity Menu Path Master Data: Material master: Create material

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create (Special)

Material master: ls Management Create material (alternative)

Logistics → Materia → Material Master → Material → Create (General) → Immediately

Material master: Display material

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current

Material master: Change material

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately

Material master: Extend material view

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Other → Extend Material View(s)

Material master: tions Enter storage loca

collectively:

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Other → Enter Storage Locations

Material master: Materials list

Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Other → Materials List

Material master: ments

ls Management → Active Change docu

Logistics → Materia → Material Master → Material → Display Changes Changes

Info record: Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management →Purchasing → Master Data → Info Record → …

Vendor (all data) → Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management →Purchasing → Master Data → VendorCentral→ …

Vendor (purchasing data) → Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management →Purchasing → Master Data → VendorPurchasing → …

Conditions by vendor ent → Logistics → Materials ManagemPurchasing Master Data → Conditions → Discounts/Surcharges → By Vendor

Service master Logistics → Materials Management → Service Master → Service → Service Master

Service conditions for service l

Logistics → Materia s Management → Service Master → Service → Service Conditions → ForService → Display

Service conditions for vendor without plant

Logistics → Materials Management → Service Master → Service → Service Conditions → ForVendor Without Plant → Display


Activity Menu Path Service conditions for vendor with plant

Logistics → Materials Management → Service Master → Service → Service Conditions → For Vendor with Plant → Display

Documents: Purchase requisition: Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requisition → …

RFQ: Create Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → Request for Quotation → Create

Quotation: Maintain Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → Quotation → Maintain

Price comparison Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → →Price Comparison

RFQ/Quotation Quotation →

RFQ / Rejection: ement → Issue message

Logistics → Materials ManagPurchasing RFQ/Quotation → Request for Quotation → Messages → Print/Transmit

Purchase order: Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known

Purchase requisition / Purchase order: Assign and process

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requisition → Follow-On Functions → Assign and Process

Create purchase order ollow-

a Purchase Requisitions

automatically Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requistion → FOn Functions → Create Purchase Order → Automatically vi

Purchase oIssue message

rder:

nt/Transmit

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Messages → Pri

Contract: Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Outline Agreement → Contra...

ct →

Shipping notification: Create / Change / Display

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Inbound Delivery → ...

Enter goods receipt Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order

Enter transfer posting y ovement → Transfer

Logistics → Materials Management → InventorManagement → Goods MPosting

Enter service Logistics → Materials Management → Service


Activity Menu Path Entry Sheet → Maintain

Enter invoice Logistics → Materials Management → Invoice Verification → Logistics Invoice Verification → Document Entry → Enter Invoice

Evaluated receipt settlement (ERS)

v ice →

→ Execute ERS

Logistics → Materials Management → In oVerification → Logistics Invoice Verification Further Processing

Single plan terials Management → Materials →

ning run Logistics → MaRequirements Planning (MRP) → MRPPlanning → Single-Item, Single-Level

List Displays, Reporting and Information

List display: Prequisitions

urchase Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Requisition → List Displays

List display: Purchase orders Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → List Displays

List display: RFQ / Quotation

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → Request for Quotation → List Displays

List display: Info records Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing→ Master Data → Info Record → List Displays → …

List display: Goods receipts → Materials Management → Inventory Logistics Management → Environment → List Displays → Material Documents

Stock overview nagement → Inventory → Stock

Logistics → Materials MaManagement → Environment → Stock Overview

Stock/requirements list ory Stock

Logistics → Materials Management → InventManagement → Environment → → Stock/Requirements List

Purchasing group analysis →

In Standard → Purchasing group

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Reporting Purchasing formation System →analyses

Analysis of storage location Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Inventory Controlling → Standard analyses → Storage location


Frequently-used Menu Paths Activity Menu Path Master Data: Material Master Record Logistics→Materials M

Master→Material→Create/Change/Display anagement→Material

Purchasing Info Record →Info

Logistics→Materials →Master dataManagement→Purchasing

record→Create/Change/Display Vendor Master Record

→Purchasingndor→Purchasing/Central→Create/Ch

Logistics→Materials Management →Master data→Veange/ Display

Source List Master

Logistics→Materials asing→Management→Purch

data→Source list→Maintain Quota Arrangement

g→Master data→Quota Logistics→Materials

hasinManagement→Purcarrangement→Maintain

Classification Logistics→Central Functions→Classification→Master data

Mass Maintenance aintenance→Dialog

Logistics→Central Functions→Mass Maintenance→Mass mprocessing

Vendor Evaluation Maintain g→

Logistics→Materials asin Master Management→Purch

data→Vendor evaluation→Maintain Vendor Evaluation Automatic New Evaluation

data→Vendor evaluation→Autom. new evaluation

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Master

Documents: Purchase Order

nt known

Logistics→Materials asing→Purchase Management→Purch

order→Create→Vendor/supplying plaContracts

asLogistics→Materials

ing→Outline Management→Purchagreement→Contract→Create

Scheduling Agreement Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Outline

g agreement→Schedulinagreement→Create→Vendor known

Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule

elivery

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Outline agreement→Scheduling agreement→Dschedule→Maintain


Purchase Requisition Logistics→Materials Management→ Purchasing→Requisition→Create

Purchase Order with Source Determination

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Purchase order→Create→Vendor unknown

Process Assigned Purchase Requisitions

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Purc ase order→Create→Via req. assgt. list

h

Assign and Process Purchase Requisitions

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→ Requisition→Follow on functions→Assign andprocess

Invoicing Plan: AutomSettlement

atic anagement→Invoice e

Invoicing

Logistics→Materials MVerification→Logistics InvoicVerification→Further processing→plan

Release of Purchase Requisitions

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→ Requisition→Release→Individual release/Collective release

Automatic Generation of Purchase Orders

Logistics→Materials Management→ Purchasing→ Requisition→Follow on functions→Create purchase order→Automat. via PReqs

Reports/Analyses Purchase Order Lists Logistics→Materials

Management→Purchasing→Purchase order→List displays→By vendor/By materials

Purchase Requisition Lists Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→ Requisition→List displays→General

Info Records Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Master drecord→List displays→By vendo

ata→Info r/By material

Vendor Evaluation Ranking List

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Master data→Vendor evaluation→List displays→Ranking lists

Vendor Evaluation: Evaluation per

roup

Logistics→Materials Management→Purchasing→Master data→Vendor evaluation→List displays→Evalns. per mat./gp.

Material/Material G


Customizing: All menu paths begin with: ToolsProjec

→AcceleratedSAP→Customizing→Edit Materials Management→Purchasing t→SAP Reference IMG→

Release Creation Profile for Scheduling Agreements

Scheduling Agreement→Maint. Rel. creation profile for Sched. Agmt w. Rel. Docu.

Regular Vendor Source Determination→Define Regular Vendor

User Parameter EVO ult Values for s

Environment Data→Define DefaBuyers→Settings for Default Value

User Parameter EFB Authorization Management→Define Function Authorizations for Buyers→Function Authorizations: Purchase Order

Invoicing Plan Purchase Order→Invoicing Plan

Release Procedures Requisitions

for n→Release Procedure Purchase Requisitio

Release Procedures for Purchase Orders

Purchase Order→Define Release Procedure

Vendor Evaluation Vendor Evaluation

Manufacturer Parts Profile Material Master→Define Manufacturer Part Profile


Menu paths for LO510

Goods movement oods issue / Stock transfer /

Transfer posting

ocuments Reservation / Purchase order / Invoice / Material document

ipeline Goods issue from pipeline / Pipeline liabilities

Consignment consignment stores / Consignment liabilities / Display vendor consignment stock / Display vendor consignment liabilities

Transfer posting to stock with subcontractor / SC stocks per vendor / Subsequent adjustment

aster data Info record / Material master record / Bill of material

Reports document for posting date /

Consumption statistics / Warehouse material / Reservations for material / Reason for movement

Goods receipt / G

D

P

Transfer posting consignment to own / Goods issue from

Subcontracting

M

Stock overview / Material documents for material / Current stock/requirements list / Material


Goods movement

Goods receipt Logistics Materials management Inventory management Goods movement Goods receipt

Purchase order

(movement type 101) (transaction MB01)

n

(movement type 101) (transaction MB0A)

GR blocked stock PO number known

(movement type 103)

Blocked stock ment type 101). To post the material to blocked stock, choose „S“ in the field marked T (stock type).

Quality insp. stock ber known (Movement type 101). To post the material to quality inspection stock, choose „X“ in the field marked T (stock type).

Init. entry of st. bals choose movement type Receipt Init.stck entry (own) To unrestricted (movement

enu, choose movement type To unrestricted (movement type

561) (transaction MB1C)

For Purchase order PO number known

For purchase order PO number unknow

For Purchase Order

For Purchase order PO number known (move

For Purchase order PO num

Choose Others. From the menu,

type 561) (transaction MB1C)

Choose Others. From the mReceipt Init.stck entry (ext)


Goods issue Logistics Materials management Inventory management Goods movement Goods issue (transaction MB1A)

Goods issue to a cost center Movement type Consumption To cost center From warehouse (movement type 201)

Issue to sampling Movement type Issue To sampling From unrestricted (movement type 333)

Movement type Issue To sampling From qual. inspection (movement type 331)

Movement type Issue To sampling From blocked (movement type 335)

p Movement type Issue To scrap From unrestricted (movement type 551)

Movement type Issue To scrap From qual. inspection (movement type 553)

Movement type Issue To scrap From blocked (movement type 555)

Issue to scra

Stock transfer Logistics Materials management Inventory management Goods movement Transfer posting (transaction MB1B)

plant

One-step procedure Rem. fm/pl. in storage (movement type 301)

)

Two-step proc. (step 2) Pl. in stor. in plant (movement type 305)

Stor. loc. to stor. loc. Movement type Transfer posting Stor. loc to stor. loc.

Plant to plant Movement type Transfer posting Plant to

Two-step proc. (step 1) Rem. fm stor. to plant (movement type 303


One-step procedure Unrestr. to unrestr. (movement type 311)

3)

Two-step proc. (step 2) Pl. in storage SLoc (movement type 315)

ransfer posting

Material to material Movement type Transfer posting Material to

Stock to stock Movement type Transfer posting Stock to stock

Movement type Transfer posting Stock to stock QI to unrestricted (movement type 321)

ocuments

eservation Logistics Materials management Inventory management Reservation

Create Reservation Create (transaction MB21)

Change Reservation Change (transaction MB22)

isplay Reservation Display (transaction MB23)

anage Reservation Manage (transaction MBVR)

For material Reservation For material (transaction MB24)

Two-step proc. (step 1) Rem. fm. storage SLoc (movement type 31

T

material (movement type 309)

Blocked to unrestr. (movement type 343)

D

R

D

M


Purchase order Logistics Materials management Purchasing Purchase order

saction ME27)

Display Purchase order Display (transaction ME23)

PO statistics Logistics Materials management Purchasing Purchase

order Display. Then choose Item Statistics General

PO history Logistics Materials management Purchasing Purchase

nvoice Logistics Materials management Invoice verification Invoice verification

Create Document entry Enter invoice (transaction MRHR)

Display Further processing Display (transaction MR03)

at. doc. Logistics Materials management Inventory management

isplay Material document Display (transaction MR03)

hange Material document Change (transaction MR02)

Cancel Material document Cancel/reverse (transaction MBST)

Create Purchase order Create Stock transfer (tran

Change Purchase order Change (transaction ME22)

order Display. Then choose Item Statistics PO history

I

M

Material document

D

C


Pipeline

oods issue from pipeline Movement type Consumption To cost center From pipeline (movement type 201) (transaction MB1A )

Pipeline liabilities agement Invoice verification Invoice verification Further processing Settle cons./pipe. liabs (transaction MRKO)

G

Logistics Materials man


Consignment

Logistics Materials management Inventory management Goods movement Transfer posting. From the menu, choose movement typeTransfer

Transfer of consignment stock

posting Vendor consignment QI to

unrestricted (movement type 321) (transaction MB1B)

type

endor consignment Consignment to own (movement type 403) (transaction MB1B)

Goods issue from consignment stock ntory e.

Consumption To cost center From consgt. stores (movement type 201) (transaction MB1A)

Settle consignment liabilities oice verification Further

processing Settle cons./pipe. liabilities (transaction MRKO)

Display vendor consignment stock nt Environment Stock

(transaction MB54)

Display consignment liabilities ironment

Liability (transaction MRKO)

Logistics Materials management Inventory management Goods movement Transferposting. From the menu, choose movement Transfer posting V

Logistics Materials management Invemanagement Goods movement Goods issuFrom the menu, choose movement type

Logistics Materials management Invverification Invoice

Inventory ManagemeConsignment Consgnmt from vendor

Inventory management EnvConsignment Consgnmt from vendor


Subcontracting

Transfer posting to subcontractor ry

ansfer posting Stck w. subcontract. From unrestricted (movement type 541) (transaction MB1B)

SC stocks per vendor ls management Purchasing Purchase order Reporting SC stocks per vendor (transaction ME20)

Subsequent adjustment management Goods movement Subsequent adjustment Subcontracting (transaction MB04)

aster data

Logistics Materials management Inventomanagement Goods movement Transfer posting Movement type Tr

Logistics Materia

Logistics Materials management Inventory

M

rds Logistics anagement Purchasing Master data Info record

Create Info record Create (transaction ME11)

Display Info record Create (transaction ME12)

Change Info record Change (transaction ME13)

Material

Create Create (general) Immediately (transaction MMR1)

Change Change Immediately (transaction MM02)

Display Display Display current (transaction MM03)

Materials mInfo reco

Material master Logistics Materials management Material master


Bill of material Logistics Production Master data Bills of material Bill of material Material BOM Display (transaction CS03)

Reports

ls management Inventory management Environment

tock overview Stock Stock overview (transaction MMBE)

Material documents for material List displays Mat. doc. for material (transaction MB51)

List dis Reason for movement (transaction MBGR)

tock/requirements list Stock Stock/rqmts. list (transaction MD04)

Material documents for posting date List displays Mat. doc. f. postg. date (transaction MD59)

Environment Stock Warehouse stock (transaction MD52)

Logistics Materia

S

plays Reason for movement

S

Warehouse stock


Consumption

terial Choose the Extras pushbutton, (then click on the right arrow to scroll along to the Consumption option) Consumption (transaction MMBE)

Consumption plant. Choose DD in

the „scope of list“ box. Place the cursor on the plant line and choose the „ consumption values“ pushbutton (transaction CO09).

statistics from stock overview: Create a stock overview and place the cursor on the plant line. Then choose Extras Display ma

statistics from plant stock availability: Call up the plant stock availability for a material and a


Menupath Procurement of Ext ices ernal Serv

Activity Menu Path Master Data: Service Master Record → Service Logistics → Materials management

master → Service → Service master

Service Master Conditions without Vendor

iace → Service conditions → For

Logistics → Mater ls management → Service master → Serviservice → Add

Service Master Conditions with Vendor → For

Logistics → Materials management → Service master → Service → Service conditions vendor without plant → Add

Service Master Conditions with Vendor and Plant → → For

Logistics → Materials management → Service master → Service Service conditions vendor with plant → Add

Model Service Specification Service

Logistics → Materials management →master → Model service specification → Create

Standard Service Catalog reate

Logistics → Materials management → Service master → Standard service catalog → C

Vendor, Change → →

Purchasing → Change (current)

Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing Master data → Vendor

Documents: Purchase Requisition Logistics → Materials management →

Purchasing → Requisition → Create Purchase Requisition, Automatic

utomat.

Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → Requisition → Follow-on functions → Create purchase order → Avia PReqs

Purchase Requisition, Assign and Process

Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → Requisition → Follow onfunctions → Assign and process

Request for Quotation (RFQ) Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → RFQ → Create

Quotation ation →

Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → QuotMaintain

Quotation, Price Comparison Purchasing → RFQ/Quotation → Quotation → Logistics → Materials management →

Price comparison


Purchase Order Logistics → Materials Management → Purchas → →ing → Purchase order Create Vendor/supplying plant known

Contract Logistics → Materials Management → → → Contract → Purchasing Outline agreement

Create

Service Entry Sheet Logistics → Materials Management → Service entry sheet → Maintain

Invoice Verification Logistics → Materials management → InvoiVerification → Logistics invoice verification → Document entry → Enter invoic

ce

e

PM Maintenance Plan Logistics → Plant maintenance → Planned maintenanc → Maintenance planning →e

lanMaintenance plans → Create → Single cycle p

PM Maintenance Order e → Create (General)

Logistics → Plant Maintenance → Maintenancprocessing → Order

PS Network Logistics → Project System → Basic Data → Project → Special Maintenance functions → Network → Change

SM Orders processing → Order → Service order → Change Logistics → Customer service → Service

Time Sheets Human Resources → Time Management → Time sheet → Time data → Enter times

Reports and Lists: Service Master Lists → Service

→ Service → Service list Logistics → Materials management master

Standard Service Catalog List Logistics → Materials management → Service Master → Standard Service Catalog → List Display

Invoicing Plans Report, → →Create Invoices

Logistics Materials management Invoice verification → Logistics invoice verification → Further processing → Invoicing plan

ERS Report, Create Invoices → Invoice ification →

Logistics → Materials management Verification → Logistics invoice verFurther processing → Execute ERS

Service Entry Sheets, → Service Collective Release

Logistics → Materials Management Entry Sheet → Collective Release

Service Entry Sheets, Data Logistics → Materials Manage ent → Service m


Transfer Entry Sheet → Data Transfer . . .

Purchase Order Lists by External Service

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → List displays External service → by service

→

Purchase Order External Services, Planned vs. Actual

Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase order → List displays → External service → Planned/actual comp.

Service Entry Sheets Lists Logistics → Materials Management → Service entry sheet → List Analyses → Entry sheets for purchase order

Customizing: All menu paths begin with: TSAP reference IMG

ools → Acce it Project → → Materials management

leratedSAP → Customizing → Ed

Service Master: Service Categories, number ranges,

Service →

field display

Service Master . . .

Screen Layout for Services in Documents

Service → Define Screen Layout

Sources for Assignment, ervice → Source Determination & Default Automatic PO

SValue → For Client.

Define Condition Schemas … S or Services ervice → Maintain Conditions f

Formulas, Define ervice → Formulas for quantity determination S→ Define Formulas.

Formulas, Variables Service → Formulas for quantity determination → Specify names for Formulas

Account Assignment Categories and Item Categories

Purchasing → Account Assignment → Define combination…

Service Entry Sheet Release Procedure

Service → Define Release Procedure for External Services.


© SAP AG 1999

Contents:

Others

Material Master Tables

The Full-Cycle SAP B2B Procurement Solution

SAP B2B Procurement Architecture


© SAP AG 1999

MARA

MARC

MAKT MARM MVKE MLAN

MLGN

MARD

MLGT

MEAN MBEW

MAPRMVER

Material Master - Table Structure

MAKT

y umber) data

storage type tion

MVER Consumption data MAPR Forecast data (pointer)

The individual tables contain the following data:MARA General data

Descriptions/short texts MARM Conversion factors MVKE Sales data per sales organization MLAN Sales data per countrMEAN EAN (European Article NMBEW Valuation data MARC Material data per plant MLGN Material data per WM warehouse

MLGT Material data per WMMARD Material data per storage loca


© SAP AG 1999

• Creation and editing ofrequisitions, purchaseorders, and reservations

• Approval and rejection ofrequisitions and purchaseorders

• Status and tracking ofrequisitions, purchaseorders, and reservations

• Desktop receiving andservice entry support

• Invoicing• Reporting

Steps of the SAP B2B Procurement Solution

The Full-Cycle SAP B2B Procurement Solution

costs, and reduces cycle-time. Unlike current best-of-

anages all the steps

nd reservations

rders and reservations

ceiving and service entry support

ier based

t Card interface

GUI as part of EnjoySAP Initiative, by FROG Design.

SAP BBP handles all the processes associated with the procurement of maintenance, repair and operations (MRO) of both goods and services. It effectively organizes and automates MRO purchasing by moving the buying process to the corporate employee’s desktop. This improves orderaccuracy, allows process transparency, cutsbreed solutions that only handle certain isolated tasks, the SAP BBP solution mwithin the requisition-to-payment process:

Creation and maintenance of requisitions, purchase orders a

Approval and rejection of requisitions and purchase orders

Status and tracking of requisitions, purchase o

Desktop re

Invoicing

- Suppl

- ERS

Procuremen

Reporting


© SAP AG 1999

Built upon R/3 core PurchasingfunctionalityIncorporates SAP BusinessWorkflowCommunicates with one of thefollowing R/3

R/3 Release 3.1HR/3 Release 4.0BR/3 Release 4.5A

Based on R/3 Release 4.5 nucleusBuilt using the SAP ITS technology

SAP B2B Proc.

R/3 Rel. 4.0B

R/3 Rel. 4.0B

R/3 Rel. 3.1H

R/3 Rel. 3.1H

Non

R/3

Non

R/3

R/3 Rel. 4.5A

R/3 Rel. 4.5A

SAP B2B Procurement Architecture

ive.

nd interfaces

BAPIs for realtime cross enterprise supplier integration based on XML technology.

Solution delivered as part of SAP SCM initiat

First Customer Shipment (FCS) in Q4/1998.

Based on R/3 core purchasing functionality and SAP Business Workflow.

Based on open scalable SAP Business Framework architecture for component design a